PONTIAC FIERO 2.

8
MANUAL DE TALLER

TOMO 2:
ESQUEMAS ELÉCTRICOS
l_::,..._

ACCESORIOS (by ManU) ..

-
- ---
-

','
''
'
''
....-
....
•

-----
=-=
•
�

¡
CONTENTS m
:xi
o
SECTIONSA
ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS
FIERO
Cell Cell
1 lndex 65 A.ir Conditioning: A.ir Delivery C60
2 Introduction 77 Warnings and Alarms: Chime
3 Symbols 80 Instrument Panel: lndicators Cluster
4 Troubleshooting Procedures 90 Wiper/Washer
5 Repair Procedures 91 Wlper/Washer:Pulse
10 Power Distribution 100 Headlights
11 Fuse Block Details 102 Headlight Doors
12 Light Switch Details 110 Exterior Lights
14 Ground Distribution 112 Back Up Lights
20 Electronic Fuel Injection: L4 YIN R 114 Interior Lights
21 Multi-port Fuel Injection: V6 VIN 9 117 Interior Lights Dimming
30 Starter and Charging System 120 Power Windows
31 Coolant Fans 130 Power Door Locks
33 Vehicle Speed Sensor 134 'I'run.k Release
34 Cruise Control 141 Power Remote Mirrors
40 Horns 150 Radio
41 Brake Warning System 201 Component Location Views
60 Heater 202 Harness Connector Faces
61 Rear Defogger 203 Harness Routing Views
62 Air Condition.ing; System Check
63 Air Conditioning: Blower Controls C60
64 Air Conditioning: Compressor Controls C60

CD
)>
1
o
o
2
-1
m
2
-1
en

INDEX
Page
Air Conditioning
Air Delivery
Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65-0
Blower Controls
Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63-0
Compressor Controls
Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64-0
System Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62-0
Alarms (Audible)
Chime ......................... 77-0
Brakes
Warning System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-0
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-0
Cigar Lighter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 114-0
Circuit Breaker Details
PWR/ACC Circuit Breaker. . . . . . .. 11-1
WDO Circuit Breaker. . . . . . . . . . . .. 11-1
Component Location Views. . . . . . . .. 201-0
Connectors (Harness Connector Faces) 202-0
C100 ......................... 202-0
C500 ......................... 202-1
Junction Block C200 ............ 202-2
Coolant Fan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-0
Cruise Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-0
Defogger (Rear). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61-0
Digital Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 150-0
Door Locks (Power). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 130-0
Engine Control
Electronic Fuel Injection (V IN R) . .. 20-0
Multi-port Fuel Injection (V IN 9) . .. 21-0
Fuse Block Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-0
Fuse Details
BAT Fuse ...................... 11-3
CTSY/LID Fuse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 11-1
Page
ECM IGN Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 11-2
FAN E Fuse .................... 11-3
GAGES Fuse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 11-2
STOP HAZ Fuse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 11-3
TAIL Fuse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 11-1
TBI INJ1 Fuse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 11-2
TBI INJ2 Fuse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 11-2
TURN B/u Fuse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 11-2
Ground Distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-0
Harness Routing Views .... -" . . . . . .. 203-0
Heater. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-0
Horns.... ....................... 40-0
Indicators
Indicators Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-0
AJAR ......................... 80-2
BRAKE ....................... 80-0
CHARG E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 80-3
COOLANT TEMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 80-0
FASTEN BELTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 80-1
Hi Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 80-1
SERVICE ENG INE SOON . . . . . .. 80-1
UPSHIFT Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . .. 80-0
'I'urn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 80-1
VOLTMETER .................. 80-3
OIL PRESSURE ................ 80-3
Instrument Panel
Indicators Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-0
Interior Lights Dimming. . . . . . . . . .. 117-0
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-0
Lights (Exterior)
Back Up ...................... 112-0
Front Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 110-0
Front Park. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 110-0
Hazard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 110-0
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 100-0
Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 102-0
00
l>
I
...a
Page o
I
High Level Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 110-0
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 110-3
Park .......................... 110-0
Rear Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 110-3
Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . .. 110-1
Tail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 110-3
'I'urn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 110-0
Lights (Interior)
Ashtray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 114-1
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 114-0
Dome ......................... 114-0
Instrument Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 117-1
Lights Dimming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 117-0
Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 117-1
Reading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 114-0
Trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 114-0
Underhood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 114-1
Light Switch Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-0
Mirrors (Power) ................... 141-0
Power Distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-0
Radio
Amplified Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . .. 150-1
AM/FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 150-0
Mono ......................... 150-2
Stereo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 150-2
Repair Procedures .................. 5-0
Starter System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-0
Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-0
Troubleshooting Procedures . . . . . . . . .. 4-0
Trunk Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 134-0
Vehicle Speed Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-0
Warnings (Audible)
Chime ......................... 77-0
Windows (Power) .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 120-0
Wiper/Washer
With Pulse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91-0 "TI
iii
Without Pulse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-0 2J
o
INTRODUCTION
DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
This manual contains the following kinds of
diagnostic information:
• Electrical Schematics
• Component Location Lists
• Harness Connector Faces
• Troubleshooting Hints
• System Checks
• System Diagnosis
• Circuit Operation Descriptions
• Harness Routing Views
U sing these elements together will make elec-
trical troubleshooting faster and easier. Each
element is described below. .
The Electrical Schematic should always be
your starting point in using this Electrical
Troubleshooting Manual. The schematic shows
the electrical current paths when a circuit is
operating properly. It is essential to under-
stand how a circuit should work before trying to
figure out why it doesn't.
The Harness Connector Faces show the cav-
ity or terminal locations in all the multi-pin
connectors shown in the schematic. Together
with the wire colors and terminals given in the
schematic, they help you locate test points. The
drawings show the connector faces you see
after the harness connector has been discon-
nected from a component. When more than one
connector is connected to a component the con-
nectors are all shown together. Both halves of
in-line connectors are shown together.
The Troubleshooting Hints offer short-cuts
or checks to help you determine the cause of a
complaint. They are not intended to be a rigid
procedure for solving an electrical situation.
Rather, Troubleshooting Hints represent a
common-sense approach, based on an under-
standing of the circuit.
The System Check gives a summary of how
the circuit should be operated and what should
happen. This is especially important when you
are working on a new system. The System
Check will help you identify symptoms, lead
you to diagnosis and confirm the system after
repair.
The System Diagnosis provides a procedure
to follow that will locate the condition in a cir-
cuit. If your own knowledge of the system and
the Troubleshooting Hints have not produced a
quick fix, follow the System Diagnosis. All pro-
cedures are based on symptoms to assist you in
locating the condition as fast as possible.
The Circuit Operation, will help you under-
stand the circuit. It describes the components
and how the circuit works.
The Component Location List helps you find
where the parts of the circuit are in the vehicle.
A brief statement of the location is given and
also a reference to a drawing that shows the
component and its connecting wires. These
Component Location Views are in section 20l.
Harness Routing Views are found in cell 203.
These views show the routing of the major wir-
ing harnesses and the in-line connectors
between the major harnesses. These views will
make troubleshooting easier when you are not
sure about harness routing.
00
l>
I
N
PAGE NUMBER
o
This section is organized into cells with most
cells containing a circuit schematic and the text
for that circuit. This makes the section easy to
use, since the page number for a schematic will
normally stay the same year after year, and it
will also be the same in all the G M publications
about that circuit. For example, ~he Cruise Con-
trol schematic will always be the first pages of
cell 34. The other information for Cruise Con-
trol follows them and is paged 34-2, 34-3, etc.
Some cells may have more than one circuit
schematic, such as power distribution, interior
. lights, and air conditioning. The circuit you
want can either be located by using the index, or
by a quick look through the related cell.
All the engine circuits for a particular engine
VIN type are in the same cell. This makes that
cell easy to use, since schematics for other cars
are not in your way. The instrument panel sche-
matics are organized similarly. If you are work-
ing on a car with a Digital Cluster, only the
schematics that apply to that car's Digital
Cluster will be in the cell you use. Information
on the Indicators and Gages Clusters will be in
other cells.
m
r
m
CJ
-t
::IJ
c=;
l>
r
o
l>
"
2
o
CJ)
en
INTRODUCTION m
r-
m
(")
-t
::g
c=;
SCHEMATICS »
HORN r-
These schematics break the entire electrical HOT AT All TIMES C
system down into individual circuits. You are p- ---------., FUSE i>
C>
not distracted by wiring which is not part of I CLK/CIG FUSE I BLOCK z
the circuit you're working on.
I
I
20 AMP
I
I oen
IL_ _ ________ ..1I
I t is important to realize that no attempt is
en
made on the schematic to represent compo- lORN 40
nents and wiring as they physically appear on SEE FUSE
the car. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is S212 . - - - . BLOCK DETAILS

I,___~~~'!AfI:_________________.I""""'"
treated no differently in a schematic from one
which is only a few inches long. The number of
cavities for each connector is listed in the Com-

."'" I
ponent Location List. Similarly, switches and I I!!.!!!!!'!
IQ:mm_m:/~
I 1 I CENTER
other components are shown as simply as pos-
sible, with regard to function only.

t---t:-----;:::N ~--------J
The following example shows how to read a
Horn schematic, see figure 1. Locate the Horn
schematic using the Index. The circuit sche- .35 BLK 28

matic will look somewhat like the. one to the Gl Cl00

G C201
right. The schematic is read from top to bot- 1 OK GRN 29
tom. 1 OK GRN
.8 BLK 28
Voltage is applied to the Horn Relay at all
times. When the relay coil is grounded by clos-
HORN
ing the Horn Switch, the relay contacts close. BRUSHI
When the relay contacts are closed, both the llif.!ill!!l
LH and RH Horns are energized.

00
SEE GROUND
DISTRIBUTION
»
I
N
Figure 1 - Typical Horn Schematic
INTRODUCTION 00
~

I
N
COMPONENT LOCATIONS
When you are ready to locate the schematic COMPONENT LOCATION Page-Figure
components on the car. use the Component
Locations List. see figure 2. COMPONENTS
Listed in the left hand column are the com- Convenience Center ...... '........ Under LH side of liP ...... _ ........ ... ...... 201-6-A
ponents shown on the schematic. Next to the Fuse Block .' ....... ........... .. Under LH side of liP ...... _ ... ........ ...... 201-6-A
Convenience Center is the location . "Under Horn Brush/Slip Ring ..... . ...... Under steering wheel. ..... _............. 0' ••• 201-5-E
LH side of l iP... Reference to LH and RH is Horn Switch ..... ...... ......... Under steering wheel ...... _................. 201-5-E
madeas though the trQubleshooter wAs sitting . """
in the driver's seat. On the same line. in the far
right column, is a page-figure reference. In this CONNECTORS
case. you are directed to figure A on page 201-6.
cwo (46 cavities) ... .... ......... LH side of dash .......... _ .. ..... .. . ....... 201-5-B
Where connectors are listed, the number of C201 (11 cavities) ................ Under LH side of liP, near CWO ............... 201-5-F
cavities is provided. This represents the total
number of cavities in the connector, regarril~ss
of how many are actually used. This informa- GROUNDS
tion is provided to help you identify connec-
GlOl LH front of engine compartment. behind
tors on the car.
headlights panel. .......................... 201-8-D
Grounds are listed next in the table. The
location description for G 101 reads, "LH front
of engine compartment, behind headlights
panel. .. You are directed to page 201-8 figure D. Front lights harness. behind LH front light panel 201-8-C
Nearly every component, connector, ground liP harness. behind liP, above steering column... 201-6-B
or splice shown on a schematic can be pin-
pointed visually by using the Component Figure 2 - Typical Entries In The Component Location List
Location Views figures.
 m
INTRODUCTION r-
m
o
-I
jJ
c=s
HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES l>
r-
The connectors, see figure 3, are labeled -+ )-- o
sG)
with the component they are connected to, or
the connector number, C224, from the sche- 2:
'-'~ o
matic where they appear and their color. The - ~c

®
~
identifying number is for reference only; it is G) (J)

not the connector part number. For in-line con-

nectors, the half shown is usually the Socket
o
half. If both views are shown, the other is BlK BlK
B LK 12004727
marked Pin Half.
V03000.2 Blower Motor
Only connectors that have two or more termi-
nals are shown. C129
If you need to backprobe a connector while it
is on the component, the order of the terminals
must be mentally reversed. The wire color is a
-
~UD~CJ
help in this situation. If there is more than one ~ GJ GJ
wire of the same color, you may need to locate a
test point from its terminal number. A useful
trick is to imagine that you are probing a termi-
I ~GJ~GJ
G:J GJ
nal from behind the page you are looking at.
Then mentally locate that terminal with respect
to the keyway or other reference mark. I~:
L.
~D~GJ
rn GJ
BLU 12015196

Horn Relay

V00010.0

Radio

Figure 3 -Typical Harness Connector Faces

ex>
l>
I
N
tAl
 00 .
INTRODUCTION l>
I
N
OTHER INFORMATION
WINDSHIELD REAR
Body Part Names
HEADER
Refer to figure 4 for the correct body part
names.
--~:::::IIot----- WINDOW
HEADER

VIN References
If schematics for more than one variation of
an engine type- V6, for example-are shown,
then the schematics will be labeled with VIN
designations to distinguish the variations.

Service Parts Identification Label

To aid service and parts personnel in identi- LH
fying options and parts originally installed, a QUARTER
Service Parts Identification Label has been PANEL
placed in the car. See the General Inforrriation
Section OA of the Chassis Service Manual for Figure 4 - Body Part Names
the location of the label and the definition of
the option codes.

Abbreviations
AIC - Air Conditioning
BCM - Body Computer Module
ECM - Electronic Control Module or Engine
Control Module
liP - Instrument Panel
RH - Right Hand, as seen from driver's seat
LH - Left Hand m
r-
Not Used - The connector cavity has no func- m
()
tion. -i
JJ
n
l>
r-
o
1>
C)
2
oen
en
 m
INTRODUCTION r-
m
("')
-I
:xl
Power Distribution C1
~
r-
The Power Distribution schematic shows POWER DISTRIBUTION
0
the wiring from the Battery and Generator to 3 RED FUSIBLE LINK 0 l>
C)
the Starter Solenoid, Fuse Block, Ignition 0 Z
I
Switch and Light Switch. The first component V6VIN L 1 REO
i 0
L4VIN U 1 BLK I Vl
after a Fusible Link is also shown. In certain AS
V6 VIN L 2 RED
FUSIBLE LINK F
I
I
I
en
L4VINU3REO
instances, the first component after a Fuse 6
1
Block fuse and Light Switch is also shown. V6 VIN L
L4VINU
.B GRN
lBLK
1
1
1
1
The Power Distribution schematic refers to ,..-_
V6 VIN L_ _A'-_ _ _U_
1
1
L4 VIN
Fuse Block Details and Light Switch Details L4VIN U 19BLK
V6VINL 32BLK

RE~ 12
1

schematics. By using these three (3) schemat-

ics, power distribution wiring can be followed 3 RED 2 1REgl

r--, COOLANT
3
rJr j
1,2
STARTER
I
. - - - ' COOLANT
from the Battery and Generator to the first : : FAN I · I~ I I SOLENOID + ~
1- I 1---
1 1 RELAY : 1 RELA Y
component after a Fusible Link . Fuse and l ___ J : 1

Light Switch. The ability to follow the power

1
1- -- ....
I PAGE 31 ·0 PAGE 31 ·1
L-~.J

3 RED
distribution wiring to the first component in
each circuit is extremely helpful in locating 3 REOJ 2
.'--------------------------.
. S2.06
. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _. .

short circuits which cause fusible links and

fuses to open. o CI ~.A.£! 19 BLK I
r~~~----~~;;~~-~--l~o
l~
Figure 5 is a sample Power Distribution
schematic. It shows how voltage is applied
from the positive Battery terminal to the vari-
ous circuits on the car. For example, Battery
1
1
I
:

1=0
1=
I -
_r_
HEA O

PAR.
P-
/
- -- - - - - - -
\
).O FF

=0
=
-
HEA~OPAR~" :
'
p ~-
1--
1
I

1
I
1
.B ORN 240

voltage is applied to the Starter Solenoid, the

Fusible Link D, the RED wire and connector
L~~~-I-~"--------1r---'
CloO to Fuse 1 and Fuse 2 in the Fuse Block SEE LIGHT

""
'n-i '·'l.iI' ''' iii
SWITCH
and the Light Switch in the LH Pod. These DETAILS

fuses are said to be Hot At All Times, since r---,1

1
PAGE 12·0 r----- ---------- --------lFUSE

Battery voltage is always applied to them.

I
1
1
L __ .JI
1
1 !
1

I
F USE I
20 AMP
FUSE 2
20AMP
1 BLOCK
: --
I
1 ______________ ______ J1
Notice that Battery voltage is also applied ~ ~

to Fusible Link F and the RED wire to the ~ ITCH SEE FUSE
PAG E 100·0
Coolant Fan Relay. BLOC K
DET AIL S
PAGE " ·2 00
~

I
Figure 5 - Typical Power Distribution Schematic
I\)
INTRODUCTION 00
l>
I
N
Fuse Block Details
FUSE BLOCK DETAILS (FUSE 1 AND FUSE 2)
The Fuse Block Details schematic, see fig-
ure 6, shows all the wiring between a fuse and
the components connected to the output of the 1
~pl
'U""" '-----------------------,
r-------------------- ''''''t' ~:BlOCK
1-
fUSE

fuse. In certain instances where space permits, ;

I 20 AMP I
this detail is shown on the Power Distribution 1
1
1
1
schematic. The Fuse Block Details schematic ~- ------------------------------------- ----~
is extremely helpful in locating a short circuit
that causes a fuse to open. 8 DAN ]40

80RN H1 80RN
)
~ 340

80RN 34U

H GRN 240 8 DAN 340 80RN 340 .8 0RN 340 .80RN 40

8 URN 340 80RN J40

A £!
r---,
A
r---, -..,\ lH
,,,,-,,
RH

: LIGHT : ,
1
,
1 f
\ I __ I
I SWITCH f
1 1
1
1
L __ ...J
1
1 '-
L __ - , COURTESY LIGHTS CONSOLE REAR DOOR COURTESY
lH POD PAGE 35 ~ COURTESY LIGHT ~
(SEE LIGHT ~ PAGE 35 PA GE 35
~W ITCH PAGE 51
DETAilS
PAGE II

Figure 6 - Typical Fuse Block Details Schematic

m
r-
m
("')
-l
:xl
("')
l>
r-
o
~
G)
2
o
CJ)
CJ)
 m
INTRODUCTION r-
m
o
-f
light Switch Details output of the Light Switch. In certain matic helps you understand the many wires
~
The Light Switch Details schematic, see fig- instances where space permits, some of this that come from the Light Switch. This sche- o
ure 7, shows the wiring between the Light detail may be shown on the Power Distribution matic is also helpful in locating a short circuit »
r-

Switch and the components connected to the schematic. The Light Switch Details sche- that causes the fuse ahead of the Light Switch o
to open. s
C>
2:
o
LIGHT SWITCH DETAILS
r~----~_~~~_-_~~\---P~~~~H
HOT AT ALL TIMES ~
(J)

: i
HEAlD Off HEA}O Off
=0 =0
I
I
,---
= PARK
p~

-~------
= P,-:
PA,RK

__ I
I

BYCI

.8 BRN .8 BRN

.88RN .8 BRN

. F
..:: 8 .8 BRN

.8 BRN 9 C204 9

~ El ~C205
CyC401 9, Bl)lCl00
.8 BRN -
.• • .8 BRN 9

S103

.8 BRN

.8 BRN 9 .8 BRN .8 BRN

.8 BRN 9 .8 BRN
.8 BRN .8 BRN 9 A- C102

I
9
.8 BRN 9 .8 BRN .8 BRN 9 .8 BRN

r-f---~~~;
8 BRN 9
FUSE

r:..r.;)-,
B.~
,----,
2

,
I
,
l_ _
I
FUSE 10
---
5 AMP
I
I
I
..JI
,
,
I
I I
L__•.....•
I
,
I ,,_ \
I
...•
I

',---,,' '---_ ' ,_/

, : ,
,'---..••., ,---- .•..,
...
I
/" •...
\
/'---', I'-~---'
I

,----, ----,
\
II
I,
~
I
"-,
,_ ...•
I I
r>:
'
\ ••....
,,,,.---,
I
,
---_II'
\
I
r- -,
I
I
I
I
L
I
I
I
I
4
I •••..
,,
--- .••

••... _--,
~\
/
.......• "
, r'.........• }
I

,
I
I
L __ ...J
I

,
I
I

RADIO LH MARKER LH TAIL LICENSE RH TAlr RH MARKER LH FRONT LH FRONT UNOERHOOO ~ RH FRONT AUTO

.8 LT PAGE 47 LIGHT LIGHTS LIGHT LIGHTS LIGHT MARKER PARKfTURN LIGHT PARKfTURN ~ CALCULATOR
GRN/BLK ~1 909 PAGE 32 PAGE 32 PAGE 32 PAGE 32 PAGE 32 LIGHT LIGHT PAGE 30 LIGHT LIGHT PAGE 53 00
PAGE 30 PAGE 30 PAGE 30 PAGE 30 »
LIGHTS I
PAGE 38
N
Figure 7 - Typical Light Switch Details Schematic ""-l
 00
INTRODUCTION l>
I
N
Ground Distribution
00
Figure 8 is a sample Ground Distribution
GROUND DISTRIBUTION (G101 AND G102)
schematic for the Headlights. I t shows exactly FRONT UGHTS GROUNDS
which components share each ground. This
information can often be a time-saver when lH !!!!.
FRONT !J! !J! R!! ID!. E!!Q!!
troubleshooting ground circuits. PARKfTURN HIGH BEAM DUAL BEAM DUAL BEAM HIGH BEAM PARKfTURN

For example, if both Headlights and the

Park/Turn Light on one side are all out, you
!JID!.!
,,,---,\
HEADLIGHT
,,-,I
HEADLIGHT
,'--_ ....\
HEADLIGHT
.,
,,--- .... ,
I
HEADLIGHT !JID!.!
,---- ....\
,----,,
I I : I
~ .... _ - ;I I
could suspect an open in their common ground '_./ \ \
'---" ',---,,'
wire or the ground connection itself. On the
other hand, if one of the lights works, you
know that the ground and the wire up to the
splice are good. You have learned this just by
inspecting the schematic and knowing the
vehicle's symptoms . No actual work on the
lighting system was nee(led.

.SBlK 150 .8 BlK 150 .1 ILK 150 .1 Bl KIWHT 151 .1 Il KIWHT 151 .1 BlKIWHT 151

.v ni
r
m
(")
~
jJ
c=5
.S BlK 150 .8 BlKIWHT 151 l>
r
o
l>
G)
z
o
!:!?
C/l
Figure 8 . Typical Ground Distribution Schematic
SYMBOLS m
r-
m
("')
....
______ :l:I

17"'·""
ENTIRE n
D
INSULATlON 'COLOR IS BOTH

' 12 . .
~I
COMPONENT l>
CONNECTOR REFERENCE SHOWN AND LABELED r-
SHOWN NUMBER FOR COMPONENT
5 RED 2 ,,,,,~_ _ SPLICES ARE SHOWN o
Cl03
LOCATION TABLE
• SlOO AND NUMBERED l>

I~",.""
G)
TABLE ALSO SHOWS
4,..---- CIRCUIT NUMBER IS z
TOTAL NUMBER OF 5 REO
SHOWN TO HELP IN
oC/)
TERMINAL POSSIBLE:
Cl03 (6 CAVITIES)
TRACING CIRCUITS (j)
r--'I
I
PART OF A
COMPONENT
I I
I I SHOWN
I
L __ .J AWAVY LINE
___ MEANS A WIRE
5 CAVITY
~ IS TO BE CONTINUED
CONNECTOR
(5 OUT OF 5
CAVITIES
PARK NAME OF ARE USED) WIRE INSULATION

[!] -
_
-
BRAKE ~
SWITCH
CLOSED WITH
PARKING ~
BRAKE ON
COMPONENT

DETAILS ABOUT
COMPONENT
OR ITS
P.:i
2 REO/YEL

79
__
IS ONE COLOR
~ WITH ANOTHER
COLOR STRIPE
(RED WITH YELLOW)

5 CAVITY
OPERATION
CONNECTOR
(40UTOF5
CAVITIES WIRE SIZE
COMPONENT ARE USED) AND INSULATION
CASE IS COLOR ARE
I RED LABELED
OIRECTL Y
ATTACHED TO
METAL PART
OFCAR
(GROUNDED)

WIRE IS ATTACHED TO I CONNECTOR CURRENT PATH

METAL PART OF CAR
(GROUNDED)

GROUND IS NUMBERED
FOR REFERENCE ON
D ATTACHED TO
COMPONENT

TO
IS CONTINUED
AS LABELED.
THE ARROW SHOWS
THE DIRECTION OF
CURRENT FLOW
AND IS REPEATED
COMPONENT LOCATION TABLE GENERATOR WHERE CURRENT
.PAGE 30-0 PATH CONTINUES .

I WIRE IS INOIRECTL Y
.5GRY 18
CONNECTED TO GROUND CONNECTOR ON A WIRE WHICH CONNECTS

I
SEE GROUND

,""'I"
COMPONENT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT .
DISTRIBUTION WIRE MAY HAVE ONE .5 GRY LEAD (PIGTAIL) 00
THE WIRE IS SHOWN l>
DR MORE SPLICES

1
AGAIN ON THAT CIRCUIT,
BEFORE IT IS I
GROUNDED,
LIGHTS: TURN/HAZARD/STOP/ eN
.....
SYMBOLS 00
l>
I
INDICATES THAT W
CIRCUIT THE CIRCUITRY IS
BREAKER NOT SHOWN IN N
COMPLETE DETAil

HEATING
elEMENT
{Bj ______ _
... _
~
HEAT
ACTUATED
CONTACT 3 BLK 150
SEE GROUNO
OISTRIBUTION
BUT IS COMPLETE ON
THE INDICATED PAGE

!.WITCH CONTACTS THAT

MOVE TOGETHER

V-----LJ
-... ,-., 1---............
DASHED LINE SHOWS
A MECHANICAL RelAY SHOWN

~
~~~HR:~T
CONNECTION

J
BETWEEN !.WITCH
CONTACTS ---- - flOWING
- THROUGH 10RNJ40 WIRE CHOICES
.5L T.BLU 114

1
COIL FOR OPTIONS

~
:8 YEl 237 TW~ TERMINALS NO GAGES /I GAGES
OR DIFFERENT
IN THE SAME NORMAllY MODElS ARE
£.ill

o
~:!~UC~H COll.CONTACT
RRENT flOWS CLOSED

1
CONNECTORS C309 .5 ORN !309 SHOWN AND
CONTACT
lORN 40 4 LABElED
DASHED LINE SHOWS MOVES FROM NORMALL Y NORMAll Y
OPEN POSITION. OPEN
A PHYSICAL
COLOR OF
CONNECTION
CONTACT FUSE BLOCK

CJJ /
BETWEEN PARTS
CONNECTOR

INDICATE~
HOT Ir, ACCY OR RUN
(SAME CONNECTOR)

7 I
POWER IS SUPPLIED
WITH IGNITION RADIO

FUSIBLE LINK SWITCH IN ACCY (GRN)

AND RUN POSITIONS

r---------It____~ "'' ' ' '

crI

:1--------
LABel OF FUSE

I :
BLOCK CONNECTOR

I
I
SVOlTS I ~_
I CONTROL.
I~
I6 I FUSIBLE LINK
CONNECTS TO
CAVITY

DIODE

rn
SCREW TERMINAL .
CURRENT CAN
lI
I
t-
(ECM)
I SOLID STATE
SOLID I
SHOWN SEPARATED
flOW ONL YIN
THE DIRECTION

L-I-----~------...""SOLIO
I .. STATE:
OF THE ARROW
m
r-
STATE " IDENTIFIES m
r-1--------: 3 CONNECTORS ARE

~I""0\, ~~~~~~;I~~~~MBOL~CK.
r>
MODULE A~ ElECTRONIC. SHOWN CONNECTED -l
SIMPLIFIED COMPONENTS
WITHIN THE MODULE I
:
G) " BRAKE "
INi5i"C'ATOR
I
:
AN INDICATOR
WHICH DISPLAYS C210
TOGETHER AT A
JUNCTION BLOCK .
FOURTH WIRE IS
:ll
c=;
l>
SHOW HOW EACH CIRCUIT
l
L_l ________ ll (RED! THE LIGHTED
r-

I
IS COMPLETED . 00 NOT
MEASURE RESISTANCE C
OF CIRCUITS INSIDE
WORD " BRAKE" B 1M
:;
\ \NUMBER FOR TOTAL G)
SOLID STATE MODULES.
CONNECTOR
2
o
CJ)
LETTERS FOR EACH CJ)
CONNECTOR
 m
SYMBOLS r-
m
o
~
:lJ
SINGLE DIAPHRAGM MOTOR n
l>
laa NO VACUUM VACUUM SERVO MOTOR
r-

•
.1 YEL
3 WIRES ARE SHOWN C
..'!"•••• -
.5 YEL
CONNECTEO A sC)

m
TOGETHER WITH A ~. PARTIAL VACUUM

.amJ .. PIGGYBACK CONNECTOR

Z
o
CJ)
Ci5

VACUUM JUNCTION Some vacuum motors such as the servo

motor in the Cruise Control can position the
EASY FLOW actuating arm at any position between fully
DIRECTION
BLUE • BROWN extended and fully retracted. The servo is

0"'""'
HOSE
operated by a control valve that applies vary-
REO~COLOR TANK
VACUUM
ing amounts of vacuum to the motor. The
CHECK
~ VALVE higher the vacuum level, the greater the retrac-
VACUUM SOURCE •• NO FLOW
tion of the motor arm. Servo motors work like
the two position motors; the only difference is
DIRECTION
A A VENT IN THE "AT REST" POSITION in the way the vacuum is applied. Servo motors
SHOWN. THE VALVE OOES
are generally larger and provide a calibrated
~_GHn MECHANICAL
VACUUM
~
THE FOLLOWING:
PORT A IS SEALEO
DOUBLE DIAPHRAGM MOTOR
ND VACUUM
control.

tJ{,J PORT B IS VENTEO TO

THE ATMOSPHERE A

WHEN THE VALVE IS MOVEO

VACUUM SOURCE TO THE "OPERATED" POSITIDN
VACUUM FROM PORT A IS
A A VENT CONNECTEO TO PORT B ----(

aJ
SOLENOIO
~
l!.8.ill THE SOLENOID VACUUM VALVE
USES THE SOLENOIO TO MOVE

•
THE VALVE
B
NO VACUUM

Vacuum motors operate like electrical sole-

noids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft Double diaphragm motors can be operated
between two fixed positions. When vacuum is by vacuum in two directions. When there is no (X)
l>
applied, the shaft is pulled in. When no vac- vacuum, the motor is in the center "at rest"
uum is applied, the shaft is pushed all the way I
position.
out by a spring. eN
tAl
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES 00
l>
I
~
The following four-step troubleshooting pro- Step 4: Test the Repair
cedure is recommended:
HEADLIGHTS liGHT
o
Repeat the System Check to be sure you HOT AT ALL TIMES SWITCH
have fixed the whole problem.
Step 1: Check the problem.
Perform a System Check to be sure you Example
understand what's wrong. Don't waste time A customer brings in a car and says that the
2 INSTRUMENT X
fixing part of the problem! Do not begin dis- high beams do not work.
assembly or testing until you have narrowed
Step 1: Perform a System Check on the Head-
down the possible causes.
lights Circuit. You may discover that both low
beams operate. In "Hi," you may notice that
Step 2: Read the Electrical Schematic.
the High Beam Indicator comes on, but nei-
Study the schematic. Read the Circuit Oper- ther high-beam operates.
ation text if you do not understand how the

1·,
circuit should work. Check circuits that share
wiring with the problem circuit. The names of 1
LT GRN 11
circuits that share the same fuse, ground,
1 TAN 12
switch, etc., are included on each electrical
schematic. (Shared circuits are also shown on IE 2E Cl00
Power Distribution, Ground Distribution, --- -
1
-
LT GRN 11
Fuse Block Details, and Light Switch pages.)
Try to operate the shared circuits. If the
1 TAN 12 .81 T GRN 11
shared circuits work, then the shared wiring is 1 TAN

' - - - -.
OK. The cause must be within the wiring used

"~
12
1 LT GRN
only by the problem circuit. If several circuits I-
fail at the same time, chances are the power I II ~ INSTRUMENT PANel

V V
PRINTE 0 CI RCUIT
r-
(fuse) or ground circuit is faulty.
(P LH
(P .!!!:!.

1
l HEADliGHT l HEADliGHT I I
I HIGH BEAM
:
Step 3: Find the Cause and Repair. LD LD HI : I
INDICATOR
I I
liGHTS: I I
• Narrow down the possible causes. ~ ~ .5 BLK I'-_
m
2 BLK TURNI - - ______ 1I r-
150 HAZARDI 151 m
• Use the Troubleshooting Hints. PARK
(")
~
.5 BLK 151 .BBLKI150 :ll
• Make the necessary measurements as
n
given in the System Diagnosis.
• Before you replace a component, check
2BLK 150 SEE GROUND
DISTRIBUTION
~___

3 BLK
1-
• S205

150
l>
r-
o
power, signal, and ground wires at the ",G200
i>
",Gl05 C)
component harness connector. If these 2
o
check OK, the component must be bad. (J)
Figure 9 - Typical Headlights Schematic Cii
 m
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES r-
m
("')
-l
::J:I
Step 2: Read the Headlights electrical sche- LTG RN wire. locate the exact trouble point,
n
l>
r-
matic. see figure 9. This is the step that will and make the repair.
C
save you time and labor. Remember. it is j;
Step 4: Check the repair by performing a sys- C)
essential to understand how a circuit should
tem check on the Headlights circuit. This, of 2
work. before trying to figure out why it o
course. means making sure that both high CJ)
doesn ·t.
beams. both low beams, and the High Beam en
After you understand how the circuit should Indicator are all working.
operate. read the schematic again. this time
Now suppose that the symptoms were dif-
keeping in mind what you have learned by
ferent. You may have operated the Headlights
operating the circuit.
and found that the low beams were working,
Since both low beams work. you know that but neither the high beams nor the High Beam
the Light Switch. the YEL wire. the Lo con- Indicator were working. Looking at the sche-
tacts of the Headlight Dimmer Switch. termi- matic, you might conclude the following:
nal IE of C 100. the TAN wires. and grounds
It is unlikely that both high beam filaments
G 105 and G 109 are all good.
and the High Beam Indicator have all burned
Furthermore. since you saw that the High out at once. The cause is probably the dimmer
Beam Indicator came on when the Headlight switch or its connector.
Dimmer Switch was moved to Hi. you know
that the Hi contacts of the dimmer switch and
the LT G RN wire between the dimmer switch
and C 100 are good.
At thiS point. you could test for voltage at
the RH Headlight with the dimmer switch in
Hi. However. it is extremely unlikely that the
high beam filaments have burned out in both
headlights. or that both headlight connections
are bad. The cause must he a bad connection at
ClOO. or a break in the LTG RN wire between
CWO and the RH Headlight.
You have quickly narrowed the possible
causes down to one specific area, and have
done absolutely no work on the car itself.
Step 3: Find the cause and repair it. Using the
Comp.:>nent Location List and the correspond-
ing figure , you can quickly find ClOO and the
....
 00
TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS l>
I
~
Electrical troubleshooting requires the use CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS
N
of common electrical test equipment. A connector Adapter Kit is available
(J35616) for making tests and measurements at
TEST LIGHT /vOL TMETER separated connectors. This kit contains an
Use a test light to check for voltage. A Test assortment of probes which mate with many of
Light (BT-7905 or equivalent) is made up of a the types of connectors you will see. A void
12-Volt light bulb with a pair of leads attached. using paper clips and other substitutes since
After grounding one lead, touch the other lead they can damage terminals and cause incorrect
to various points along the circuit where volt- measurements.
age should be present. When the bulb goes on,
there is voltage at the point being tested. SElF-POWERED TEST LIGHT

A voltmeter can be used instead of a test
light. While a test light shows whether or not
voltage is present, a voltmeter indicates how
much voltage is present.
An increasing number of circuits include
solid state control modules. One example is the
Electronic Control Module (ECM) used with
Computer Command Control and Electronic
Fuel Injection. Voltages in these circuits
should be tested only with a 10-megohm or
higher impedance digital voltmeter or multi-
meter (J-29125 or equivalent). Never use a test
light on circuits that contain Solid State com-
ponents, since damage to these components
may result.
When testing for voltage or continuity at a
connection, you do not have to separate the
two halves of the connector. Unless you are
testing a "weather-pack" connector, you
should probe the connector from the back .
Always check both sides of the connector. An
accumulation of dirt and corrosion between
contact surfaces is sometimes a cause of elec-
trical problems.
Use a self-powered test light (J-21008 or
equivalent) to check for continuity. This tool is
made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads.
If the leads are touched together, the bulb will
go on.
A self-powered test light is used only on an
un powered circuit. First disconnect the car 's
Battery, or remove the fuse which feeds the cir-
cuit you're working on. Select two specific
points along the circuit through which there
should be continuity. Connect one lead of the
self-powered test light to each point. If there is
continuity, the test light's circuit will be com-
pleted and the bulb will go on.
Never use a self-powered test light on cir·
cuits that contain solid state components,
since damage to these components may result.
Self-Powered Test Light
OHMMETER
An ohmmeter can be used instead of a self·
powered test light. The ohmmeter shows how
much resistance there is between two points
along a circuit. Low resistance means good
continuity.
Circuits which include any solid state con-
trol modules. such as the Electronic Control
Module (ECM). should be tested only with a 10-
megohm or high e r impedance digital multi-
meter (J-29125 or equivalent).
When measuring re sistance with a digital
multimeter. the vehicle Battery should be dis-
connected. This will prevent incorrect read-
ings. Digital meters apply such a small voltage
m
to measure resistance that the presence of r-
m
voltages can upset a resistance reading. ("')
-l
:l:l
Diodes and solid state components in a cir-
n
l>
cuit can cause an ohmmeter to give a false r-
reading. To find out if a component is affecting o
a measurement. take a reading once. reverse ~
Gl
the leads and take a second reading. If the Z
readings differ. the solid state component is o(J')
(J')
affecting the measurement.
 m
TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS • TROUBLESHOOTING TESTS r-
m
(")
-4
:a
n
FUSED JUMPER WIRE TROUBLESHOOTING TESTS TESTING FOR CONTINUITY »
r-
A fused jumper is available (J-36169 or equiv- TESTING FOR VOLTAGE 1. Disconnect the car battery. C
alent) with small clamp connectors providing l>
1. Connect one lead of a test light to a known 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light G')
adaptation to most connectors without
good ground. If you are using a voltmeter, or ohmmeter to one end of the part of the
z
damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied
o
VI
be sure it is the voltmeter's negative lead circuit you wish to test. en
with a 20 amp fuse which may not be suitable
that you have connected to ground. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of
for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a
higher rating than the fuse that protects the 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or the circuit.
circuit being tested. voltmeter to a selected test point (connec- 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is
t.or or terminal). continuity. If you are using an ohmmeter,
CAUTION: Do not use fused jumper wire
in any instance to substitute for inputs or 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage pre- low or no resistance means good continuity.
outputs at the ECM (Electronic Control sent. If you are using a voltmeter, note the
Module), BCM (Body Control Module), or voltage reading. It should be within one
any microprocessor device. volt of measured Battery voltage. A loss of
more than one volt indicates a problem.
SHORT FINDER
,..-----::1___- - - ,
Short Finders are available (J-8681 or equiv- ~

SWiTCH
alent) to locate hidden shorts to ground. The
LIGHT
short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in rOR
the shorted circuit and shows you the location OHMMETER I

of the short through body trim or sheet metal.

FUSE TESTER
A simple tester that indicates a blown fuse is
available (J-34764 or equivalent). To check a
fuse the tester is applied directly to the fuse in
the fuse block. Two probes contact the fuse, Continuity Check Through A Switch
either into the slots of a flat fuse or to the metal
ends of a glass fuse . With power on, a red LED
in the tester lights if the fuse is open. The han-
dle of the tester is a tool for removing either
type of fuse.
00
»
Voltage Check I
~
TROUBLESHOOTING TESTS
TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP
This test checks for voltage being lost along
a wire, or through a connection or switch.
1. Connect the positive lead of a voltmeter to
the end of the wire (or to one side of the con-
nection or switch) which is closer to the Bat-
tery.
2. Connect the negative lead to the other end
of the wire (or the other side of the connec-
tion or switch) .
3. Operate the circuit.
4. The voltmeter will show the difference in
voltage between the two points. A dif-
ference (or drop) of more than one volt indi-
cates a problem.
00
l>
I
With a Self-Powered Test Light or Ohmmeter
TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND ~
1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the
With a Test Light or Voltmeter
battery and load.
1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the
2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light
load.
or ohmmeter to the fuse terminal on the
2. Connect a test light or voltmeter across the load side.
fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is
3. Connect the other lead to a known good
powered).
ground.
3. Beginning near the fuse block. wiggle the
4. Beginning near the fuse block. wiggle the
harness from side to side. Continue this at
harness from side to side. Continue this at
convenient points (about 6 inches apart)
convenient points (about six inches apart)
while watching the test light or voltmeter.
while watching the self-powered test light
4. When the test light glows. or the voltmeter or ohmmeter.
registers. there is a short to ground in the
5. When the self-powered test light glows. or
wiring near that point.
the ohmmeter registers. there is a short to
ground in the wiring near that point .

BATTERY DISCONNECTED
HOT AT ALL TIMES HOT AT ALL TIMES

FUSE FUSE
BLOCK
BLOCK
(FUSE
(FUSE
REMOVED)
REMOVED)

REO

REO
REO

'7
('1

(-I
VOL TMETER

[]~"'"
.. [z:r'" [ZJ=
SElF · POWEREO

J""
TEST LIGHT

J""
m
leo (OR r-

rn ' ' '"

LOAD
LOAD OHMMETER)
DISCONNECTED
m
DISCONNECTED ('")
-t
:I:J
c=;
[]r=
-=
rn"""'"
-=- -=-
l>
r-
0
~
G)
2
Testing For Short With Self-Powered 0
Voltage Orop Test Testing For Short With Test Light en
or Voltmeter Test Light or Ohmmeter en
 m
TROUBLESHOOTING TESTS r-
m
o
-i
:x:J
4. Close each connector or switch until the PROPERJUMP STARTING PROCEDURES ()
With a Short Finder l>
fuse blows, to find which circuit the short is With the use of electronic components (such r-
1. Remove the blown fuse, leaving the Battery in. Connect test lamp, meter, or short finder o
as solid-state radios, electronic control mod-
connected. at the connector to the suspect circuit (dis- ules, and others) becoming more wide-spread s
G>
2. Connect the Short Finder across the fuse connected) rather than at the fuse termi- each model year. the potential for damage 2
nals.
o
terminals. caused by improper jump starts increases. The U'l
U'l
3. Close all switches in series with the circuit HOT AT ALL TIMES
following guidelines are presented to reduce
you are troubleshooting. SHORT .---..c:TI FUSE the likelihood of such damage.
~ BLOCK
4. Operate the Short Finder. The Short Finder
JUMP START ONLY IF BUILT-IN
will pulse current to the short. This creates
HYDROMETER "EYE" ON BATTERY IS
a pulsing magnetic field surrounding the RED

circuit wiring between the fuse block and ~ cb DARK. If the "eye" is clear or yellow, do not
attempt to jump start. If the "eye" is green,
the short. cb the Battery is charged and does not require a
5. Beginning at the fuse block. slowly move cb jump start. Both the booster and the dis-
the Short Finder meter along the circuit
MOVE METER
ALONG WIRE
cb charged Battery should be treated carefully
wiring. The meter will show current pulses cb when using jumper cables.
through sheet metal and body trim. As long
as the meter is between the fuse block and
1 SWITCH
CAUTION: Do not expose the Battery to
the short. the needle will move with each
current pulse. When you have moved the
.. -
open flame or sparks. Serious personal
injury, particularly to the eyes, may result
meter past the point of the short. the needle from a Battery explosion, Battery acid, or
I
PULSING BLU
will stop moving. Examine the wiring in MAGNETIC C!.:) electrical burns.
that area for the short to ground.
FiElD cb
~cb • The Ignition Switch must be in OFF
Fuses Powering Several Loads cb when connecting or disconnecting the
1. Find the schematic in Fuse Block Details
cb jumper cables.
(8A-H) for the fuse that has blown. • All accessories. including the Radio.
2. Open the first connector or switch leading NEEDLE STOPS
should be turned off before jump start·
from the fuse to each load. MOVING HERE ~ mg.
3. Replace the fuse.

ou~ I
NO PULSING • Cable polarity must be correct. Compo-
MAGNETIC nent damage can occur if the polarity is
• If the fuse blows, the short is in the
wiring leading to the first connector or
switch. Use a test light, meter, or short
finder as described above.
I "no
reversed. even if only briefly.
• Connect the positive jumper cable first.
then connect the negative cable to the
(X)
l>
I
• If fuse does not blow, go to next step. engine ground (not the negative termi- ~
Finding Short With Short Finder nal of the dead Battery).
(JI
REPAIR PROCEDURES 00
l>
I
(J'1
ELECTRICAL REPAIRS (see Figure 1). Fuses are a "one time" protec- CURRENT RATING
COLOR o
tion device and must be replaced each time the (AMPERES)
This section provides instruction in the fol-
circuit is overloaded. 3 VIOLET
lowing repairs:
Auto-fuses are color coded. The standard- 5 TAN
- Circuit Protection 7,5 BROWN
ized color identification and ratings are shown
- Typical Electrical Repairs 10 RED
in Figure 2. 15 BLUE
- Splicing Copper Wire
For service replacement. non-color coded 20 YELLOW
- Splicing Aluminum Wire 25 WHITE
- Splicing T\\ isted/Shielded Cable fuses of the same respective current rating can
30 GREEN
be used. The current rating of each fuse is -
- Repairing Connectors (Except Weather Figure 2 - Fuse Rating And Color
Pack' ) and molded into its head.
- Repairing Weather Pack' (Environmen- To determine whether or not an auto-fuse is Circuit Breakers
tal) Connectors blown. remove the suspect fuse and examine
A circuit breaker is a protective device
the element in the fuse for a break. (see Figure
After any electrical repair is made. designed to open the circuit when a current
Note: 1). If the element is broken. replace the fuse
always test the circuit afterwards by operat- load is in excess of rated breaker capacity. If
with one of equal current rating.
ing the devices in the circuit. This confirms not there is a short or other type of overload condi-
There are. however. additional specific cir- tion in the circuit. the excessive current will
only that the repair is correct, but also that it cuits with in-line fuses. In-line fuses are open the circuit between the circuit breaker
was the cause of the complaint. located within the individual wiring harness. terminals. The circuit breaker will remain open
They are usually housed in spring-loaded. until the trouble is found and corrected. The
twist-type receptacles. circuit breaker will close automatically when
the excessive current is removed. The condi-
CIRCUIT PROTECTION
tion of a circuit breaker may be verified by
removing it from the circuit and checking the
All electrical circuits are protected against
resistance. A good circuit breaker will have
excessive loads which might occur because of
less than 1ohm resistance between the two ter-
shorts or overloads in the wiring system. Such (_n~ J1 r( t::::;] )
minals.
protection is provided' by a fuse. circuit
breaker. or fusible link.
m
r-
m
Fuses o
-I
The most common method of automotive ::D
wiring circuit protection is the fuse. Whenever
nl>
GOOD FUSE BLOWN FUSE r-
there is an excessive amount of current flow- C
ing through a circuit the fusible element will s
C)
melt and create an open or incomplete circuit 2
o
Figure 1 - Sample Fuses U)
(i)
REPAIR PROCEDURES
Fusible links
In addition to circuit breakers and fuses.
some circuits use fusible links to protect the
wiring. Like fuses. fusible links are "one time ..
protection devices that will melt and create an
open circuit (see Figure 3).
Not all fusible link open circuits can be
detected by observation. Always inspect that
there is Battery voltage past the fusible link to
verify continuity.
Fusible links are used instead of a fuse in
wiring circuits that are not normally fused.
such as the ignition circuit. Each fusible link is
four wire-gauge sizes smaller than the cable it
is designed to protect. Links are marked on the
insulation with wire-gauge size because the
heavy insulation makes the link appear to be a
heavier gauge than it actually is. The same
wire size fusible link must be used when replac-
ing a blown fusible link.
CONNECTOR COVERING '
! securely in two places (see Figure 4). For more
I details on splicing procedures see Splicing
-~
FUSIBLE LINK BEFORE SHORT CIRCUIT
BROKEN CIRCUIT
INSIC'E INSULATION
CUT WIRE HERE
FUSIBLE LINK AFTER SHORT CIRCUIT
Figure 3 . Good And Damaged Fusible Links
Fusible links are available with two types of
insulation: Hypalon' and Silicone/GXL (SILl
GXL). Service fusible links made with SILl
GXL may be used to replace either Hypalon '
or SILlGXL fusible links. Service fusible links
made with Hypalon " may only be used to
replace Hypalon'" fusible links. To determine
the fusible link type: nick the insulation of the
blown fusible link with a knife. SILlGXL will
have a white inner core under the outer color.
Hypalon" insulation is one color. Service fusi-
ble links are available in many lengths. Choose
the shortest length that is suitable. If the fusi-
ble link is to be cut from a spool. NEVER make
a fusible link longer than 228 mm (9 in).
CAUTION: Fusible links cut longer than
228 mm (9 in) will not provide sufficient
overload protection.
To replace a damaged fusible link. cut it off
beyond the splice. Replace with a repair link.
When connecting the repair link. strip wire
and use staking-type pliers to crimp the splice
Copper Wire.
(Xl
1>
I
(J'1
....
 00
REPAIR PROCEDURES ~
I
C1I
To replace a damaged fusible link which TYPICAL ELECTRICAL REPAIRS Short Circuits Caused by
feeds two harness wires. cut them both off An open circuit is an incomplete circuit . Damaged Wire Insulation
beyond the splice. Use two repair links. one Power cannot reach the load or reach ground. - Locate the damaged wire.
spliced to each harness wire (see Figure 5) . If a circuit is open. active components do not - Find and correct the cause of the wire
energize. A short circuit is an unwanted con- insulation damage.
nection between one part of the circuit and - For minor damage. tape over the wire. If
either ground or another part of the circuit. A damage is more extensive. replace the
short circuit causes a fuse to blow or a circuit faulty segment of the wire. (Refer to the
breaker to open. splicing instructions for copper. alumi-
num. or shielded cable for the correct
splicing procedure.)
DAMAGED DAMAGEb
FUSIBLE FUSIBLE SPLICING COPPER WIRE
LINK CUT HERE lINK- CUT HERE

"
Step One: Open the Harness

~ \~ ri
If the harness is taped. remove the tape. To

\" r'.
TERMINAL SPLICE ONE HARNESS
WIRE (RED)
TERMINAL SPLICE HARNESS
WIRES (RED)
avoid wire insulation damage. use a sewing
"seam ripper" to cut open the harness (avail-
able from sewing supply stores).
If the harness has a black plastic conduit.
simply pull out the desired wire. Note that alu-
minum wire is enclosed in brown conduit.
Refer to Splicing Aluminum Wire if necessary.

Step Two: Cut the Wire

(9);:z

t
UlJrJ

=r
§)m
I
REPAIR LINKS
Qt:Ul

=r
HARNESS
WIRES (RED)
Begin by cutting as little wire off the har-
ness as possible. You may need the extra
length of wire later if you decide to cut more
wire off to change the location of a splice. You m
r-
m

\
REPAIR LINK ONE HARNESS may have to adjust splice locations to make (")
WIRE (RED)
@)b :c:u:w • \ ,
certain that each splice is at least 40mm (1112 ")
away from other splices. harness branches. or
-t
::JJ
n
~
connectors. r-
C
>
C')
Z
o
~
Figure 4 - Single Wire Feed Fusible Link Figure 5 - Double Wire Feed Fusible Link rn
REPAIR PROCEDURES ,...
m
m
o
-I
::c
n
Step Three: Strip the Insulation Step Four: Crimp the Wires -Make sure that the clip and wires are still »
,...
When replacing a wire. use a wire of the same Select the proper clip to secure the splice. To in the correct position. Then, apply
o
size as the original wire or larger. The schemat- determine the proper clip size for the wire steady pressure until the crimping tool sG)
being spliced. follow the directions included closes (see Figure 8).
ics list wire size in metric units. The following 2
table (see Figure 6) shows the commercial with your clips. Select the correct anvil on the Before crimping the ends of the clip, be sure
o
~
rJ)
(A WG) wire sizes that can be used to replace crimper. (On most crimpers your choice is lim- that:
each metric wire size. Each A WG size is either ited to either a small or large anvil.) Overlap - The wires extend beyond the clip in each
equal to or larger than the equivalent metric the two stripped wire ends and hold them direction.
size. between your thumb and forefinger as shown -No strands of wire are cut loose, and
in Figure 7. Then. center the splice clip under - No insulation is caught under the clip.
METRIC WIRE AWG the stripped wires and hold it in place. Crimp the splice again, once on each end. Do
SIZES SIZES
not let the crimping tool extend beyond the
22 24
edge of the clip or you may damage or nick the
.35 22
5 20
wires (see Figure 9).
8 18
1.0 16
2.0 14 WINGS OF CLIP
3.0 12 TOUCHING
5 0 10 FORMER
8.0 8
13.0 6
19.0 4
32 0 2
Figure 6 - Wire Size Conversion Table

To find the correct wire size either find the

wire on the schematic page and convert the
metric size to the A WG size, or use an A WG
wire gage.
If you aren 't sure of the wire size, start with
the largest opening in your wire stripper and Figure 7 . Centering The Splice Clip
work down until you get a clean strip of the
insulation. Be careful to avoid nicking or cut- -Open the crimping tool to its full width
ting any of the wires. and rest one handle on a firm flat surface. BACK OF CLIP
00
Check the stripped wire for nicks or cut -Center the back of the splice clip on the
CENTERED ON ANVIL »
strands. If the wire is damaged, repeat the pro- proper anvil and close the crimping tool Figure 8· Crimping The Splice Clip I
to the point where the former touches the (J1
cedure on a new section of wire. The two
stripped wire ends should be equal in length. wings of the clip. w

REPAIR PROCEDURES
ALIGN TOOL WITH EDGE OF CLIP
TO CRIMP ENDS OF SPUCE
Figure 9 - Completing The Crimp
Figure 10- Applying The Solder
00
»
I
(J'I
Step Five: Solder
Apply 60 /40 rosin core solder to the opening
in the back of the clip (see Figure 10). Follow
the manufacturer's instructions for the solder
equipment you are using.
Step Six: Tape the Splice
Center and roll the splicing tape. The tape
should cover the entire splice. Roll on enough
tape to duplicate the thickness of the insula-
tion on the existing wires. Do not flag the tape.
Flagged tape may not provide enough insula-
tion. and the flagged ends will tangle with the
other wires in the harness (see Figure 11).
I f the wire does not belong in a conduit or
other harness covering. tape the wire again.
GOOD (ROLLED)
Use a winding motion to cover the first piece of
tape (see Figure 12).
SPLICING ALUMINUM WIRE
General Motors cars have a front body wir-
ing harness made of 2.0 metric and 1.0 metric
(14 and 16 gauge) insulated solid cable alumi-
num wires. These wires are enclosed in a brown
solid plastic conduit from behind the instru-
ment panel to the rear of the car ..
m
r-
A special repair kit (l684873-G R.2.530-KIT- m
("')
ALUM-WIRE TERMINAL REPAIR) is -I
::c
available to help make repairs on aluminum Ci
wires. This kit contains materials and instruc- »
r-
tions that can be used either to splice wire or C
crimp on new terminals. The kit includes the S
BAD (FLAGGED) G)
following parts: 2
o
Figure 11 - Proper First Taping en
en
REPAIR PROCEDURES
~--s--sr==
TAPE AGAIN IF NEEDED
Figure 12 - Proper Second Taping
-Small cylindrical metal splice clips.
-A plastic tube of petroleum jelly.
-Ten 2.0 metric (14 gauge) DK GRN leads:
l,jOmm (6 ") long with terminals.
- Ten 1.0 metric (16 gauge) BRN leads:150
mm (6 ") long with terminals.
Use of the special materials in this kit will
help prevent galvanic corrosion . Galvanic cor-
rosion causes increased resistance between the
terminal and wire. or the splice clip and wire. or
both. I ncreased resistance would affect the
operation of the electrical components in the
repaired circuit.
m
r-
m
(")
-4
::c
Step One: Open the Harness Step Four: Coating the Splice/Terminal c=i
l>
r-
Because the harness has a solid plastic con- To prevent corrosion. apply a generous coat- o
duit. simply cut the conduit open with ing of petroleum jelly to the splice area. If you l>
C)
diagonal cutters and pull out the desired wire. are replacing a lead, also thoroughly coat the 2
Be careful not to damage any of the wires when terminal crimp area and aluminum core with o
(J)
cutting open the conduit. petroleum jelly. Both areas are shown in Fig- Cii
ure 13 and identified with the letter "A. "
Step Two: Cut the Wire
Begin by cutting as little wire off the har- Step Five : Crimp the Wires
ness as possible. You may need the extra -Select the proper-sized splice clip (follow
length of wire later if you decide to cut more the instructions included in the special
wire off to change the location of a splice. You repair kit).
may have to adjust splice locations to make - Place one wire end in each end of the
certain that each splice is at least 40mm (11 /2 ") splice clip.
away from the other splices. harness branches. -Crimp the clip firmly to the wire using
or connectors. 10" slip joint pliers. Do NOT solder the
splice (see Figure 14).
Step Three: Strip the Insulation - Repeat this procedure for the second wire
When replacing a wire or lead. use a wire of or lead in the splice clip.
the same size as the original wire. or larger.
Look up the metric wire size on the schematic
and select the proper-sized leads from the spe-
cial repair kit. Remember that the wires in this
harness can only be one of two sizes-2 .0 metric
or 1.0 metric (14 or 16 gauge) .
Use wire strippers of the proper gauge to
o
strip approximately 6mm (114 ") of insulation
from each wire end.
When stripping the outer jacket from the
aluminum wire core. be careful not to nick or
damage the core. A damaged core will weaken
the assembly at this point.
00
l>
I
(J'1
Figure 13 - Where To Apply Petroleum Jelly
U1
REPAIR PROCEDURES 00
l>
I
(J"I
Step Six : Tape Splice/Insert Terminal Step Four: Re-Assemble the Cable
en
Tape over both the splice clip and the After you have spliced and taped each wire,
petroleum jelly to seal out moisture and insu- rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. Be
late the splice (see Figure 15). If you have careful to avoid wrapping the drain wire in the
replaced a lead. do not tape over the terminal tape.
crimp area but insert the lead into the connec- Next. splice the drain wire foUowing the
tor body. splicing instructions for copper wire. Then.
wrap the drain wire around the conductors and
mylar tape (see Figure 18).

SPLICING TWISTED/ Step Five: Tape the Cable

SHIELDED CABLE
Twisted/shielded cable is sometimes used to
protect wiring from electrical noise (stray sig-
nals). For example. two-conductor cable of this
construction is used between the ECM and the
distributor. See Figure 16 for a breakdown of
twisted/shielded cable construction.
Tape over the entire cable using a winding
motion (see Figure 19). This tape will replace
the section of the jacket you removed to make
the repair.
Figure 14 - Crimping The First Half Of The Splice
Clip (Aluminum Wire)

Step One: Remove Outer Jacket OUTER DRAIN WIRE

Remove the outer jacket and discard it. Be JACKET (UNINSU LATE D)
careful to avoid cutting into the drain wire or
the mylar tape.

Step Two: Unwrap the Tape

Unwrap the aluminum/mylar tape. but do
not remove it. The tape will be used to rewrap
the twisted conductors after the splices have m
been made. r-
m
n
MYLAR TAPE TWISTED -I
:lJ
Step Three: Prepare the Splice CONDUCTORS n
l>
Untwist the conductors. Then. prepare the r-
splice by following the splicing instructions Figure 15 - The Tape Covers The Splice Clip And Figure 16 - Twisted/Shielded Cable C
for copper wire presented earlier. Remember to The Petroleum Jelly To Seal And l>
C)
stagger splices to avoid shorts (see Figure 17). Insulate z
o
(J)
en

REPAIR PROCEDURES
Figure 17 - The Untwisted Conductors
DRAIN WIRE
Figure 18· The Re-Assembled Cable
.~
Figure 19 . Proper Taping
REPAIRING CONNECTORS
(Except Weather Pack® and Metri-
Pack Series 150 Pull-to-Seat Type)
The following general repair procedures
can be used for High Density, Printed Circuit
Type, Bulkhead Type, and connector. Prior
to starting any repairs, separate connector
halves and remove any terminal covers or
retainers.
Instruction in the disassembly. repair. and
assembly of connectors follows. Consult the
figures for details on each specific type of con-
nector. The instruction is divided into steps.
Only perform those steps necessary to make
the repair.
Step One: Remove the Lead
Depress the terminal locking tang using the
proper size pick.
CAUTION: Do not place fingers or other
parts of the body nex t to or around the
back of the connector. I f too much force is
used. the pick and terminal both could be
pushed out the back of the connector and
cause injury.
- Place the pick between the locking
tang of the terminal and the plastic
of the connector body.
-Ease the lead back enough to
release the locking tang.
-Pull the pick out.
-Gently pull the lead out of the back
of the connector body.
m
r-
m
(")
-t
::D
(5
Step Two: Re-Form the Locking Tang »
r-
If the lead and terminal are in good condi· C
l>
tion, reform the locking tang: G')
z
-Hold the lead firmly to prevent the splice o
C/)
between the terminal and the wire from en
flexing.
- U se the pick to bend the locking tang
back into its original shape. Also check to
see that the remainder of the terminal is
still in its original shape.
Step Three: Make the Repair
When you make a repair. use the correct
types of terminals and wires.
-Attach a new wire or a new terminal
using the procedures in Splicing Copper
Wire or Splicing Aluminum Wire.
Step Four: Insert the Lead
Before inserting the lead. make certain that
the terminal is correctly shaped. Be careful to
insert terminals in their proper locations.
-Gently insert the lead from the back.
The terminal should stop or "catch" about
halfway through the connector body.
Note: With bulkhead connectors. in many
cavities it is possible for the terminal to be
inserted in two ways. Be sure it is inserted in
the same direction as it was removed. or to
mate correctly with the facing terminal.
(Xl
»
I
0'1
REPAIR PROCEDURES

- Push back and forth gently on the lead to

00
be sure the terminal is held in place in
both directions . If the terminal easily
pushes or pulls out. review Step Two:
"He-Form the Locking Tang."
Before mating the connector halves replace
any terminal covers or retainers that were
removed. and apply grease to prevent corro-
NARROW PICK
sion.

DEPRESSING THE LOCKING TANG

/
m
r-
m
(")
-I
::c
n
l>
r-
o
REMOVING TERMINAL RETAINERS RE·FORMING THE LOCKING TANG l>
C)
2
o
Figure 20· High Density Connectors (J)
Cii
REPAIR PROCEDURES m
r-
m
(")
~
:xl
nl>
r-
C
~
G')
TWIST WIDE PICK TO RE·FORM TANG z
o
en
Cii

PUSH IN AND DOWN ON TERMINAL NOTCH

RE·FORMING THE LOCKING TANG (MALE TERMINAL)

LOCKING
TANG

I
WIDE PICK

WIDE PICK -----~

co
l>
DEPRESSING THE LOCKING TANG (MALE TERMINAL) RE·FORMING THE LOCKING TANG (FEMALE TERMINAL)
I
(J'1
Figure 21 . Bulkhead Type Connectors
REPAIR PROCEDURES 00
»
I
U1

LOCKING
....
LOCKING o
RELEASE PARTS OF CONNECTOR TANG TANG
FIRST IF NEEOEO

\
REMOVING TERMINAL RETAINERS (MALE TERMINALS) RE-FORMING THE LOCKING TANG (MALE TERMINAL)

PUSH UP WITH WIDE PICK NOTCH

LOCKING
NIB--~~

~I~"'-""'-TANG m
r-
m
(")
-t
:lJ
n
»
r-
o
~
REMOVING TERMINAL RETAINERS (FEMALE TERMINALS) RE-FORMING THE LOCKING TANG (FEMALE TERMINAL) C>
Z
o
Figure 22 - Metri-pack Type Connectors - Push-To-Seat Type CJ)
c;;
 m
REPAIR PROCEDURES r-
m
C")
-I
::JJ

REPAIRING WEATHER PACK® ~r-

(Environmental) CONNECTORS C
Weather Pack''!) -or weatherproof-connectors l>
G)
provide environmental protection on certain :2
o
electrical circuits. This protection consists of a en
moisture-proof rubber flexible seal between
en
the two connector halves and rubber cable
seals attached to each terminal. The terminals
PUSH NARROW and the cable seals are secured by a hinged sec-
PICK BETWEEN ondary lock on small Weather Pack')
TERMINAL AND connectors and by plastic terminal retainers
CONNECTOR BODY on large Weather Pack(') connectors.
If a Weather Pack'" connector requires
repair. do not replace the Weather Pack'~
parts with other types of connectors and ter-
minals. Also, do not omit either the large seal
or the cable seals when making a repair.
Instruction in the disassemly, repair, and
assembly of both small and large Weather
Pack' connectors follows. The instruction is
divided into steps. Only perform those steps
necessary to make the repair.

Step One: Separate the Connector Halves

To separate a large connector, unscrew the
bolt in the center of the connector body. Then
pull the two halves apart. To separate a small
connector, simply pull up on the primary lock
and simultaneously pull the two halves apart.

(XI
RE-FORM LOCKING TANG »
RE-FORMING THE LOCKING TANG I
(11

Figure 23 - Printed Circuit Type Connectors

REPAIR PROCEDURES co
»
I
C1I
Step Two: Remove the Terminal Retainer(s)
(-Large Connectors)/Open the Secondary
locks (Small Connectors)
To remove a terminal retainer. press a wide
pick at a 45 0 angle against the locking nib (see
Figure 24). Push the nib up as far as possible.
Then. pull the retainer out.
To open the secondary locks on small con-
nectors. flip down the lock hinges as shown in
Figure 25.

Step Three : Remove the lead

Depress the terminal locking tangs using a
Weather Pack ' pick(J28742-A or the equiv-
alent):
- Push the hollow cylinder of the pick into
the terminal cavity from the front until it
stops (see Figures 26 and 27).The pick
LOCKING NIBS
should surround the terminal (see Figure (NOTE: THERE ARE TWO RETAINERS)
28 for drawings of locking tangs).
- Pull the pick ou t .
Figure 24 - Releasing the Terminal Retainers (Large Connectors)
-Gently pull the lead out of the back of the
connector body.
Note that the male connector body half con-
tains female terminals and the female half
houses male terminals.

m
r-
m
(")
....
::0
n
»
r-
C
:;
SECONDARY LOCKS CLOSED SECONDARY LOCKS OPEN G')
:2
o
Figure 25 - Opening the Secondary Locks (Small Connectors) en
Ci)
 m
REPAIR PROCEDURES r-
m
(')
~
::0
Step Four: Re-Form the Locking Tang
WEATHER PACK ® PICK
~
r-
If the lead and terminal are in good condi· C
tion, re-form the locking tang. i>
c;)
-Hold the lead firmly to prevent the splice 2
o
between the terminal and the wire from en
flexing.
en
- Use the pick (J28742-A or the equivalent)
to bend the locking tang back into its
original shape (see Figure 28). Also,
check to see that the remainder of the ter-
minal is still in its original shape. (See
Step Six for instruction in inserting the
lead.)

Step Five: Make the Repair MALE CONNECTOR BODY HALF

When you make a repair, use the correct

types of terminals, wires, and seals. Figure 26 - Releasing The Terminal Locking Tangs (Large Connector)
To add a new lead, cut the wire and crimp
and solder on the weather-pack lead assembly
(see Figure 29) using rosin core solder. (Follow
the instructions for splicing wire outlined ear-
lier in this secton for a review of splicing pro-
cedures.)
If Weather Pack® lead assemblies are not
available, splice a new terminal and cable seal
(Into the existing wire. WEATHER
PACK® PICK
-Cut the wire immediately behind the
cable seal.
-Slip the new cable seal onto the wire and

GENTL:T~ ~~:
push it back out of the way.
-Strip 5.0mm (3/16") of insulation from
the wire. co
REMOVE »
LEAD I
C1I
Figure 27 • Releasing The Terminal Locking Figure 28· Re-Forming The Locking Tang ....
w
Tangs (Small Connectors)
REPAIR PROCEDURES <Xl
1>
I
(J1
-Crimp the new terminal over the copper
strands (core crimp) as shown in Figure OPPOSE TERMINAL RETAINERS
3Q. (U se a standard crimping tool - WHEN REPLACING
number J25563 in the Kent-Moore cata-
log.)
-Solder with rosin core solder. FEMALE
-Move the cable seal to edge of the insula-
tion. 1Cl3=ac::::::~~3
-Crimp the grips at the end of the terminal
around the cable seal and insulated wire
as shown in Figure 30 (insulation crimp).
~f3Ir-w--~
Apply light pressure for this crimp. MALE
Remember to use the proper types of termi-
nals and seals for this repair.

Step Six: Insert the Lead

Before inserting the lead. make certain that
Figure 29 - Lead Assemblies Figure 31 - Replacing The Terminal
the terminal is correctly shaped (see Figure Retainers (Large Connectors)
28). Then. gently insert the lead from the back.
The terminal should stop or "catch" about
halfway through the connector body. Gently
push back and forth on the lead to be sure the SEAL CORE CRIMP
terminal is held in place in both directions. If
the terminal easily pushes or pulls out. review
Step Four; "Re-Form the Locking Tang."
Be careful to insert leads in their proper loca-
tions.
Step Seven: Replace the Terminal Retainer(s)
(Large Connectors)/Secondary Locks (Small m
r-
Connectors) m
(")
-4
Replace the terminal retainers by slipping :J:l
the retainer halves into the connector body (as SECONDARY LOCK HINGES n1>
CLOSED ON CONNECTOR BODY r-
shown in Figure 31).
C
To close the secondary locks on small con- :;
G')
nectors, flip the hinges back to their original 2
positions (see Figure 32).
o
Figure 30 - Replacing The Terminal Figure 32 - Closing The Secondary Locks en
Cii
REPAIRING METRI-PACK SERIES 150 CONNECTORS m
r-
m
n
-t
:D
REPAIRING METRI-PACK SERIES 150 Step 2: Connector Assembly and Terminal ol>
CONNECTORS Insertion r-
C
(Pull-to-Seat Type) Insert the wire through the seal and the 1>
G')
Metri-Pack connectors are used to connect connector body (Figure 35). Crimp the termi- :2
various sensors such as the cam, crankshaft nal to the stripped wire. Pull the wire and the oC/)
and coolant sensors to primary harnesses in terminal back through the connector body en
the engine compartment. The Metri-Pack until it locks in place (Figure 36).
connector consists of three parts (see Figure
29): a Pull to Seat type terminal, a connector CONNECTOR TERMINAL
body and a rubber seal which is inserted in BOOV,
the back of the connector body to provide CONNECTOR
environmental protection. BODY
Do not replace the Metri-Pack parts with
parts of other types of connectors and termi- Figure 35 . Connector Reassembly
nals or omit the environmental seals when
repairing Metri-Pack connectors.
Repair instructions are divided into two
steps, connector disassembly and terminal TERMINAL
removal and connector assembly and termi-
nal insertion. (Refer to figures 33 to 36)
Figure 33 . Terminal Removal From Connector Body
Step One: Connector Disassembly and
Terminal Removal
Insert tool BT-8446 or J35689 into the con-
nector (Figure 33). Pull back on the wire
slightly, pry up the locking tang and then 0:~~, • CONNECTOR
BODY
push the wire through the front of the con- LOCKING
nector. If the terminal will be reused, reshape TAB
the locking tang.
Figure 36 . Terminal Reinsertion

00
LOCKING TANG l>
I
U1
Figure 34· Reforming The Locking Tang ...
U1
~ POWER DISTRIBUTION: V6 VIN 9 00
~
I
~

S202
o
3 REO/WHT
o
19 BlK 5 REO
FUSIBLE LINK G
3 REO

r.
.
FUSIBLE FUSIBLE .5 RUST
LINK CLINK 0 1 PPl/WHT ~ 806

240 .5 RUST 3 RUST

20RN
.35 REO .35 REO ~

.s .s
1 PPlIWHT!806 1 PPL/W:T 1 8
: :20
S REO

S501"_ _1I
REO
E
REO
Cl

1
2
r---' COLO
1 PPl/WHT

ISTART
.-
1 t
1 S06

1 COLO
1 IDRT SOLID
, ELECTRONIC
I CONTROL
S REO
~O
12__3_REf
I. BAT
I·
GENERATOR
PAGE 30·0
I I SWITCH I 1 iNJECi-OR G502
I MODULE (ECM) I
L __ Jii'iiGEii -2 L__ J
STATE
PAGE 21 ·2 = = = IL___________ .JI PAGE 21 -3
I
1
L ___ .. . ___ ..
HEADLIGHT ODOR
MODULE
PAGE 102-0

.80RN 240 3 REO

~~~~~~~.S~O~K~G~R~N~. . . .
3 REO

44
--·-··-...·-,--·.·----·-·· ..110- -----.. FUSE
~ IBloCK
FUSE ,--
.S BRN 2o'A'MP
,,I
":;T---"'==---';';';:,r--, LIGHT r--IN-S-TR-U-M~EN~T~~--~~~~12~PANEl- 5 RED
SWITCH DN INTERIOR ~~~---r-·--·--·--·--·---------~
DIM/--- LIGHTS
~",...rBRIGHT CONTROL

§ill

HEADLIGHT
~
SWITCH
lYEl
1 WHT
.S BRN

103 . ._ _ _iiiiiiiiii.
ill!
:I
,
I
SBR: 9 3 REO

BAT
~
BLOCK

PAGE 100-0 J9 J6 Cl00 SEE LIGHT 5 REO 5 RED

1 VEl f;~--~~~T
103 SWITCH
Al'_____ Cl DETAilS SEE FUSE SEE FUSE 'TI
r--------'HEADLIGHT ODOR PAGE 12-0 BLOCK
DETAILS
BLOCK
DETAilS
m
:xl
L__________
1 IMOOUlE
JPAGE 102-0
CONTINUED ON PAGE 10·3 pAGE 11-3 PAGE 11·3.., 0
 00
POWER DISTRIBUTION J>
I
~
CIRCUIT OPERATION COMPONENT LOCATION Page- Figure o
Electrical power for the car is provided by the A/C Compressor Control Relay. . .. Engine compartment, LH side of rear ~
Generator when the engine is running. The bulkhead 201-10-C
schematic diagram shows how each circuit gets AIC Power Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Front compartment, on RH side of heater-A/C
its power. For more detail about the Generator, module 201-12-B
and connections to the Battery and Starter, see Battery Junction Block RH front of engine compartment, near battery .. 201- 2-C
the Starter and Charging System, Section
Cold Start Injector. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Top of engine, on throttle body
8A-30.
Cold Start Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Top RH side of engine, on intake manifold
The car's Power Distribution System con- Coolant Fan Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. LH front comer of front compartment . 201-10-C
sists of Fusible Links, Fuses, Circuit Breakers, Cruise Brake Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . .. On brake pedal support . 201-10-A
the Light Switch, and the Ignition Switch. Direct Ignition System (DIS) Top rear of engine
Fusible Links are short pieces of wire several Electronic Control Module (ECM) . .. Between seats, on front of rear bulkhead . 201- 7-A
sizes smaller than the circuit wire to which they Fuel Pump Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Engine compartment, LH side of rear bulkhead . 201-10-C
supply power. They are covered with a special Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Behind LH side of liP . 201- 5-D
high-temperature insulation. When conducting Fusible Link A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. RH front of engine compartment, at Battery
too high a current, they will melt and stop cur- Junction Block . 201-11-B
rent flow. They are designed to protect the car's Fusible Link B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. RH front of engine compartment, at Battery
electrical system from electrical shorts where it J unction Block . 201-11-B
is not protected by the Circuit Breakers and Fusible Link C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. In front lights harness, right of brake master
Fuses. See Fuse Block Details for complete dis- cylinder . 201-13-B
tribution of power from each fuse to its indi- Fusible Link D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. In front lights harness, right of brake master
vidual components. cylinder . 201-13-B
The Ignition Switch has six positions, five of Fusible Link E RH front of engine compartment, at Battery
which have detents. The detented positions are J unction Block . 201-11-B
ACCY, LOCK, OFF, RUN and START. The Fusible Link F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. RH front of engine compartment, at Battery
BULB TEST position is after the RUN position Junction Block . 201-11-B
and just before the START position and does Fusible Link G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Lower LH front of engine, at Starter Solenoid . 201- 4-A
not have a detent. Fusible Link H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Engine harness, near rear bulkhead connector . 201-11-B
Individual schematics show their Fuses sup- Headlight Dimmer Switch. . . . . . . .. Lower LH side of steering column . 201- 6-D
plied from a heading such as HOT IN RUN, Headlight Door Module . . . . . . . . . .. Lower LH side of front compartment . 201-12-A
corresponding to the Ignition Switch position High Speed Blower Relay. . . . . . . . .. On RH side of heater-A/C plenum . 201-11-A
in which power is supplied to the circuit. Ignition Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Top of engine, left of throttle body . 201- 3-A
Ignition Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. At base of steering column . 201-11-D
Multi-Function Lever Top LH side of steering column . 201- 6-F
Oil Pressure Switch/Sender (VIN 9).. Lower RH front of engine
Oil Pressure Switch/Sender (VIN R). Rear of engine, center of engine block . 201- I-A '""
m
:xl
0
POWER DISTRIBUTION ."
m
::u
o
Remote Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Below center of liP, near steering column support
....................................... 201- 6-E
Starter Solenoid (VIN 9) ........... Lower LH front of engine.................... 201- 4-A
Starter Solenoid (VIN R) .......... Lower LH front of engine.................... 201- 2-A
Wiper Motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Front compartment, center of front bulkhead . .. 201-14-C
C100 (34 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. LH side of front bulkhead, right of brake master
cylinder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201-11-A
C203 (15 cavities) ................ Between seats, in front of rear bulkhead ........ 201- 7-A
C207 (7 cavities) ................. Behind dash, near steering column ............ 201-11-D
C235 (4 cavities) ................. Middle of steering column ................... 201- 6-F
C245 (8 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Below RH steering column support . . . . . . . . . .. 201- 5-B
C500 (34 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Engine compartment, near battery. . . . . . . . . . .. 201-11-B
C501 (1 cavity) .................. RH side of engine, near Battery Junction Block
C520 (6 cavities) ................. TopRHsideofengine ...................... 201- 4-B
G501 (VIN 9) .................... RH front of engine, near dipstick ............. 201- 3-C
G501 (VIN R) ................... RH side of engine, below oil fill cap ............ 201- 1-B
G502 .......................... Engine ccompartment, on battery tray. . . . . . . .. 201- 3-B
G505 .......................... On trunk lid RH hinge brace ................. 201- 4-E
S201. .......................... Main harness, above steering column .......... 201- 8-A
S202. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Main harness, behind liP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201- 8-A
S206. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Main harness, above LH side of steering column. 201-11-D
S208 ........................... Main harness, near Fuse Block ............... 201- 5-C
S211. .......................... Main harness, behind RH side ofl/P . .......... 201- 5-C
S501 (VIN 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Engine harness, near generator
S501 (VIN R) .................... Engine harness, near generator ............... 201- I-A
S51O ........................... Engine harness, under rear console ............ 201- 7-A
S519. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Engine harness, near Starter Solenoid . . . . . . . .. 201- 4-A

~
I
~

o
U'I
." FUSE BLOCK DETAILS ~
I

c: :1
FAN E
IGN
20
Brown Connector
HTR/AIC

WDO

CTSV/LiD
IGN INST LP RADIO BAT

FRONT VIEW OF FUSE BLOCK REAR VIEW OF FUSE BLOCK

Connector Cavity Locations

."
m
::1:1
o
." FUSE BLOCK DETAILS "T1
m
:::tJ
o
HOT AT ALL TIMES HOT AT All TIMES
,--- - - - - - - - , FUSE
I-
I .----------------------------------------, S££POW£R I BLOCK
I I--
I !!!!l.lli ill!ill!!.. OtSTRtIUTIO.
!!!!
£!WI!! I
II BREAKER
ill!.
Z5AMP
FUSE
iiAMp
I
I
jiA'i,iP" I
I 30 AMP _ ______ ..JI
L_
30RN / BLK 60
3 PN K 76 .B ORN 240
(GRY) W

(GRY)""'I
X
(GRY)I"Y ~ 1 ORN/ OK BLU 340 (BLU)
o R
C200
20RN/BLK 60 (BLU)J P
30RN/ BLK 60 2 PNK 76
r---, ,..--,
A Cl C
I
.1
5 I
I
I
I
I
I r-~:~
,I
.1
L
I
__ .J
I I
I
L __ ...J
I
I
2PN:176 ,,,rnn"'T 2PN:176
,--,
I
A

I
OOOR LOCK
!liill'
OEFOGGER
TIMER
,----,I POWER
I
~ r--..,I ~
I POWER
I
I
I
I
IL- __ I
~ RELAY I I WINDOW · I I WINDOW ~

PAGE 130-0 PAGE61 -0

H9 lORN/OK BLU
I I~
L. ___ PAGE 120-0
L
' I~
__ ..J PAGE 120-0
~
SWITCH

r ~:"''',=F
50~
~--~-=-=-=-=--~ PAGE 12-0

.BORN 40 - tORN/OK BLU 340

(-\ ,...--,
I
B
I
'_",I I I

~ I I.J
L___
LIGHT
PAGE 114-0 ~
RELEASE

.S ORN
"':1::" S303 .S ORN
~
PAGE 134-0

40
·1......................4·0..............................· Jl·C30B
I-
(WHTI$O
~~l!II~iIIliI-II...~~"•• C200 B
(BLK) ""'1 A (WHT)"I F _s ORN B .B ORN
.5 OR: 40 _B OR~ 40 t) .s ORSN 40

r--"" 'I --~I

40 ill! 40 B'"
r:--'" r---'I
I I I I •
I I I I I I I I
I I I I (Xl
I I I I
I
,-__ .J I I
,-__ J I
L __ J L __ J :x:-
~ DOME LH RH I
~ L'iiiHTs OOOR LOCK OOOR LOCK
SWITCH ~
~ ~
PAGE 141-0 PAGE 114-0 PAGE 130-0 PAGE 130-0 .....
-" FUSE BLOCK DETAILS co
»
I
~
~
HOT IN RUN, BULB TEST OR START HOT IN RUN, BULB TEST OR START
N
~-------------------------
1
-----------------.
I,--
FUSE
BLOCK
,, ,
i •. I
1
1 TURI'4 B/U ~ !.!!!J!!:g

l, ~
FUSE
10 AMP
~~_
FUSE
""i"i"AMp
FUSE
5AM'P ,
.,
1

(NOT
.8 PNKiWHT1439
-------------------_.'

I
USED) 1 PNK 839
MAI'4UAl AUTOMATIC MULTI-PORT elECTRONIC
.8 PNK/BlK FUEL INJECTION F ~ FUel INJECTION

75
.8 PNK/BlK

39
i

8 PNKiBlK 439
.8PNK:lK
S507 .'
1 439
••
\

.8 OK. .8 OK 17b
.8 PNKiBlK1439 .8 REO 439
BlU 75 BlU .8 OK I 75 E A A6 g 16!<J A
BlU r""--, r-'--I 'A6! r-i6-, ,--...,
.80K.75
, ' ,, ''
T~
" 'I, SOLIO I II I,
•
BlU
,,
1
''
,, ' 'SOLID ,

C1I""~
.8 OK
BlU
75
•••.__ ..J'
DEFOGGER
L- __

DEFOGGER
..J'
I STATE I
'I
'---....
ELECTRONIC
I STATE I
'I'
L__••••
ELECTRONIC FUEL
I
'- __••.• I
I

1 PNKiBLK 639
.8 OK
TIMER CONTROL
BlU 75 CONTROL CONTROL INJECTOR
o RELAY
PAGE 61·0 MODULE (ECM) MODULE (ECM) PAGE 20·3
GEAR ,---,
SELECTOR: I PAGE 61·0 PAGE 21·3 PAGE 20·3
J ..w.----------- C203
SWITCH 1 ,
B PiiGE'
112.0
,
L.__..••
,----, BACK UP
, 1--- .8 PNKiWHTI839 K
1 , lIGHlS
, 1 SNiTCH

I~
1 1-- A C520
L.__..J PAGE 112·0
.8 PNKiWHT .8 PNK 639
~----------~v--------------I • j .• ~

.8 PNKiWH~ 1 839. PNKiWHT

·"'"I'"1'
1 PNK/BlK~' 39 8
,---,2
, ,
.- l,flASHER
TURN

: IpAGE 110·0
I
,
,
L.__...•
,
I
I
.llii.
.8 PNK J 639
•

~i.
L.. __ J
o Jilin
FUel INJECTORS
.8 PNK/BlK .8 PNK 639 .8 PNK 639
.8 PNK/BlK

35 ~ .Orl''',OL''
__ ::i(t '!'t 39
PAGE 21-3
.S-- S525

.8 PNK/BlK .8 PNK • 639

39
.8 PNK
39 .8 PNKiBLK
9 A,!!! ~.Ag
r--------------------------, 9 ,\---
r--'"
2
,-.:;~..,,.-~---------, 1
r--"'l
1
..;...,3
r..• r'--...,
I
,
,
LI
1
1
,
~1
"
I
L__
""D~
, " I
,
,
I
",
I I
L
-
ALARM',
MODULE
::::::=
I
I
I I

,L__J'
, I
,
I
,
I
I
'
I
.JI _
I

,
I
I
,
I
,
,

INSTRUMENT ~ ~
..J L.__ ..J
RALL Y GAGE PANEL CONVENIENCE
J
......
-----""I
L- __

v
'--- ....
elECTRONIC VACUUM
"T1
m
PAGES 80·0, 80·1, 80·2, SWITCH PAGE 80·3 ~ FUel INJECTORS REGULATOR VALVE J:J
AND 80·3 PAGES20·2, 21-2 PAGE 75·0 PAGE 21·3 (EVRV) PAGE 21·1 o
." FUSE BLOCK DETAILS :!!
m
:xl
o

HOT AT ALL TIMES

r--------
I
I
------------------------------------------------------------------------------ ---------'FUSE
BLOCK I
I fEU. I
I 25 AMP FUSE I
I ZOAMP I
I ____________________________________
20 AMP _ ________ JII
IL _______
BAT _ BAT

(NOT (NOT
USED) USEO)
.8 BRN 250 (L4 VIN R)

COOLANT r--, .8 BRNI r---,

.80RN 140 ~I I,C .8 BRN .F~
.'J
.B BRN
• S215
.8 BRN
--~(t--(I
Bl WHT FI ,
RELAY I J,J
' ___ ..1I
PAGE31 .0 & 250 £!!!!! 250 250 C500 250 , II
L __ J
lORN 40
.-----...
S204

140
.8 BRN 250
GENERATOR
PAGE 30·1

.BORN 140 .BORN 140

r--- -------""
I I r-;u'Dw--- ---1 I
B £1
r---, I
I r--l
HAZARD I I, A!.!!!M I, I I G8 C500
L--J FLASHER JI
I ____________
I..
I ---, ,-I MODULE
L.. _____________ ~ , I I
IL ___ .II

CONVENIENCE CONVENIENCE BRAKE

SWITCH
CENTER ~ .8 BRNiWHT 250
PAGE 110·0 PAGE 75·0 PAGE 110·0

lORN ,-.... .8 BRN/WHT .8 BRNiWHT ,,-,

40 (
, ,)
/ ' 250 " ~
S405 250 (I, _ I\
~ TAl L .,. .!!!!..lA!!
lORN
LIGHTS / '- LIGHTS
40 I' - , .8 BRNiWHT " .8 BRNiWHT 1'-\
lORN 40
1 J)r- - (( J
C209 ,_/ 250 250 '- ..,.,

~I,
.8 BRNiWHT 250
.8 BRNiWHT

r---,
.80RN 40 .80RN 40
,.---
I A
-------. I 1"'------------.
A
ENGINE
I I
,,-, LH
.... ,
RH
I :
I
I
I
L __
,
,
, "
\ ....... .,I \ "'."I
I
II
. . - - - , HORN
'---...J RHA Y
I
I, I
II
BLOWER
'RELAY
,'PA'GE31
..-----------...
~

£!.!!.M RADIO COURTESY .. ------------~

CONVENIENCE
ex>
l>
LIGHTER PAGE 150·0 !J.QJill CENTER
PAGE 114·0 PAGE 114·0 PAGE 40·0 I

w
-" LIGHT SWITCH DETAilS 00
:x:-
I
...Ii

N
HOT AT ALL TIMES HOT AT ALL TIMES

FUSIBLE LINK B J REO/WHT I ------, FUSE o

TAIL : BLOCK
.~ 11

i
2 FUSE 1--
I RED 1
SEE POWER. J RED • S202 1 2iiAMp
______ .J:
DISTRIBUTION 2 l
JREO 2 .80RN 240

C A

I,- ----------~--.,
CIRCUIT LIGHT
1 --
I BREAKER 1 SWITCH
I I
I 1
: Hr • _ Off ,_ Off l
L ~~A~~ --E±JP~:J
. .8 BRN

_SBRN
.U
.8 BRN

S211
9

.S BRN
,
C2"'" FO £lQQ.
,.----:1--------i
.8 BRN _ •••• PANEL-INTERIOR

ss "l---~~"-" .S BRN .8 BRN

0_
1 INSTRUMENT

I'
COURTESY 12 1,: LIGHTS CONTROL

::1
11 DIM --SRIGHT ON I
,,-,
!
/--\ 1""-\
I
I
,_.I I I
',_I l,...••.J
J "
~------
'L~,="'-~C7'l_
c :,':~::
UNOERHOOO CONSOLE
LIGHT ASHTRAY LIGHTS
E (TRANSISTOR)
PAGE 114-1 PAGE 114-1
.8 BRN .S BRN

C208
.8 BRN
944 l:LJ C

_80KGRN144

------------- -----11--
FUSE
~ IBLOCK
5 AMP I
1
i:'P).. I
.8 BRN I 9
.8 SRN I 9 .5 BRN 19 .5 BRN I 9 I BRN
------------~~~1(~
r,
BA

,_I
r=>.\ A
'
A
.,..--- ....
,1
A
.•..-'\ r---, ,,-, ,--,
,"----,; " ,
( \ 1 I , I I I I I
\.._.1 I I
\ ..•.•.
} _SGRyIS , ,

LH FRONT
MARKER
LIGHT
!J:!..£!!!!!!r
PARKfTURN
LIGHT
" '---'I
!!!!.£!!!!!!!
PARKfTURN
!Jill!!
RH FRONT
MARKER
LIGHT
--
'1'00
.8 BRN 9
1
IL. __ -,

CLOCK
PAGE 150-0
1
1 CIGAR
LIGHTER
LIGHT
--
I
IL__
1
1
-,
DEFOGGER
CONTROL
"T1
m
::0
PAGE 110-0 PAGE 110-0 PAGE 110-0 PAGE 110-0 PAGE 114-1 PAGE 61·0 o
 'T1
-"
m
:lJ
o

.8 BRN

• i.i
• S402
.8 BRN

9
•
C401
A

r
.8 BRN
.- S404

8 BR:198

",...,\
BRN 198BRN

,----.., ,---.....
19 .8BRNf

-,
8 BR:19 .8 BR:19 .8 BRN19 .8 BRN 19
,,--- .....
.8 BRN

,---,
r r .8 BR:

"... ....•
.8 GRY

"
,.,.-, 1'-,
I I \1 \ / \ / \ I '
1 \ ( ,

"
,-'I' '...• _--." I'
' _--,; ) l" -'I
.•...
,_I
( \ I
....
_" I
I
'--
J \
,--",;,; ) \ '---; \,,,,,'
lH REAR lH TAILlSTDPITURN LH TAil LICENSE LIGHTS RH TAil RH REAR
RH TAILISTOP/TU.~~
MARKER
--- LIGHTS - 'liGiiT PAGE 110-3 TiGHT .!:.!..Q..!ill. MARKER
PAGE 110·3 Pii'G'Ell0·3
LIGHT PAGE 110-3
PAGE 110·3 ~
PAGE 110·3 PAGE 110·3

SE MODelS SE MODELS

.5 GRY

C211

.5 GRY

.35 GR:18 .6G:VI

8 .35 GRY 18 .35 GR:18 .35 GR YI8 .8 GRY 18 .35GRYf .5GRY18
3 ____ 1~
1
fl.
.5GRY
7.l----J~g
r---1 r---"
I I
,,-, r---, I
A
r---'I
,.-"
I ,
"-11" ------, r--------------------,
I I
I I I I I I I DAUDID I
I
I
I
I
I __ ..JI
•.••
I
I
•.••
I
I
I __ ..JI
~_/
SHIFT
I
I
I
I
L____
I I
I
I
I
L..__
I
I
I
..J
\

HEATER
--- I I
I
L______
A'lAiiM
-===JI
MOiiii'lE
I I
I
L____________________
I
I
JI
I

Mill INDICATOR CONTROL

~ TRUNK AIC CONTROL CONVENIENCE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CXl
~ PAGES 117·1, liGHT
RELEASE HEAD
HEAD
CENTER PAGE 117·1 l>
IllUMINATIOfl 150·0 (AUTOMATIC II GHT
PAGE 11 -1 TRANSAXlE ~ PAGE 11,·1
PAGE 117·1
PAG E no I
PAGE 134-0
ONLY) -10
PAGE 117·1 N
-0 GROUND DISTRIBUTION: G101, G102, G201, G202, G401, G501, G502, G503,G504, AND G505 (Xl
»
INSTRUMENT PANEL, FRONT AND LIGHTS GROUNDS I

BRAKE
o
COOLANT FLU ID LEVEL HEADLIGHT
LH FRONT RH FRONT
FAN MOTOR SWITCH DOOR MODULE
PARi<7TiJR N LH DUAL BEAM PARK7TURN
r- -, LIGHT HEADLIGHT r--""
I I
r---, RH DUAL BEAM
HEADLIGHT LIGHT

,,;.----.
I I I I
I I ,.---,\ ,.--~ I I I I ,---....
,I. ,,
I I I '\

,",-,---'""
I I I I \
L___ J I
\ ,I I
\ J ' I
,-__ .J I I 1 I
...... _-"
,----'" '---'" L. __ -"
A B o £
.B BLK 150 1 BLK 150
.8BLK 150
.5BLK 150 .8 BLK 150 .5BLK 150

3BLK 151

1 BLK

150

• Gl02

LH RH
DOOR AJAR DOOR AJAR
SWITC H LEVEL WARNING SWITCH
.---,
I I
STii'PLIGHT r---, r--""I
,
r- I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
(\ :: I
I
I
,- __ .JI
I
I
L.. __ .J
}i~<n L_--l
.8BLK~~3~150
B B

.8 BLK 150 .8BLK 150

.8BLK1150
o C305

.."" B
~~)-------- ...
.8BLK
.8BLKll~

';Om'r::' ""
.8BLK
------~(~~

""
B

"':F'
 .."
m
:xl
o
!!!Q!!.
CRUISE AIC SPEED
CONTROL SUBWOOFER POWER ~ BLOWER WASHER

•.... --.,
r.mDUlE AMPLIFIER RADIO

r---' I I
r---,
I I
RELAY
r---'
~
r---'
MOTOR
r---, 1""--. ~
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I I I I I
I I : I I I I I I I L___
I I I I
I I I___14 .JI L__
J I I
..J
FOR C500 TERMINAL L •• •.••__ ..JI
I L..__ I I
'--- ...•
I I

"'t~
VIEW SEE JUNCTION G

f
e2 B
CONNECTOR PAGE 202·1 .5 BlK 1150 .B Bl~1150
.5 BlK .150
.8 BlK 1 150 .8 Bl:J150 3 BlK 150 .8 BlK .150
L.~

C247 • 7e S106

l!!. !ill. OUTSIDE AIRI RALLY PANEL·

TRUNK FUEL CONSOLE ~ CIGAR SHIFT RECIRCULATION TRUNK HEATER AUDIO GAGE ~
~ ~ ASHTRAY ASHTRAY LIGHTER CIGAR INDICATOR DOOR MODE DOOR AIC CONTROL RELEASE CONTROL ALARM IllUM· INSTRUMENT LIGHTS
Moiilii: E
~
•....
I
--., I
~--, 1-' (
•...
I I
!:.!!U!l.
.•.,\ "•.....•. r---, ,,-
LIGHT LIGHT LIGHTER LIGHT ACTUATOR
r--, r----,
ACTUATOR HEAD
1""------,
~
r---, -, r--- HEAilliGHT

I
INA TI 0 N
r--~r~---, r----,
PAN EL CONTROL

I I
I
I
I
I
I
I ,...•. \"....I ,_/ l l I,_I'
I
I
\ J I }
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I \
'I
I I
•••••••••
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
II
II
I
I
I
I I

~-I-"
I I I I I I I I
I I I I
L__ I I
.J
I
L... __ ..J
I I I
'- __ ..J
I
L .J I
L ___ "I
I I I I II I I
'- __ -J
I

7I--.J L_}_-' A'" A cV H

.8 I C L...2_.J ~-1~;-ilY~3J B

1 BlK 150 .35 BlK 150 .8 BlK 150 .8 BlK 1 150 .8 BlK 1150 BlK 150 .35BlK 150 .5 3 BlK 150

.8 BlK 150 .35 BlK H..., C211 BlK .150 Cl00

150 .5 BlK 150 .35 BlK 150 .8 BlK 1 150 .8BlK1150 150 ,- .BBlK 150 A4
.5
BlK 150
C ••••. C250 A •• C502
.35
150 BlK
.5 BlK 1 150
3BlK 1150

.8BlK1150

J BlK

150
BATTERY

+ -
1 BlK

150 SEE r.1UL TI·PORT FUEL

INJECTION (V6 VIN 9)
SEE ELECTRONIC FUEL
RADIO
STATIC SHIELD
(ENGINE
FOR ClOD TERMINAL
VIEW SEE BULKHEAD
CONNECTOR PAGE 202·0

SEE MUL TI-PORT FUel INJECTION (l4 VIN R) COMPARTMENT

3 BlK 1 150

o
INJECTION (V6 VIN 9) LID)
A2 C500
3 BlK 150 ELECTRONIC FUel
INJECTION (L4 VIN R)
(V6) .8 DK GRN .BTAN 413
152 AIR CONDITIONING:
COMPRESSDR CONTROLS

;"'_1 ""I
00
GROUND STRAP l>
(l4) 1 BlK (l4) 1 BlKIWHT 450
5 BLK

{..""1..
(V6) 1 BlK I
3 BlK ....10

...
is •
~
.!- G502 ",G505 "'G202 *G504 ~ ~G401 ov ....•
c GROUND DISTRIBUTION: G400, SE MODELS 00
l>
REAR LIGHTS GROUNDS I
~
~
N

V6 VIN 9

,
"' ...•.
,_/1
~
~ ,_..•.,
,-"
(
/-,!!.!:!..
I IBACK UP
1-,-- !!!!.!A!!
t,_ .•..I LIGHT "
'\
----,
I RH STOP/TURN
~---,
"\ I
-, RH REAR
'MARKER
r---' ENGINE
, : BLoweR

L__,--
~ ,_.... L'i'ii'iiT -:::,-'" ANa TAIL LlGHTS••••---
"
'-"liGHT " IMOTOR

..1. ..
I..
B""-- ..J

..,,1...-- .."I... .8 BLK .150 .8 BLK • 150 .8 BLK 1 150 .8 BLK.

B

150

lBLKI150

B~OO

r--' ,-- LH REAR ,---, \ ~--~ - ••••• LH TAIL 1-.•.•.

LH BACK UP
I
II I
VACUUM
IRELEASE
Sii"lENOi a
Fj'--'
:
I
CRUISE
: CONTROL
I SERVO
I
,_/
,--
, MARKER
LIGHT
I
\
'--_/
ILH STOP/TURN I
/

ANa TAIL LlGHTS'----'

~
) f,_/- \ liiiHT \
'-
) hill!!J

B ""
1---
L__.J I
L__..J ,-- -

.8 BLK 1 150 .8BLK1150 .8 BLK 1150 1 BLK 1150 .8 BLK 1 150 .8 BLK 1150 .8 BLK 1 150 .8 BLK 1150

3 BLK 1 150

::!J
m
:D
~~ o
." GROUND DISTRIBUTION: G400, GT MODELS !!
m
::D
REAR LIGHTS GROUNDS o
( ....vH BACK UP I
,. ....\ ,-\ ' \
~
,---,
J \)
I
,---,\ r--.,
I I RELEASE
VACUUM ,..--..., CRUISE
I I--
\.....ci LIGHT \ _/
I
'-'" .... _-_ ... lH TAil/STOP .. _-_ ...

b!.illill
IL.. __ .....ISOLENOID
I
1
1
1 CONTROL
I SERVO
L. __ ...I1 - -
B C
.8 BlK 150 .8 BlK 150 .8BlK 150
.B BlK 150 .8 BlK 150
.8BlK 150 .8 BlK 150

.8BlK 150

REAR PONTIAC EMBLEM

"..-,I
f
\. .I
1 BlK 150
,
( - ' , RH BACK UP LIGHT

.8BlK 150
.8BlK 150
.8 BlK 150
.8 BlK 150
.8 BlK 150 .8 BlK 150

V6 VIN 9

/ - - - .., RH TAIL/STOP , " ' - - - \

I
r---, ENGINE
\
'--_... J LIGHTS
--
\
'---' I

.8 BlK 150 .8 BlK 150

.. --
•
L __ .....
B
1 BLiiWeR
'IMiiToR

1 BlK 150
.8 BlK 150

.8BlK 150 .8 BlK 150

.8 BlK 150

00
l>
I
" MULTI-PORT FUEL INJECTION : V6 VIN 9
IGNITION AND SERVICE ENGINE SOON INDICATOR
HOT AT ALL TIMES HOT IN RUN, BULB TEST OR START

o
I,.-~--------'
r------]------IIGNITION
I I SWITCH GAGES FUSE I FUSE
BLOCK

: ACC Y~ d START: 1
:
10 AMP I
SEE FUSE BLOCK:
l ___ !!.El~l1 ___ .J
I
I LOC K
"
TEST I
SUL S I
1 PNK / BLK l' 39

1
: OFf RUN :
I II I SEE FUSE BLOCK • gQI .8 PNK / BLK
~-------- ----_ .... DETAILS ~~~~.-
.8 PNK / BLK ~ 39 39
9)1.g 9 II
r-----
I
--------------1---------.
' INSTRUMENT PANel
INSTRUMENT
I CLUSTER
3 PNK 13

SEE
I
lBII
TACH
- -
OPTION G) EN'iii'NE" "SERVICE
__
I ---
II PRINTED
• _ _ ~POWER ir====:::(
2ill DISTRIBUTION
.35 WHT 121
(SOLID
STATE) 'I SOON"
iNiii'CATOR !
I CIRCUIT

'-------~~~:(:0======~1" "--;;~~~:~'"
3 PNK SEE GROUND
DISTRIBUTION
~ __
1--
1~212 5 BRNI
WHT 419
LINK (ALOLI
CoNNECTOR
SEE GROUND
DISTRIBUTION

~ ~ "'/W":I4~::T/BLIK:.:'----------ll-------~~~N]E
E3

---G
C3 _C5_0_" '"" '::. . . . 461
~
LINK H
.8 WHT 121
A5 __ __ .!9 \ g -= G504 AB g
.5 RUST
B C511 r- 5VREF--------------i;j'V--- ----iGNi~ON-. ELECTRONIC

1
TACHOMETER
FILTER 121 MODULE CONTROL
p;;;.=;;..._ _ _-,

¥ J
SOLID BYPASS MODULE
WHT SOLIO I
DIAGNOSTIC STATE OUTPUT (ECM)
,.."....--..---1 STATE ... "TEST" SERIAL _ §. SV SOLID STATE
121
-4l OATA -= 00 NOT
1 PNK 3 -= 5V MEASURE

TO SPARK
A ill!. -= ELECTRONIC SPARK TIMING l EST) OI STRIBUTOR
~~~~~~CE
SOON"
:r16V ~~~~~ RESISTANCE
PL UGS
~
.8 DOE S NOT USE MECHANICAL OR VACUU M SPARK ADVAN CE LIGHT SOLIO ~
WHT 121 CONTROL DISTRIBUTOR SPARK STATE
elECTRONIC MOOULE (SOLIO STATE)
~ _________________ ~~~~~~___
-= REFERENCE TTMING
_~~~_
- •
_ __ ~__ _ ___ ..J
-=
PICK·UP COIL
TTMER B5 - - - - - - - -B3 - --84 g 05 ~

,-...,
CORE

_ur. I
AMPLIFIER PPLIWHT
.8 PPLIWHT
C
430
.8 WHT 423
'.~/
L.::_
430 I
I
BLK / RED IA .B BLK/RED

453 I 4S3
.B PNK WHT 10

423 I
TAN / BLK IB .8 TAN /BLK

.8WHT 424 C506 424

"T1

121
m
::0
o
" MULTI-PORT FUEL INJECTION: V6 VIN 9 ":lJm
~ FUEL CONTROL o
HOT AT ALL TIMES HOT IN RUN. BULB TEST OR START HOT IN ACCY O R RU N

r- ------, FUSE
:
I
L
I
~
FUSE
I BLOCK
I
______ ..!
iiAiip I
.-1--------'
I
I
I
I
TBIINJ 2 FUSE
SAMP I
I--
I BLOCK
FUSE
I--
,.
I
,
Il_
-------'FUSE
RADIO FUSE : BLOCK
I
L ________
I .JI RADIO:
_ ______ -'
1 PNK/BLK 639

.
8PNK
K

lrn C203

.8 PNK
SEE
MUL TI·PORT FUEl

lORN 440 -1
S516
.8 PN: 639 639
• INJECTION:
FUEl INJECTORS
S:I_,

~
ELECTRONIC
.5 VEl/BLK 4J
I
L--""!":~----::"~---~::::T-_.....J SOLID STATE

.8 BLK/WHT
o
450
BI
.8 GRVI 90'
CI
.8 OK 997
I REGULATOR
~(EVRV)

DO NOT MEASURE
RESISTANCE
ELECTRONIC
CONTROL
MODULE
(ECM)
SOLID STATE
_J
SEE POWER
OISTRIBUTION

1 ORN / BLK 440

('_!C___2~_L___--__r=1
RED GRN

I=;--~~~-l
DO NOT MEASURE

I,I PROGRAMMABLE READ ONL Y

MEMORY (PROMI PLUG·IN
II

--
1 ORN / BLK MODULE I

L__ !!'!!'.!._____________________________________
, PARK·NEUTRAL VEHICLE SPEED
,!f,!S!!!.I!"!~J
I
ASSEMBL V LINE
DIAGNOSTIC
~(ALDL)
i--Z-i
I
: lOW
A
OIL

ISENOER
PRESSURE
I SWITCHI
8 0 A~
.8 OK GRN/WHT

~ 465
FUel
., ,,:',", ------------------
[~m ~~~~'I-- -----~~f~~~J
CONNECTOR , - ... ,
------»' .. PUMP r-----
, . ..------,I -- GRN .5 OK GRNI

1 TAN/WH~JI20 _- - - - - - RELAV ,,----< I

GEAR
SELECTOR
SENSOR
--- HT J89
WHT

! ~
1 TAN I 120
WHT ~
S509

~~-==--=:;;;,·T·A!::N../W·HI!':Tl'7;o
1 TANMlHT

'20
B 1 C

A' ~ I P
O
N .....
.L
! SWITCH
: AUTOMATIC
ASSEMBLVlINE
DIAGNOSTIC
.8V:Lt oo '8PPtJ
WHT
' 401 .51eS216
DKGRNI
, , TRANSAXLE ~ (AlOL) WHT 389
L C20J
fstl L__________ J ONL V CONNECTOR G __ ___ R Ql!! CRUISE
1 TANIWHTl';;--
C C502
1,;-
.8 BLK/WHT 450
I.
I
I
I
I
I
IGN .JI
IL ____
B A .5 VE~ I1{:~:~~I~~_u _____ ! f! CONTROL

:r------------------------,
TAN /WHT

FUel
TANK
ElECTRONIC
CONTROL
MODULE (ECM)
.8 BL K/WHT 450
.B BLK/WHT 450

I
,I ,
SINGLE SPEED
SENSOR BUFfER
I,'

UNIT
I ______ ------------------~
SOUO STATE " ,
DO NOT MEASURE RESISTANCE~ . / / .8 BLK/WHT 'i.. . 8 BLK/WHT P l1'f! INSTRUMENT

1 BLKI'50
~~~~~~~S50~4e,. 450
Of""
ClOJ 450
~
PRINTED <Xl
l>
450~~
A C502 CIRCUIT
.5 BLK 11-;)
IBLK SEE GROUND I
S213e _ _ ~ SEE GROUND SEE GROUND . _•.8.D.K.G.RN_ _1IIIiIIII. DISTRIBUTION
DISTRIBUTION
N
~
3 BLKl150 DiSTRIBUTION.... '52 "
_ G202 :'g!!!,.
MULTI-PORT FUEL INJECTION: V6 VIN 9 00
l>
ENGINE DATA SENSORS, TRANSAXLE CONVERTER CLUTCH AND START I
N
...10
HOT IN RUN, BULB TEST OR START HOT A.T A.LL TIMES

"~--------lFUSE
, GAGES FUSE I BLOcK
r-
I
-s''i-------ii -I~
, SWITCH
I 10 AMP 1-- : ACCV. ' ~ARTII---
I SEE FUSE I I ''III. " i
l __ .!:?:~~:!~~ : lOtK .... IULB I
I

- IT3
1 PNK/8LK 39 ,8 PNK/ 8LK I Off RUIf TEST
~~~~~S2~0~3! 39 ~ L ____________y_J

.8 PNK/ 8LK 39
I~ 8RAKE SWITCH I
T -- ----
OPEN WITH 8RAKE
PEOAL DEPRESSED ~
SEE STARTER
SYSTEM I
SEE FUSE . ... -- . ~ ~

9 g
BLOCK DETAILS
I So-----,
r----l I •••LI.N.K,G• • •
r----r--------j'NSTRUMENT
I A
I ~ UPSHIFT : PRINTED
I~
L ___.J ,5 RUST
1 PPLIWHT 806
1 PPLI

"'~I!!:o....
• .. r..!::;;II-~o«1
g]II COLO
START
I W iNoiCiiTOR I CIRCUIT AUTOMATIC !!ill.
I y "0' : (MANUAL
L_:::k. _____ ---.J ONLY)
II TRANSAXLE CONVERTER TRANSAXLE 1 PPLIWHT 806 (
lli:!£ilQ.B.

119. ASSEMBLY LINE

CLUTCH SOLENOIO (AUTOMATIC
ONLY)
2

I I .8:
DIAGNOSTIC THIRO GEAR AIR CONDITIONING:
.5 TAN/8LK 456 ~ (ALDL) ~~~~~ IN COMPRESSOR CONTROLS

P
8 TAN / 8LK
~
456
.8 TAN~80L:Ni:2:R
S521 • ___
8 TAN / 8LK OJ THIRO GEAR
___,...__=-oe::_;iiI!
,."._.,..
I BLuI 6;

8 TAN/BL 422 422 .8 OK 8LU 459

=

z
A1 A1 g C2!:! 88 g
r-----------------------;;;;,:;,l~~~~~~~~~~::~~· -S::-o----------------------------l;;;:;----r-;;;;-o~-------------------, ~~~~:~OLNIC
" STATE CLUTCH CONTROL nATE STATE INPUT : "'OUT(EC )
I~
•
'.
UPSHIFT LIGHT CONTROL
(MANUAL ONLY)
-1 AUTOMATIC
ONL Y
-1 AIC COMPRESSOR
CONTROL RelAY ---1
...
I SOLID STATE
I
M

_ - - = •
" 5V MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE "~RESsURE SENSOR - THROTTLEPUT
POSITION W _
-
DONOT
I MEASURE

n fj -.- .
'. 1REF i IN1PUT INPUT SENSOR IN REF " RESISTANCE
OXYGEN
I GROUND 5 VOL T REFERENCE GROUNO COOLANT SENSOR GR~ GnROUND I
, AIR TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE INPUT I ~ _ '.
I PT - - = = INPUT -

';;~ g~~~---------.~:~~~j~~~I:~~ ~~~-~~"f4 ~~~~~~~~ih ~:~t-~:l"'fu':.J

.8 GRN .8 GRY 416 .8 OK 8LU 411 .88LK 452 1

:,;'" 1
S513 LT .8 YEL 410 .8 PPL 412 8LKI
-- GRN 432 ~ WHT 450

412.88LK/ r-"""'~I!!:o-!::;;II..,,-1·~:NJ·::] '~'J":" 1'~" ,~" ·~:-1

.8 TAN

:,;" .m, '" .• ", '"

REO 469 .88LK/REO 469 8LK 450 GRN SEE GROUND

I t71'
~
A
I MANIFOLD AIR
TEMPERATURE
(MAT)~~(MAP)
11"f?1<
A

~
8 C
I MANIFOLD
A8S0LUTE
11"f?1< I
A

~
C

~
~
THROTTLE 11'::t
A

~TEMPERATURE
8
ICOOLANT

.SENSOR
~-
=
~
SENSOR
DISTRIBUTION

~
'\) MULTI-PORT FUEL INJECTION: V6 VIN 9 ~
m
::0
FUEL INJECTORS o
HOT IN RUN BULB TEST OR START

'!!.ihf.j"''Mii r----------------------------------
I
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -... FUSE
I BlocK
I
I ECM IGN FUSE TBIINJ 2 FUSE !.!!.!.!lli I --
I
I IOAMP SAMP ~
SAMP
II
I
IL. _ _ _ I
.5 RUST
1 PN K/BL K
--------------------- -----------_.
639
~~~E .8 PNK .8 PN: T6:--------'--~----------J] ~
20RN 240 .8 PNKIWHT1439
BLOCK
DETAILS
..... ------.liill
639. 8 PN: 1:3~ _____________________A
.8 PNK/WHT 839
C520

1...---.1
C501
T .8 PN K 639
.8 PNK/WHT'i' 839

.--
~ S526

.---.--..
20RNT 2;- S525
F . C203 .8 PNK 639 .8 PNK/WHT 839 .8 PNKI 1839 .8 PNK/1839

[rill,"trill"fuj' tru:"'[ill' "'l1rrJ~''''

ill.Q.

.8 LT 2 .8 LT 2 'l( .8 LT 2 .8 LT 2 .BL T 2 Y .BL T 2

.8 PNK/BLK 439 BLU/BLK 467 BLU/BLK ~ 467 BLU/BLK 467 GRN/BLK 468 GRN/BLK ~ 468 GRN/BLK 468
lORN 240 lORN 240

.8 LT BLU/BLK 467
C l·~
_
.8 LT GRN/BLK 468

.8 LT BLU f4"67 ----------------~;~T-G~N

~C520
4~8 LT BLU
l·~
I
. -_ _ _ • .8LT • _ _ _iil.

Bl
,------
C16 A6 ~ _____________ .8 LT ~~~1~~ _____~~5 __ .~~T_G~~ 4~~ __~~14~~ ____ ~~I~ __ ~~JllJu
POWER INPUT (MEMQRY) IGNITION POWER IGN ------\---------------\------\--------------\-~ ELECTRONIC
BATT _ .....-~..:..:.....:..:...:...:...;..:..:.......:.:..:....:.:..:.....- - - - - - - - - - _ . SOLID STATE I CONTROL
Call A COil B SOLID SOLID· SOLID SOLID I MODULE (ECM)
~
BATT BATT
. I
~
BATT
. I BATT
SSOTAlTIDE ---":~VOT
r
USED
STATE
1__-
STATEI-

-
STATEI-

-=
STATE t-
-=
...
I ~~L~~~TATE
MEASURE
~ ~ SOLID ~ SOLID ~ ~ .76V
SOLID
STATE
~
SOLID
'STATE
+
, . STATE'
i STATE'
~
t
- - -..
__ ~.4SV
'-------------_.v,--------------..1 INJECTOR CONTROL
RESISTANCE

:L~T
-=
I

-=
I

-1 - - - - - - - __________1______________________
I ' - - - - - - -....

0Ih~:~
~~F

BLK/W:~ r:5~-----------------8-B::I4~:-~-:~1~:~----------
1_____ 1

tr
.8 LT BLUI 4:2LT GRN! 443 :RL:I 4: A12 g 1

BLUIWHT 441 WHT BLK SEE GROUND ~~

.-=aIEae:;~
REO
ABC

T-- J
0
~
~ 1 BLK 450 l
DISTRIBUTION

1 BLK 450
SEE GROUND
DISTRIBUTION SI;E
co
l>
I
II ~
~
--
STEPPER
r MULTI-PORT
FUEL INJECTION:
ENGINE DATA
N
MOTOR 0 ~~ -!= G504 SENSORS
.....10
 00
MULTI-PORT FUEL INJECTION: V6 VIN 9 »
I

COMPONENT LOCATION
Assembly Line Diagnostic Link
Page- Figure I=
N

(ALDL) Connector . In console, near rear of shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201- 7-A

Brake Switch . Top of brake pedal support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201-10-A
Cold Start Injector . Top of engine, on throttle body
Cold Start Switch . Top RH side of engine, on intake manifold
Coolant Temperature Sensor (VIN 9) Top LH of engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201- 3-A
Electronic Control Module (ECM) ... Between seats, on front of rear bulkhead . . . . . .. 201- 7-A
Electronic Spark Timing (EST)
Distributor . Top LH side of engine ...................... 201- 3-A
Electronic Vacuum Regulator Valve
(EVRV) . RH front of engine, on air intake duct .......... 201- 4-B
Fuel Injectors . Top of engine, at each intake port
Fuel Pump Relay . Engine compartment, LH side of rear bulkhead . 201" 1O-C
Fuel Tank Unit . Top of fuel tank
Fuse Block . Behind LH side of liP ...................... 201- 5-D
Fusible Link F . RH front of engine compartment, at Battery
Junction Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201-11-B
Fusible Link G . Lower LH front of engine, at Starter Solenoid ... 201- 4-A
Fusible Link H . Engine harness, near rear bulkhead connector ... 201-11-B
Gear Selector Switch . LH rear of engine, top oftransaxle ............ 201- 2-B
Idle Air Control Valve . RH front of engine, on throttle body ........... 201- 3-A
Ignition Coil . Top of engine, left ofthrottle body ............ 201- 3-A
Ignition Switch . At base of steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201-11-D
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP)
Sensor (VIN 9) . RH top of engine, on air intake duct ........... 201- 4-B
Manifold Air Temperature Sensor
(VIN9) . LH front of engine compartment, on air cleaner.. 201- 4-C
Oil Pressure Switch/Sender (VIN 9).. Lower RH front of engine
Oxygen Sensor (VIN 9) . LH front of engine, on exhaust manifold . . . . . .. 201- 3-A
Starter Solenoid (VIN 9) . Lower LH front of engine .................... 201- 4-A
Tachometer Filter . Top of engine, near ignition coli .............. 201- 7-B
Throttle Position Sensor (VIN 9) . LH top of engine, on throttle body . . . . . . . . . . .. 201- 3-A
Vehicle Speed Sensor . RH end of transaxle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201- I-A
C203 (15 cavities) . Between seats, in front of rear bulkhead ........ 201- 7-A
C500 (34 cavities)
C501 (1 cavity)
.
.
Engine compartment, near battery. . . . . . . . . . ..
RH side of engine, near Battery Junction Block
201-11-B
Ij
MULTI-PORT FUEL INJECTION: V6 VIN 9 'TI
iii
:lJ
o
C502 (3 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Engine compartment, center of rear bulkhead. .. 201-11-B
C506 (4 cavities) ................. Top LH side of engine ...................... 201- 3-A
C507 (1 cavity) (V IN 9) . . . . . . . . . . .. LH front of engine compartment, near exhaust
manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201- 3-A
C511 (2 cavities) ................ . Top of engine, near ignition coil ............... 201- 3-A
C520 (6 cavities) ................ . Top RH side of engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201- 4-B
G201 ......................... . Behind center ofI/P . ....................... 201- 5-C
G202 ......................... . Between seats, near rear bulkhead ........... . 201- 5-A
G503 (VIN 9) ................... . LH top of engine, below throttle body ........ . 201- 3-A
G504 (V IN 9) ................... . LH top of engine, below throttle body ........ . 201- 3-A
8201 .......................... . Main harness, above steering column ......... . 201- 8-A
8203 .......................... . Main harness, above steering column ......... . 201- 8-A
8208 .......................... . Main harness, near Fuse Block .............. . 201- 5-C
8212 .......................... . Main harness, behind center of dash .......... . 201- 5-C
8213 .......................... . Main harness, behind rear bulkhead grommet .. . 201-17-A
8216 .......................... . Main harness, behind center liP ............. . 201-17-A
8504 .......................... . Engine harness, under rear console ........... . 201- 7-A
8508 (VIN 9) ................... . Engine harness, lower RH front of engine ..... . 201- 4-A
8509 .......................... . Engine harness, under rear console ........... . 201- 7-A
8510 .......................... . Engine harness, under rear console ........... . 201- 7-A
8511 (VIN 9) ................... . Engine harness, lower RH front of engine ..... . 201- 4-A
8513 .......................... . Engine harness, center of rear bulkhead, in
engine compartment ..................... . 201- 7-A
8514. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Engine harness, under rear console ........... . 201- 7-A
8515. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Engine harness, under rear console ........... . 201- 7-A
8516 ........................... Engine harness, lower RH front of engine ..... . 201- 4-A
8517 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Engine harness, under rear console ........... . 201- 7-A
8519. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Engine harness, near 8tarter 8olenoid ........ . 201- 4-A
8521. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Engine harness, center of rear bulkhead ....... . 201- 7-A
8525. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Injector harness, top of engine
8526 ........................... Injector harness, top of engine
8527. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Injector harness, top of engine
8528 ........................... Injector harness, top of engine
-" STARTER AND CHARGING SYSTEM co
»
V6 VIN 9 I
Co\)
HOT IN RUN , BULB TEST OR START o
5 RED
r ---------, FUSE o
: GAGES FUSE IBLOCK
I 10 AMP I
I SEE FUSE I
5 RED L_
I _ ________
8LOCK DETAILS.1I
1 RED
1 PNKlBLK 39
r----- "'-'-'--'-"1 Mill!!!
LUGGAGE I SEE FUSE BLOCK
I JUNCTION
COMPARTMENT I DETAILS
~
RElEASE
RElAV .8 PNK/BLK gJ!l. •
r--"" "1!!!:OiI~_~_._~~
I I 39
I I
I I
I I AUTDMATI~ MANUAL
.... __ .J __________ ____________ ~
~
~ ~A~ ~

.8 PNK/BLK 39
1 INSTRUMENT
~
5 VEl .._____ -I
5 VEl r--------- -------, A CLUSTER
PRINTED
S207
5 VEl 5 5 VEl

A41~
5 VEl
5
F
CLUTCH START
r-~-- - - - jI SElECTOR
I
I
I R

I p"" --- L I
NO
GEAR

lSWITCH
I-- [ZJ -
SWITCH
CLOSED WITH
CLUTCH
DEPRESSED

E2II
o
II • II 5 PPL 6
L________ J C500
GENERATOR
DIODE
5Pp~16 5 PPL 6

.8 BRN 25

19 BLK 5 RED B3 C500

.~ .8BRN 25

8 RED 2 3 RE:12 B

1 PPLIWHT

MULTI-PORT
INJECTION:
ENGINE DATA
SENSORS
 00
STARTER AND CHARGING SYSTEM »
V6 VIN 9 AND L4 VIN R I
w
0
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS COMPONENT LOCATION Page-Figure
STARTER Battery Junction Block. . . . . . . . . .. RH front of engine compartment, near battery .. 201- 2-C
N

• Try the following checks before doing the
System Diagnosis.
1. Check the hydrometer eye that is built into the
vehicle Battery before troubleshooting the
Starter System.
- Green eye-Battery is charged.
- Dark eye-Battery is discharged. Recharge
Battery.
- ClE~ar or yellow eye-Battery fluid is low.
Replace Battery.
2. Check that Starter Solenoid terminals Sand B
and Battery connections are clean and tight.
3. Check that grounds G501 and G502 are clean
and tight.
• Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS
CHARGING
• Try the following checks before doing the
System Diagnosis.
1. Check the hydrometer eye that is built into the
vehicle Battery before troubleshooting the
Charging System.
- Green eye-Battery is charged.
- Dark eye-Battery is discharged. Recharge
Battery.
- Clear or yellow eye-Battery fluid is low. Re-
place Battery.
- 2. Check Generator belt.
3. Check that Generator and battery terminal
Generator connector are clean and tight.
4. Check FAN E Fuse (L4 VIN R).
Clutch Start Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Fusible Link A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Fusible Link E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Fusible Link G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Gear Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Generator Diode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Ignition Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Starter Solenoid (VIN 9) ...........
Starter Solenoid (VIN R) . . . . . . . . ..
Trunk Release Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . ..
C211 (8 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
C500 (34 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
G501 (VIN 9). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
G501 (VIN R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
G502 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
G505 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
S203. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
S206. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
S207. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
S215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
S501 (VIN 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
S501 (VIN R). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
5. Check GAGES Fuse by observing the
BRAKE Indicator with Ignition Switch in
RUN and the Park Brake applied
6. Check that the battery connections are clean
and tight.
• Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.
Upper portion of clutch pedal ............... . 201-10-A
Behind LH side of liP ..................... . 201- 5-D
RH front of engine compartment, at Battery
Junction Block .......................... . 201-1I-B
RH front of engine compartment, at Battery
Junction Block .......................... . 201-1I-B
Lower LH front of engine, at Starter Solenoid .. . 201- 4-A
LH rear of engine, top of transaxle ..... . ..... . 201- 2-B
In main harness, below rear bulkhead grommet .. 201-17-A
At base of steering column ................. . 201-1I-D
Lower LH front of engine................... . 201- 4-A
Lower LH front of engine................... . 201- 2-A
Behind liP, on RH side of steering column
support ................................ . 201- 7-C
Behind center of liP, near radio
Engine compartment, near battery ........... . 201-1I-B
RH front of engine, near dipstick ............ . 201- 3-C
RH side of engine, below oil fill cap ........... . 201- 1-B
Engine compartment, on battery tray ........ . 201- 3-B
On trunk lid RH hinge brace ................ . 201- 4-E
Main harness, above steering column ......... . 201- 8-A
Main harness, above LH side of steering column . 201-1I-D
Main harness, left ofsteering column ......... . 201-1I-D
Main harness, behind liP, near front of console .. 201-17-A
Engine harness, near generator
Engine harness, near generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201- 1-A
SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
STARTER
• The following tests are designed for engines
and batteries at normal operating tem-
peratures and assumes that there are no en-
."
iii
~
STARTER AND CHARGING SYSTEM ."m
V6 VIN 9 AND L4 VIN R ~
gine symptoms that would cause a no start A: STARTER SOLENOID DOES NOT A: STARTER SOLENOID DOES NOT
condition. To use the tests under other condi- CLICK AND ENGINE DOES NOT CLICK AND ENGINE DOES NOT
tions could result in misdiagnosis. CRANK (TABLE 2 - AUTOMATIC CRANK (TABLE 4-AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE) TRANSAXLE)
• Diagnostic steps for the symptoms listed in
the following table are listed after the table. Measure: VOLTAGE Connect: FUSED JUMPER
At: TRANSAXLE POSITION SWITCH CON- At: TRANSAXLE POSITION SWITCH
SYMPTOM TABLE NECTOR (Disconnected) CONNECTOR (Disconnected)
Condition: Condition:
A: Starter Solenoid does not click and engine
• Ignition Switch: START • Ignition Switch: START
does not crank
B: Starter Solenoid clicks, but engine does Measure Correct For Jumper Correct For
not crank or cranks slowly Between Voltage Diagnosis Between Result Diagnosis

F(YEL)& F (YEL) & G

Battery See 1 Engine cranks See 1
A: STARTER SOLENOID DOES NOT Ground (PPL)
CLICK AND ENGINE DOES NOT
CRANK (TABLE 1)
• If voltage is correct, go to Table 4. • If engine cranks, replace Transaxle Posi-
1. Go to Table 6. tion Switch (Check Transaxle Position
Measure: VOLTAGE Switch adjustment before replacing the
At: STARTER SOLENOID Switch.)
Conditions: A: STARTER SOLENOID DOES NOT
1. Check PPL (6) wire for an open.
•Transaxle Position: PARK (Auto- CLICK AND ENGINE DOES NOT
matic Transmission) CRANK (TABLE 3-
• Clutch: DEPRESSED (Manual MANUAL TRANSAXLE) A: STARTER SOLENOID DOES NOT
Transmission) Measure: VOLTAGE CLICK AND ENGINE DOES NOT
• Ignition Switch: START At: CLUTCH START SWITCH CONNECTOR CRANK (TABLE 5-MANUAL
For (Disconnected) TRANSAXLE)
Measure Correct
Between Voltage Diagnosis Condition: Connect: FUSED JUMPER
• Ignition Switch: START At: CLUTCH START SWITCH CONNECTOR
S (PPL) & (Disconnected)
Battery See 1 Measure Correct For
Ground Condition:
Between Result Diagnosis
• Ignition Switch: START
• If voltage is correct, replace Starter Sole-
YEL (5) wire &
noid. (Check that the Starter Motor is Battery See 1 Jumper Correct For
Ground
properly grounded to the engine before re- Between Result Diagnosis
placing the Starter Solenoid. Scrape any ex- • If voltage is correct, go to Table 5.
cess paint, rust or dirt from the Starter YEL (5) wire &
1. Go to Table 6. Engine cranks See 1
Motor mounting bolts.) Refer to section 6D PPL (6) wire
for replacement procedures.
• If engine cranks, check/replace the Clutch ~
1. Go to Table 2 (Automatic Transmission) or Start Switch I
Table 3 (Manual Transmission). 1. Check PPL (6) wire for an open. w
o
(Continued on next page) I~
STARTER AND CHARGING SYSTEM ;
V6 VIN 9 AND L4 VIN R I
Co\)

(Continued from previous page) B: STARTER SOLENOID CLICKS, BUT o

(Continued from previous column)
ENGINE DOES NOT CRANK OR ~
A: STARTER SOLENOID DOES NOT
CRANKS SLOWLY (TABLE 1) Measure Correct For
CLICK AND ENGINE DOES NOT
Between Voltage Diagnosis
CRANK (TABLE 6) Measure: VOLTAGE
Measure: VOLTAGE At: BATTERY TERMINALS Negative
At: IGNITION SWITCH CONNECTOR Conditions: battery Less than.5
terminal & See 1
(Connected) • Battery: FULLY CHARGED volts
• ECM IGN Fuse: REMOVED engine block
Measure Correct
For Diagnosis • Ignition Switch: START Positive
Between Voltage
• Engine: BEING CRANKED battery
B2 (RED) & Measure Correct For terminal & Less than .5
Battery See 1 See 2
Ground Between Voltage Diagnosis Starter volts
B3(RED) & Solenoid,
Battery See 1 Positive & terminal B
Ground negative Greater than
See 1
• Ignition Switch: START Battery 9.5 volts • If both voltages are correct, remove Starter
S(YEL)& terminals Assembly for repairs. Refer to section 6D
Battery See 2 for removal procedures.
Ground • If voltage is correct, go to Table 2.
1. Replace negative Battery cable.
• If all voltages are correct, check YEL (5) 1. Refer to Section 6D for Battery Load
wire for an open (see schematic). Test. If Battery is OK, remove Starter 2. Replace positive Battery cable.
1. Check RED (2) wire(s) and Fusible Link A Assembly for repairs.
(see schematic). CHARGING (L4 VIN R)
' ~.
2. Replace Ignition Switch. B: STARTER SOLENOID CLICKS, BUT SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
ENGINE DOES NOT CRANK OR
• Diagnostic steps for the symptoms listed in
CRANKS SLOWLY (TABLE 2)
the following table are listed after the table.
Measure: VOLTAGE
At: BATTERY CABLES
SYMPTOM TABLE
Conditions:
• Battery: FULLY CHARGED A: Charge Indicator does not light with the
• ECM IGN Fuse: REMOVED Ignition Switch in RUN and engine
• Ignition Switch: START stopped
• Engine: BEING CRANKED B: Charge Indicator stays on when engine is
running
(Continued on next column)
C: Battery is undercharged or overcharged

::!!
m
XI
o
STARTER AND CHARGING SYSTEM ."m
::JJ
L4VIN R o
A: CHARGE INDICATOR DOES NOT C: BATTERY IS UNDERCHARGED OR C: BATTERY IS UNDERCHARGED OR
LIGHT WITH IGNITION SWITCH IN OVERCHARGED (TABLE 1) OVERCHARGED (TABLE 2)
RUN AND ENGINE STOPPED Measure: VOLTAGE Measure: VOLTAGE
Connect: FUSED JUMPER At: GENERATOR CONNECTOR At: GENERATOR
At: GENERATOR CONNECTOR (Disconnected) and GENERATOR Conditions:
(Disconnected) BATTERY TERMINAL • All accessories turned off
Condition: Condition: • Engine running at fast idle
• Ignition Switch: RUN • Ignition Switch: RUN Measure Correct For
Connect Correct For Measure Correct For Between Voltage Diagnosis
Between Result Diagnosis Between Voltage Diagnosis
Battery Less than 16 See 1
L (ERN) & Charge L(BRN)& terminal & volts
See 1 Battery See 1
Ground Indicator lights Ground Ground
F (BRN/IWHT)
• If result is correct, repair/replace Generator .
& Ground
Battery See 2 • If voltage is correct, perform a Generator
Refer to section 6D. Load Test. Refer to Section 6D. If Gener-
S(RED) & ator is good, perform a Battery Load Test.
1. Check/repair GAGES Fuse, Indicator Battery See 3
Ground Refer to Section 6D.
bulb, Generator Diode, PNKJBLK (39),
BRN (25) wires and Instrument Cluster Battery 1. Repair/replace Generator. Refer to See-
Printed Circuit for opens (see schematic). terminal & Battery See 3 tion6D.
Ground
B: CHARGE INDICATOR STAYS ON • If all voltages are correct, reconnect con- CHARGING (V6 VIN 9)
WHEN THE ENGINE IS RUNNING nector and go to Table 2.
Disconnect: CONNECTOR 1. Check/repair GAGES Fuse, Indicator SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
At: GENERATOR Bulb, Generator Diode, PNK/BLK (39), • Diagnostic steps for the symptoms listed in
Condition: BRN (25) wires and the Instrument Clus- the following table are listed after the table.
• Ignition Switch: RUN ter Printed Circuit for opens (see sche-
Disconnect Correct Result For Diagnosis matic). SYMPTOM TABLE
Charge 2. Check/repair the BRN/WHT (250) wire A: Charge Indicator does not light with the
Generator and FAN·E Fuse for an open (see sche- Ignition Switch in RUN and the engine
Indicator does See 1
connector matic). stopped
not light
3. Check/repair RED (2) wire and Fusible B: Charge Indicator stays on when the engine
• If result is correct, repair/replace Gener-
Link E for an open (see schematic). is running
ator. Refer to Section 6D.
4. Check/repair RED (2) wire for an open. C: Battery is undercharged or overcharged
1. Check/repair BRN (25) wire and Instru-
ment Cluster Printed Circuit for shorts to (Continued on next page) I;
ground (see schematic). I
w
o
U1
 00
STARTER AND CHARGING SYSTEM l>

V6VIN9 I
w
(Continued from previous page) B: CHARGE INDICATOR STAYS ON C: BATTERY IS UNDERCHARGED OR
o
WHEN THE ENGINE IS RUNNING OVERCHARGED (TABLE 1) en
A: CHARGE INDICATOR DOES NOT
LIGHT WITH THE IGNITION SWITCH (TABLE 1) Measure: VOLTAGE
IN RUN AND THE ENGINE STOPPED Disconnect: CONNECTOR At: GENERATOR
Connect: FUSED JUMPER At: GENERATOR Conditions:
At: GENERATOR CONNECTOR Condition: • Ignition Switch: RUN
(Disconnected) •Ignition Switch: RUN • Generator Connector:
Condition: DISCONNECTED
Disconnect Correct Result For Diagnosis
• Ignition Switch: RUN Measure Correct For
Charge Between Voltage Diagnosis
Jumper Generator
Correct Result For Diagnosis Indicator does See 1
Between connector Battery
not light
terminal & Battery See 1
Charge
B(BRN)&
Indicator See 1
• If the result is correct, go to Table 2. Ground
Ground 1. Check/repair BRN (25) wire, Generator Di- A (RED) &
lights Battery
ode, and the Instrument Cluster Printed See 1
Ground
• If the result is correct, reconnect the con- Circui t for a short to ground (see
nector and go to AI. schematic). B(BRN)&
Battery See 2
1. Check/repair BRN (25) wire, Generator Ground
Diode, Indicator bulb or the Instrument
Cluster Printed Circuit for an open (see B: CHARGE INDICATOR STAYS ON • If all voltages are correct, reconnect con-
nector and go to Table 2.
schematic). WHEN THE ENGINE IS RUNNING
(TABLE 2) 1. Check/repair RED (2) wire and Fusible
AI. Insert a screwdriver into the Test Hole in the Link E.
rear ofthe Generator, making sure the screw- Measure: VOLTAGE
2. Check/repair BRN (25) wire, Generator Di-
At: GENERATOR CONNECTOR
driver is in contact with the bottom and side ode, Indicator bulb, and Instrument Cluster
(Disconnected)
of the Test Hole. Turn the Ignition Switch to Printed Circuit for an open (see schematic).
RUN. Measure Correct For
Between Result Diagnosis
• If the Charge Indicator lights, replace the
regulator. Refer to Section 6D. A (RED) &
Battery See 1
Ground
• If the Charge Indicator does not light, check
the brushes, slip rings and Rotor winding for • If the voltage is correct, go to Test C, Table
an open. Refer to Section 6D. 2.
1. Check/repair RED (2) wires for an open (see
schematic).

."m
::a
o
STARTER AND CHARGING SYSTEM
V6 VIN 9 AND L4 VIN R
C: BATTERY IS UNDERCHARGED OR
OVERCHARGED (TABLE 2)
Measure: VOLTAGE
At: GENERATOR
Conditions:
• Generator Connector: CONNECTED
• All accessories: OFF
• Engine running at fast idle
Measure Correct
For Diagnosis
Between Voltage
Battery
Less than 16
terminal & See 1
volts
Ground
• If the voltage is correct, perform a Gener-
ator Load Test. Refer to Section 6D. If the
Generator is good, perform a Battery
Load Test. Refer to Section 6D.
1. Remove Generator for repair. Refer to
Section 6D.
CIRCUIT OPERATION
STARTER
With the Ignition Switch moved to the START
position, battery voltage is applied through the
Gear Selector Switch or the Clutch Start Switch
to the Starter Solenoid. Both the Pull-In and
Hold-In Windings are energized. They pull a
plunger into their core. The plunger is attached to
the shift lever, which drives a small pinion gear in
the drive mechanism to engage the flywheel gear
on the engine. The pinion also starts turning
since the Pull-In Winding circuit passes through
the Starter Motor. The turning gear meshes
smoothly with the flywheel.
The plunger in the Solenoid windings also
closes the Motor Contacts. These contacts connect
the battery voltage directly to the Starter Motor.
The Motor cranks the engine.
."m
~
As soon as the Motor Contacts close, battery pulses supplied it by the Regulator. When the
voltage is applied to both ends of the Pull-In Ignition Switch is placed in RUN, narrow width
Winding. Current no longer flows through the pulses are supplied to the Rotor, creating a
Winding. The Hold-In Winding remains ener- weak magnetic field. When the engine is
gized. Its magnetic field is strong enough to hold started, the Regulator senses Generator rota-
the shift lever, drive mechanism, and Motor Con- tion by detecting AC voltage at the stator
tacts in place to continue cranking the engine. through an internal wire. Once the engine is
When the Ignition Switch is released from the running the Regulator varies the field current •
STARTposition, battery voltage is removed from by controlling the pulse width. This regulates
the Generator output voltage for proper bat-
the PPL wire and the junction of the two Wind-
ings. Current flows from the Motor Contacts tery charging and electrical system operation.
The digital regulator controls the Charge
through both Windings to ground at the end ofthe
Hold-In Winding. However, the direction of the Indicator light with a solid state driver. The
current flow through the Pull-In Winding is now driver turns on the light whenever under-
opposite to the direction current flowed when the voltage, overvoltage or a stopped generator is
Winding was first energized. The magnetic fields detected.
of the Pull-In and Hold-In Windings now oppose (Continued on next page)
one another. This helps to quickly release the
spring loaded drive mechanism and disengage
the Starter. As soon as the Motor Contacts open,
the entire circuit is turned off.
CIRCUIT OPERATION
CHARGING SYSTEM (L4 VIN R)
The Generator provides voltage to operate
the car's electrical system and to charge its
Battery. A magnetic field is created when cur-
rent flows through the Rotor. This field rotates
as the Rotor is driven by the engine, creating an
AC voltage in the Stator windings. The AC
voltage is converted to DC by the rectifier
bridge and is supplied to the elctrical system at
the Battery terminal.
This Generator's regulator uses digital tech- ~
I
niques to supply the Rotor current and thereby
w
control the output voltage. The Rotor current is o
proportional to the width of the electrical '-I
STARTER AND CHARGING SYSTEM co
l>
V6VIN9 I
w
(Continued from previous page) o
CHARGING SYSTEM (V6 VIN 9) co

The Generator provides voltage to operate

the car's electrical system and to charge its
Battery. A magnetic field is created when cur-
rent flows through the Rotor. This field rotates
as the Rotor is driven by the engine creating an
AC voltage in the stator windings. The AC volt-
age is converted to DC by the Rectifier Bridges
and is supplied to the electrical system at the
Battery terminal.
When the Ignition Switch is placed in RUN
before the engine starts, a small current is sup-
plied to the Rotor at terminal 1 of the Gener-
ator. This current flows from the GAGES Fuse
through the Charge Indicator and Generator
Diode, and the Charge Indicator lights.
Once the engine is started, a DC voltage is
supplied to the Regulator after being rectified
by the lower half of the Rectifier Bridge and the
Diode trio. This voltage supplies the Regulator
which controls the current through the Rotor
and therefore the output voltage of the Gener-
ator. The voltage is regulated to properly
charge the Battery and operate the electrical
system. The Charge Indicator will go out as the
voltage at Generator terminal 1 approaches
battery voltage, stopping current flow through
the light.

"'T1
m
::D
o
COOLANT FAN
V6 VIN 9, COOLANT FAN ASSEMBLY AND ENGINE BLOWER ASSEMBLY
HOT AT ALL TIMES

r- FAN--;--' FUSE o
II _~ IIBLDCK
I 20AMP I
IL ______ ..JI
1 RED

.8 BRN 250
SEE
SEE FUSE
+ _ _ _ _ • ________..
5 RED

-1.--~
S206
3 RED
2

2
SEE POWER
DISTRIBUTION
FUSE

BLOCK
OETAILS
.
8 BRN
I S215

250
.8 BRN

250 G9 A C500
I 250
.& BRN/WHT 11'
J
BLOCK
OETAILS

3 R:~ 12---------------------------------------------~-;;;N-;fI 250

F& Cl00 S405.~~~
.& &RN/WH:PO 2::RNIWHT A It

I~:t-------------------------------------------------~!:i I::~::" I ]f---------------------------~~ o

GRN/WH~I335
A
.& DK C
.8 OK GRNIWHT 335
F9 .ill!!.

3 BLK/ RED 532 .& OK GRN/WHT

.& DK GRN/WHT

B.!2 1 335

.& DK GRN/WHT FlO

<
.& &LK/RED 702

Kl
r---~~--1-------1 ~
335 I· 335
C500

~
B
.& DK GRN/wHT 335 ~
I DEFROST I ~ BLOWER

~
CODLANT
: OFF , : .!!lli!. M MDTOR
FAN
M MOTOR I I HTR : C500

A
:I 8/L .JY
VENT :I D1I B

"-H- .& DK GRNIWHT 335

.& BLK 150

WITHOUT WITH
AIR CONDITIONING AIR CDNDITIONING
.& BLK 150
~---------------------A---------------------__~
3 BLK 151 .& DK GRNIWHT1335
SEE GROUNO
.& DK GRNIWHT 335 5502
OISTRIBUTION

~J TEMPERATURE
SWITCH
.&DKGRNIWHTL"

~
:""'IW"Jn. ~ TEMPERATURE
~
2 BLK
GROUND

/ . - -....... OISTRIBUTION

~
CLOSED ABOVE ~~ ~ CLOSED ABOVE
113' C(235' F) CUT·OUTSWITCH 113' C(235' F)
_ OPEN BELOW CLOSED ABOVE OPEN &ELOW !!
107' C (225' F) _ 280 PSI (1931 kPa) -= 107' C (225' F) m
::II
o
COOLANT FAN
L4 VIN RAND V6 VIN 9
L4 VIN R
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS
• Try the following checks before doing the
System Check.
1. Check FAN E Fuse and Fusible Link A if the
Coolant Fan does not run.
2. If Coolant Fan operates with Ignition Switch
in OFF, replace the Coolant Fan Relay.
3. Check ground G201 by operating the Radio.
4. Check ground G101 by operating the Front
Park/Turn Lights.
• Go to System Check for a guide to normal
operation.
• Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.
V6 VIN 9
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS
• Try the following checks before doing the
System Check.
1. Check FAN E Fuse if the Coolant Fan and
Engine Blower do not run.
2. Check Fusible Link A by operating the
Blower Motor in High Speed.
3. Check ground G400 by operating the Turn
Lights.
4. Check ground G101 by operating the Front
Park/Turn Lights.
5. If only the Coolant Fan runs continuously, re-
place the Coolant Fan Relay.
6. If only the Engine Blower runs continuously,
replace the Engine Blower Relay.
."
m
:J:J
o
COMPONENT LOCATION Page-Figure
A/C High Pressure Cut-Out Switch.. RH front of engine, LH end of A/C compressor .. 201- 4-D
Assembly Line Diagnostic Link
(ALDL) Connector .............. In console, near rear of shifter ................ 201- 7-A
Coolant Fan Relay ...... .. .. . ..... LH front corner offront compartment ......... 201-lO-C
Coolant Temperature Sensor (VIN R) Top LH rear of engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201- 2-B
Coolant Temperature Switch (VIN 9) Top RH side of engine, on intake manifold. . . . .. 201- 4-B
Electronic Control Module (ECM) . .. Between seats, on front of rear bulkhead . . . . . .. 201- 7-A
Engine Blower Motor. . . . . . . . . . . .. RH side of trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201- 9-C
Engine Blower Relay . . . . . . . . . . . .. RH side of trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201- 9-C
Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Behind LH side of IIP ............. . . . . . . . .. 201- 5-D
Fusible Link A .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. RH front of engine compartment, at Battery
Junction Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-11-B
CloO (34 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. LH side of front bulkhead, right of brake master
cylinder ................................. 201-11-A
C500 (34 cavities) ................ Engine compartment, near battery ............ 201-11-B
GI0l .......................... On LH fender, below headlamp ............... 201-12-A
G201 .......................... Behind center of IIP ........................ 201- 5-C
G400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. RH rear of engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201- 9-B
S206. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Main harness, above LH side of steering column. 201-11-D
S212 ........................ . .. Main harness, behind center of dash. . . . . . . . . .. 201- 5-C
S215 ........... . ............... Main harness, behindIlP,nearfrontofconsole .. 201-17-A
S217 ....................... . ... Main harness, under center console ........... 201- 7-A
S405. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Rear lights harness, RH rear of car. . . . . . . . . . .. 201-13-A
S502 ........................... Engine harness, lower RH front of engine ...... 201- 4-A
S508 (VIN R). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Engine harness, under rear console. . . . . . . . . . .. 201- 7-A
• Go to System Check for a guide to normal
operation.
• Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.
(Continued on next page) w
COOLANT FAN ~
L4 VIN R, SINGLE SPEED I
w
..a
(Continued from previous page) V6VIN 9 SYMPTOM TABLE
.p.
SYSTEM CHECK A: Coolant Fan does not run
L4 VIN R • Use the System Check Table as a guide to B: Coolant Fan does not run with AlC on
SYSTEM CHECK normal operation. C: Coolant Fan runs continuously
• Use the System Check Table as a guide to • Refer to System Diagnosis for a list of
normal operation. symptoms and diagnostic steps.
• Refer to System Diagnosis for a list of
A: COOLANT FAN DOES NOT RUN
(TABLE 1)
symptoms and diagnostic steps. SYSTEM CHECK TABLE
Connect: FUSED JUMPER
ACTION NORMAL RESULT
SYSTEM CHECK TABLE At: ASSEMBLY LINE DIAGNOSTIC LINK
With the engine cold Coolant Fan and (ALDL) CONNECTOR
ACTION NORMAL RESULT and idling, move the Engine Blower turn Condition:
With the engine cold Coolant Fan turns on AlC Function on • Ignition Switch: RUN
and idling, move the (single speed) Selector to NORM (if
Jumper
AlC Function or equipped with AlC) Correct Result For Diagnosis
Between
Selector to NORM (if Coolant Fan runs at With Engine Coolant Coolant Fan and
equipped with AlC) Low Speed (two below operating Engine Blower turn Terminal B & Coolant Fan
See 1
speed) temperature, move off Ground runs
With Engine Coolant Coolant Fan turns off the AlC Function • If the Coolant Fan runs, refer to Section 6E
below operating Selector to OFF for ECM diagnosis.
temperature, move With engine warm, Coolant Fan and 1. Go to Table 2.
the AlC Function run engine at a fast Engine Blower turn
Selector to OFF idle for several on before Coolant
minutes Temperature A: COOLANT FAN DOES NOT RUN
With engine warm, Coolant Fan turns on
run engine at a fast (single speed) Indicator in the (TABLE 2)
idle for several or Instrument Panel Connect: FUSED JUMPER
minutes Coolant Fan runs at comes on At: ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULE (ECM)
Low Speed and then CONNECTOR (Connected)
• Refer to System Diagnosis when a result is not
High Speed if Conditions:
normal. • Ignition Switch: RUN
necessary (two
speed) before • AlC Function Selector: OFF
Coolant Temperature Jumper
L4 VIN R, SINGLE SPEED Correct Result For Diagnosis
Indicator in the Between
Instrument Panel SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
comes on 21 (DK GRN/
• Diagnostic steps for the symptoms listed in Coolant Fan
WHT)& See 1
the following table are listed after the table. runs
• Refer to System Diagnosis when a result is Ground
not normal.
."
m
::D
(Continued on next page) o
COOLANT FAN J!
m
::J:I
L4 VIN R, SINGLE SPEED o
(Continued from previous page) A: COOLANT FAN DOES NOT RUN B: COOLANT FAN DOES NOT RUN
(TABLE 4) WITH AlCON
• If the Coolant Fan runs, refer to Section 6E Connect: 20 AMP FUSED JUMPER Connect: FUSED JUMPER
for ECM diagnosis. At: COOLANT FAN RELAY CONNECTOR At: AlC CONTROL HEAD CONNECTOR
1. Leave fused jumper in place and go to (Disconnected) (Disconnected)
'!able 3. Jumper Condition:
Correct Result For Diagnosis • Ignition Switch: RUN
Between
Jumper
A: COOLANT FAN DOES NOT RUN D (RED) & A Coolant Fan
See 1 Between
Correct Result For Diagnosis
(TABLE 3) (BLK/RED) runs
Connect: TEST LAMP • If the Coolant Fan runs, replace the K(DK GRNI
Coolant Fan
At: COOLANT FAN RELAY CONNECTOR Coolant Fan Relay. WHT) & See 1
runs
(Disconnected) Ground
1. Leave fused jumper in place and go to
Conditions: '!able 5. K (DKGRNI
Coolant Fan
• Ignition Switch: RUN WHT) & H See 2
runs
• Fused jumper from Table 2 in place (BLK)
Connect A: COOLANT FAN DOES NOT RUN
Correct Result For Diagnosis • If the Coolant Fan runs, replace the AIC
Between (TABLE 5) Control Head.
Connect: TEST LAMP 1. Check DK GRNIWHT (335) wire for an
C (BRNIWHT) Test Lamp
See 1 At: COOLANT FAN MOTOR CONNECTOR open (see schematic).
& Ground lights
(Disconnected)
C (BRNIWHT) 2. Check BLK (150) wire for an open.
Test Lamp Condition:
&B(DK See 2 • Fused jumper from Table 4 in place
lights
GRNIWHT) Connect C: COOLANT FAN RUNS
Correct Result For Diagnosis
D (RED) & Test Lamp
See 3
Between CONTINUOUSLY
Ground lights 1. With the Ignition Switch in RUN, disconnect
B (BLK/RED) Test Lamp
• If the results are correct, go to Table 4. See 1 the Coolant Fan Relay connector and connect
& Ground lights
1. Check FAN E Fuse and BRN/WHT (250) a Test Lamp between C (BRNIWHT) and B
B (BLK/RED) Test Lamp
wire for an open. See 2 (DK GRNIWHT).
& A (BLK) lights
2. Check DK GRN/WHT (335) wire for an • If the Test Lamp lights, go to step 2.
• If the results are correct, replace the
open.
Coolant Fan Motor. • If the Test Lamp does not light, replace the
3. Check Fusible Link A and RED (2) wire for Coolant Fan Relay.
1. Check BLK/RED (532) wire for an open.
an open.
2. Check BLK (151) wire for an open. 2. Disconnect the AlC Control Head connector.
• If the Coolant Fan runs, go to step 3. co
l>
• If the Coolant Fan does not run, replace the I
AlC Control Head. W
...a
(Continued on next page) ~
COOLANT FAN ~
L4 VIN R, SINGLE SPEED AND TWO SPEED I
w
•••
(Continued from previous page) (Continued from previous column) (Continued from previous column)
Q)
3. Disconnect the Electronic Control Module • If the Coolant Fan runs, refer to Section 6E Connect
Correct Result For Diagnosis
(ECM) connector C2. for ECM diangosis. Between
• If the Coolant Fan runs, check DK GRN/ 1. Go to Table 2. B (RED) & Test Lamp
WHT (335) wire for short to ground. See 1
Ground lights
• If the Coolant Fan does not run, refer to B (RED) & D Test Lamp
A: COOLANT FAN DOES NOT RUN IN See 2
Section 6E for ECM diagnosis. (BLK) lights
LOW AND HIGH SPEEDS (TABLE 2)
Connect: 20 AMP FUSED JUMPER • Fused jumper connected between termi-
L4 VIN R, 2 SPEED At: COOLANT FAN RELAY CONNECTOR nals G and B of the Coolant Fan Relay
SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS (Disconnected) Connector
• Diagnostic steps for the symptoms listed in Jumper C (BLKlRED) Test Lamp
Correct Result For Diagnosis See 3
the following table are listed after the table. Between & D (BLK) lights
Coolant Fan • If the results are correct, replace the
SYMPTOM TABLE G (RED) & B Coolant Fan Assembly.
runs in Low See 1
A: Coolant Fan does not run in Low and High (BLKlRED) 1. Check Fusible Link A, RED (2) and RED
Speed
Speeds (533) wires for an open.
Coolant Fan
B: Coolant Fan does not run in Low Speed G (RED) & A 2. Check BLK (151) wire for an open.
runs in High See 1
C: Coolant Fan does not run in High Speed (RED) 3. Check BLKlRED (532) wire for an open.
Speed
D: Coolant Fan does not run in Low Speed • If the results are correct, do Tests Band C.
with AlC on . B: COOLANT FAN DOES NOT RUN IN
1. Leave fused jumper in place and go to
E: Coolant Fan runs continuously in Low Table 3. LOW SPEED (TABLE 1)
Speed Connect: FUSED JUMPER
F: Coolant Fan runs continuously in High At: ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULE (ECM)
Speed A: COOLANT FAN DOES NOT RUN IN CONNECTOR C2 (Connected)
LOW AND HIGH SPEEDSJTABLE 3) Conditions:
A: COOLANT FAN DOES NOT RUN IN Connect: TEST LAMP • Ignition Switch: RUN
LOW AND HIGH SPEEDS (TABLE 1) At: COOLANT FAN ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR • AlC Function Selector: OFF
(Disconnected) Jumper
Connect: FUSED JUMPER Correct Result For Diagnosis
Condition: Between
At: ASSEMBLY LINE DIAGNOSTIC LINK
• Fused jumper connected between
(ALDL) CONNECTOR
terminals G and A of the Coolant Fan 21 (DK GRN/ Coolant Fan
Condition:
Relay Connector WHT) & runs in Low See 1
• Ignition Switch: RUN
Ground Speed
(Continued in next column)
Jumper
Correct Result For Diagnosis • If the Coolant Fan runs, refer to Section 6E
Between
for ECM diagnosis.
Terminal B &
Ground
Coolant Fan
runs
See 1 1. Leave fused jumper in place and go to Table 2. ."m
(Continued on next page) ::a
(Continued in next column) o
COOLANT FAN ."m
:J:J
L4 VIN R, TWO SPEED o
B: COOLANT FAN DOES NOT RUN IN (Continued from previous column) (Continued from previous column)
LOW SPEED (TABLE 2) • If the Coolant Fan runs, replace the G (RED) & D
Test Lamp
Connect: TEST LAMP Coolant Fan Relay. (LT GRNI See 2
lights
At: COOLANT FAN RELAY CONNECTOR 1. Check BLK/RED (532) wire for an open. BLK)
(Disconnected) Replace the Coolant Fan Assembly if wire C (BRNIWHT) Test Lamp
Condition: and terminal contacts are OK. See 3
& Ground lights
• Fused jumper from Table 1 in place
• If the results are correct, go to Table 3.
Connect
Between
Correct Result For Diagnosis C: COOLANT FAN DOES NOT RUN IN 1. Check Fusible Link A and RED (2) wire for
HIGH SPEED (TABLE 1) an open.
G (RED) & Test Lamp 2. Check LT GRN/BLK (937) wire for an
See 1 Connect: FUSED JUMPER
Ground lights open.
At: ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULE (ECM)
G (RED) & E CONNECTOR C2 (Connected) 3. Check FAN E Fuse and BRNIWHT (250)
Test Lamp
(DK GRNI See 2 Condition: wire for an open.
lights
WHT) • Ignition Switch: RUN
C (BRNIWHT) Test Lamp Jumper
& Ground lights
See 3
Between
Correct Result For Diagnosis C: COOLANT FAN DOES NOT RUN IN
HIGH SPEED (TABLE 3)
• If the results are correct, go to Table 3. 4 (LT GRNI Coolant Fan Connect: 20 AMP FUSED JUMPER
1. Check Fusible Link A and RED (2) wire for BLK) & runs in High See 1 At: COOLANT FAN RELAY CONNECTOR
an open. Ground Speed (Disconnected)
2. Check DK GRN/WHT (335) wire for an • If the Coolant Fan runs, refer to Section 6E Jumper
open. for ECM diagnosis. Correct Result For Diagnosis
Between
3. Check FAN E Fuse and BRN/WHT (250) 1. Leave fused jumper in place and go to
wire for an open. Thble 2. Coolant Fan
G (RED) & A
runs in High See 1
(RED)
C: COOLANT FAN DOES NOT RUN IN Speed
B: COOLANT FAN DOES NOT RUN IN HIGH SPEED (TABLE 2) • If the Coolant Fan runs, replace the
LOW SPEED (TABLE 3) Coolant Fan Relay.
Connect: TEST LAMP
Connect: 20 AMP FUSED JUMPER At: COOLANT FAN RELAY CONNECTOR 1. Check RED (533) wire for an open. Re-
At: COOLANT FAN RELAY CONNECTOR (Disconnected) place the Coolant Fan Assembly if wire and
(Disconnected) terminal contacts are OK.
Conditions:
Jumper • Ignition Switch: RUN
Correct Result For Diagnosis
Between • Fused jumper from Table 1 in place
Coolant Fan Connect
G (RED) & B Correct Result For Diagnosis
runs in Low See 1 Between ~
(BLKlRED)
Speed G (RED) & Test Lamp I
(Continued in next column) Ground lights
See 1 w
...a
(Continued on next page)
(Continued in next column) ...•
COOLANT FAN ~
L4 VIN R, TWO SPEED I
w
...&
(Continued from previous page) 2. Disconnect the A/C Control Head connector. SYMPTOM TABLE
00
• If the Coolant Fan runs, go to step 3. A: Coolant Fan and Engine Blower do not run
0: COOLANT FAN DOES NOT RUN IN B: Coolant Fan and Engine Blower do not run
• If the Coolant Fan does not run, replace
LOW SPEED WITH AlC ON with AlC on
AlC Control Head.
Connect: FUSED JUMPER C: Coolant Fan does not run, but Engine
3. Disconnect the Electronic Control Module
At: AlC CONTROL HEAD CONNECTOR Blower operates
(Disconnected) (ECM) connector C2.
• If the Coolant Fan runs, check DK GRNI D: Engine Blower does not run, but Coolant
Condition:
Fan operates
• Ignition Switch: RUN WHT (335) wire for a short to ground .
E: Coolant Fan and Engine Blower run
Jumper • If the Coolant Fan does not run, refer to
Correct Result For Diagnosis continuously
Between Section 6E for ECM diagnosis.
K (DK GRNI Coolant Fan A: COOLANT FAN AND ENGINE
WHT) & runs in Low See 1 F: COOLANT FAN RUNS
CONTINUOUSLY IN HIGH SPEED ~OWER DO NOT RUN
Ground Speed
1. With the Ignition Switch in RUN, discon- Connect: FUSED JUMPER
K(DKGRNI Coolant Fan At: COOLANT TEMPERATURE SWITCH
WHT) & H runs in Low See 2 nect the Coolant Fan Relay connector and
CONNECTOR (Disconnected)
(BLK) Speed connect a Test Lamp between C (BRNI Conditions:
• If the Coolant Fan runs, replace the AlC WHT) and D (LT GRN/BLK) wires.
• Ignition Switch: RUN
Control Head and then go to Section 6E for • If the Test Lamp lights, go to step 2. • AIC Function Selector: OFF
ECM diagnosis. • If the Test Lamp does not light, replace the Jumper
1. Check DK GRN/WHT (335) wire for an Correct Result For Diagnosis
Coolant Fan Relay. Between
open (see schematic).
2. Disconnect the Electronic Control Module DKGRNI
2. Check BLK (150) wire for an open. Coolant Fan
(ECM) connector C2. WHT&
and Engine See 1
• If the Coolant Fan runs, check the LT Ground (see
Blower run
E: COOLANT FAN RUNS GRNIBLK (937) wire for a short to ground. schematic)
CONTINUOUSLY IN LOW SPEED • If the Coolant Fan does not run, refer to • If the results are correct, replace the
1. With the Ignition Switch in RUN, discon- Section 6E for ECM diagnosis. Coolant Temperature Switch.
1. Perform Tests C and D.
I
nect the Coolant Fan Relay connector and
connect the Test Lamp between C (BRNI
WHT) and E (DK GRN/WHT) wires.
• If the Test Lamp lights, go to step 2. V6VIN9
• If the Test Lamp does not light, replace the SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
Coolant Fan Relay. • Diagnostic steps for the symptoms listed in
the following table are listed after the table.
!!
m
(Continued on next page) I~
COOLANT FAN ."m
::IJ
V6VIN9 o
B: COOLANT FAN AND ENGINE (Continued from previous column) C: COOLANT FAN DOES NOT RUN,
BUT ENGINE BLOWER OPERATES
BLOWER DO NOT RUN WITH AlC Connect
Correct Result For Diagnosis (TABLE 3)
ON Between
Connect: TEST LAMP
Connect: FUSED JUMPER C (BRNIWHT) Test Lamp
See 1 At: COOLANT FAN MOTOR CONNECTOR
At: AlC CONTROL HEAD CONNECTOR & Ground lights (Disconnected)
(Disconnected)
C (BRNIWHT) Condition:
Condition: Test Lamp
&B(DK See 2 • Fused jumper from Table 2 in place
• Ignition Switch: RUN lights
GRNIWHT) Connect
Jumper Correct Result For Diagnosis
Correct Result For Diagnosis D(RED) & Test Lamp Between
Between See 3
Ground lights
B(BLK/RED) Test Lamp
K (DKGRNI Coolant Fan • If the results are correct, go to Table 2. See 1
and Engine & Ground lights
WHT) & See 1
1. Check the FAN E Fuse and BRNIWHT
Ground Blower run B(BLK/RED) Test Lamp
(250) wire for an open. See 2
&A(BLK) lights
K (DK GRNI Coolant Fan
2. Check DK GRN/WHT (335) wire for an
WHT) & H and Engine See 2 open (see schematic). • If the results are correct, replace the
(BLK) Blower run Coolant Fan Motor.
3. Check Fusible Link A and RED (2) wire for
• If the results are correct, replace the AlC 1. Check BLK/RED (532) wire for an open.
an open.
Control Head. 2. Check BLK (151) wire for an open.
1. Check DK GRN/WHT (335) wire for an
open. C: COOLANT FAN DOES NOT RUN, 0: ENGINE BLOWER DOES NOT RUN,
2. Check BLK (150) wire for an open.
BUT ENGINE BLOWER OPERATES BUT COOLANT FAN OPERATES
(TABLE 2) (TABLE 1)
Connect: 20 AMP FUSED JUMPER Connect: TEST LAMP
C: COOLANT FAN DOES NOT RUN, At: COOLANT FAN RELAY CONNECTOR At: ENGINE BLOWER RELAY CONNECTOR
BUT ENGINE BLOWER OPERATES (Disconnected) (Disconnected)
(TABLE 1) Jumper Conditions:
Correct Result For Diagnosis
Connect: TEST LAMP Between • Ignition Switch: RUN
At: COOLANT FAN RELAY CONNECTOR • AlC Function Selector: NORM
(Disconnected) D (RED) & A
Coolant Fan Connect
Conditions: (BLKlRED) See 1 Correct Result I For Diagnosis
runs Between
• Ignition Switch: RUN (see schematic)
• AlC Function Selector: NORM • If the Coolant Fan runs, replace the B(BRNIWHT) Test Lamp
See 1
(Continued in next column) Coolant Fan Relay. & Ground lights
1. Leave fused jumper in place and go to B (BRNIWHT)
Test Lamp ~
Table 3. &C(DK See 2
lights
GRNIWHT) I
Co\)

(Continued on next page) I.co-'

COOLANT FAN ~
V6VIN 9 I
(Continued from previous page) D: ENGINE BLOWER DOES NOT RUN, 3. Disconnect the AIC Control Head connector.
...•
w
BUT COOLANT FAN OPERATES • If the Coolant Fan and Engine Blower run,
..•
Q

A (BRNI (TABLE 3) check DK GRNIWHT (335) wire for short

Test Lamp
WHT) & See 3 Connect: TEST LAMP to ground.
lights
Ground At: ENGINE BLOWER MOTOR CONNECTOR • If the Coolant Fan and Engine Blower do
(Disconnected) not run, replace the AlC Control Head.
• If the results are correct, go to Table 2.
Conditions:
1. Check the FANE Fuse and BRN/WHT
• Ignition Switch: RUN
(250) wire for an open. • Fused jumper from Table 2 in place.
2. Check DK GRN/WHT (335) wire for an L4 VIN RAND V6 VIN 9
Connect
open (see schematic). Correct Result For Diagnosis CIRCUIT OPERATION
Between
3. Check BRNIWHT (250) wire for an open. The Coolant Fan is turned on and off by the
A (BLKlRED) Test Lamp
See 1 ECM based on inputs from the Coolant Tem-
& Ground lights
D: ENGINE BLOWER DOES NOT RUN, perature Sensor, Vehicle Speed Sensor and the
A (BLKlRED) Test Lamp
BUT COOLANT FAN OPERATES See 2 AIC System. Battery voltage is applied at all
& B (BLK) lights
(TABLE 2) times to terminal D of the Coolant Fan Relay.
• If the above results are correct, replace the When the Ignition Switch is in RUN, battery
Connect: 20 AMP FUSED JUMPER Engine Blower Motor. voltage is applied to terminal C of the Relay. The
At: ENGINE BLOWER RELAY CONNECTOR
1. Check BLKlRED (702) wire for an open. ECM energizes the Coolant Fan Relay by
(Disconnected)
Condition: 2. Check BLK (150) wire for an open. grounding circuit 335. The Relay energizes and
• Ignition Switch: RUN battery voltage is applied to the Coolant Fan.
Jumper E: COOLANT FAN AND ENGINE See Section 6E for specific conditions of the
Correct Result For Diagnosis BLOWER RUN CONTINUOUSLY Coolant Fan operation.
Between
1. With the Ignition Switch in RUN, discon- The AIC Control Head also energizes the
A (BRNI
nect the Coolant Temperature Switch con- Coolant Fan Relay by grounding circuit 335
WHT) & D Engine Blower
See 1 nector. whenever the AlC Function Selector is in MAX,
(BLKlRED) runs
(see schematic) • If the Coolant Fan and Engine Blower run, NORMorB/L.
go to step 2.
• If the Engine Blower runs, replace the En-
• If the Coolant Fan and Engine Blower do L4 VIN R (TWO SPEED)
gine Blower Relay.
not run, replace the Coolant Temperature The Coolant Fan is turned on and off by the
1. Leave fused jumper in place and go to
Switch. ECM based on inputs from the Coolant Tem-
Table 3.
2. Disconnect the AIC High Pressure Cut-Out perature Sensor, Vehicle Speed Sensor and the
Switch connector. AIC System. Battery voltage is applied at all
• If the Coolant Fan and Engine Blower run, times to terminal G of the Coolant Fan Relay.
go to step 3. When the Ignition Switch is in RUN, battery
voltage is applied to terminal C of the Relay.
• If the Coolant Fan and Engine Blower do
!!
not run, replace the AIC High Pressure m
:XI
Cut-Out Switch. o
COOLANT FAN
l4 VIN RAND V6 VIN 9
When the ECM grounds circuit 335, the Low
Speed Relay is energized and battery voltage is
applied to terminal C (BLKlRED) of the Coolant
Fan Assembly. The resistor drops a portion of
the voltage and the Coolant Fan runs at low
speed. The Coolant Fan runs at high speed when
the ECM grounds circuit 937. The High Speed
Relay is energized and battery voltage is directly
applied to the Coolant Fan. See Section 6E for
specific conditions of Coolant Fan operation.
The AlC Control Head also energizes the Low
Speed Relay by grounding circuit 335 whenever
the AlC Function Selector is in MAX, NORM or
B/L.
V6 VIN 9 (COOLANT FAN ASSEMBLY)
The Coolant Fan is operated by the Coolant
Fan Relay. Battery voltage is applied at all
times though Fusible Link A to terminal D of
the Coolant Fan Relay. With the Ignition
Switch in RUN, voltage is applied through the
FAN E Fuse to terminal C of the Relay coil.
When the coolant temperature exceeds 113°C
(235°F), the Coolant Temperature Switch closes.
By grounding circuit 335, the Relay coil is ener-
gized and battery voltage is applied to the
Coolant Fan.
."
m
~
o
If equipped with Air Conditioning, the AIC
High Pressure Cut-Out Switch and AIC Control
Head also energize the Coolant Fan Relay by
grounding circuit 335 whenever the AIC High
Pressure Cut-Out Switch closes above 280 psi
(1931 kPa) and the AIC Function Selector is in
MAX, NORM or B/L.
V6 VIN 9 (ENGINE BLOWER ASSEMBLY)
The Engine Blower is operated by the Engine
Blower Relay. With the Ignition Switch in
RUN, voltage is applied through the FAN E
Fuse to terminal A of the Engine Blower Relay
and terminal B of the Relay coil.
When the coolant temperature exceeds 113°C
(235 OF), the Coolant Temperature Switch
grounds circuit 335, this causes the Relay coil
to energize and battery voltage is applied to the
Engine Blower.
If equipped with Air Conditioning, the AIC
High Pressure Cut-Out Switch and AIC Control
Head also energize the Coolant Fan Relay by
grounding circuit 335 whenever the AIC High
Pressure Cut-Out Switch closes above 280 psi
(1931 kPa) and the AIC Function Selector is in
MAX, NORM or B/L.
~
I
w
.....
." VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (XI
»
I
W
TRANSAXLE

MAGNeT ~
SENSOR
HOT IN ACCY OR RUN
- - - - - - - - - , FUSE
RADIO
f..IIn
10 AMP
RADIO
_________ .JI
,--

,!!!J!£K
I
I
!I
1
Il______
1
r------------, 1GN

vss
INPUT

___ I
ElECTRONIC

II ~~~~~~L(ECM)
SOLID STATE
I 00 NOT MEASURE
, . - - - - - - - - - - -.. CRUISE
1
1
I
I
I

IL______ ___ JI
I GN

vss
I--
1 CONTROL
_ __
1 MODULE
I SOLID STATE
INPUT I 00 NOT
W
o

III
(PERMANENT RESISTANCE MEASURE
MAGNET GENERATOR) J RESISTANCE
4000 PULSES o
23 (L4 VIN R)
PER MILE
AID C2 (V6 VIN 9) .5 OK GRNtWHT 389
.5 VEl 43 (NOT USED)
.8 OK GRN 389 (L4 VIN R)

I
V6 VIN9 V L4 VIN R
.8 BRN 437 (V6 VIN 9)

AI
40~ B_~~~
B
B.!!! . _. . :~~~~S:ETAILS GRN~~;
H
1: C203

___
.8 PPLtWHRT ____ 4:: .5 OK .5 OK GRNtWHT

PPLtWH~ r~~ '~:~. I~~ _____________ ~~~E~:~1~ ~~~~G~::~~3:~

03

.5 __ _ __ _ ________ 3B9

r-------------------~--------~~-----i------------- -----------------------~---------1-----------------------!~~:;::ENT

CIRCUIT
POWER 2,000 PULSES
INPUT PER MILE ~
SENSOR
INPUT
~
!!!fill
SOLID
COIL B
STATE
CONTROL
00 NOT
SPEEDOMETER COIL A MEASURE
CONTROL RESISTANCE

COIL B
CONTROL
TOTAL ODOMETER TRIP OOOMETER
COIL A STEPPER MOTOR STEPPER MOTOR
CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL =

TOTAL ODOMETER TRIP ODOMETER

L___________________________________________________________________ ----~:~M~~::~-~_.~~~~~::"~;J~~~------------J

DIAGNOSTIC
LlNK(ALDL)
CONNECTOR
>750

I BLK
I
• S504

450 :!!
m
SEE GROUND ::D
DISTRIBUTION . . .- - -.... ~ o
=
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ."m
:JJ
o
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS COMPONENT LOCATION Page- Figure
• Try the following check before doing the Sys- Assembly Line Diagnostic Link
tem Diagnosis. (ALDL) Connector In console, near rear of shifter 201- 7-A
Check the RADIO Fuse by operating the Cruise Control Module Under console, near radio 201- 8-B
Radio. Electronic Control Module (ECM) . .. Between seats, on front of rear bulkhead , 201- 7-A
Fuse Block Behind LH side of liP 201- 5-D
• Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.
Vehicle Speed Sensor RH end oftransaxle 201- I-A
C203 (15 cavities) Between seats, in front of rear bulkhead 201- 7-A
SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
C245 (8 cavities) Below RH steering column support 201- 5-B
• Do the tests listed for your symptom in the G504 (VIN 9) LH top of engine, below throttle body , 201- 3-A
Symptom Table below. G504 (VIN R) Top LH front of engine, above Starter Solenoid .. 201- 2-A
• Tests follow the Symptom Table. S201. Main harness, above steering column 201- 8-A
S216 Main harness, behind center liP 201-17-A
SYMPTOM TABLE S504. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Engine harness, under rear console. . . . . . . . . . .. 201- 7-A
SYMPTOM FOR DIAGNOSIS
Speedometer does Replace Instrument A: VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR BUFFER (Continued from previous column)
not operate Cluster, see TEST (TABLE 1) • If both voltages are correct, go to Table 2.
properly, ECM Code Section 8C for Measure: VOLTAGE 1. Check/repair YEL/BLK and YEL (43)
24 is not set removal and At: INSTRUMENTCLUSTERCONNECTOR wire for an open (see schematic).
replacement C1 (Disconnected)
2. Check/repair BLK/WHT (450) wire for an
procedures Condition:
open (see schematic). Check that ground
ECM Code 24 is set, DoTestB • Ignition Switch: RUN G504 is clean and tight.
Speedometer Measure Correct
operates properly For Diagnosis
Between Voltage
Speedometer does Do TestA T(YEL/BLK)
not operate Battery See 1
& Ground
properly, ECM Code
24 is set T(YEL/BLK)
&P(BLK/ Battery See 2
Cruise Control (if DoTestB WHT)
equipped) does not
operate properly, (Continued in next column)
ECM Code 24 is not
set
00
l>
• If your symptom is not listed in the Symp- I
tom Table, perform all the tests. tAl
tAl
(Continued on next page) ..•
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ~
I
B: VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR BUFFER B: VEHICE SPEED SENSOR BUFFER W
(Continued from previous page) W
OUTPUT TEST (TABLE 1) V6 VIN 9 OUTPUT TEST (TABLE 1) L4 VIN R
N
A: VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR BUFFER ONLY ONLY
TEST (TABLE 2) Measure: VOLTAGE Measure: VOLTAGE
Measure: AC VOLTAGE At: INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CONNECTOR At: INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CONNECTOR
At: INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CONNECTOR C1 (Disconnected) C1 (Disconnected)
C1 (Connected) Conditions: Condition:
Conditions: • Ignition Switch: RUN • Ignition Switch: RUN
• Ignition Switch: RUN • Connector C245: DISCONNECTED Measure Correct
For Diagnosis
• Gear Selector: NEUTRAL Measure Correct Between Voltage
• Raise car off the ground and turn drive For Diagnosis
Between Voltage
wheels by hand while making U(DKGRN/
measurement U(DKGRN/ WHT) & Battery See 1
WHT) & Battery See 1 Ground
Measure Correct
For Diagnosis Ground
Between Voltage • If the voltage is correct, go to Table 2.
• Connector C245: CONNECTED 1. Check the DK GRN/WHT (389) wire and
Varying from • Cruise Control: ON
S(YEL)&R BRN (437) wire for an open (see sche-
1 to 5 Volts See 1 • Connector C203: DISCONNECTED matic). Check that connector C203 is
(PPLlWHT)
AC mated correctly. If all are good, replace
U(DKGRN/
• If the voltage is correct, check the printed WHT) & Battery See 2 ECM .
circuit for flaws and cracks. If OK, replace Ground
Instrument Cluster (see Section 8C).
1. Check/repair the YEL (400) and PPL/
• If all voltages are correct, go to Table 2. B: VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR BUFFER
1. Check the DK GRN/WHT (389) wire and OUPUT TEST (TABLE 2)
WHT (401) wires (see schematic). Replace
BRN (437) wire for an open and check that Measure: VOLTAGE
the Instrument Cluster if both wires are
connector C203 is mated correctly. If all At: INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CONNECTOR
OK and connector C203 is correctly
are good, replace the Electronic Control C1 (Connected)
mated (see Section 8C).
Module. Conditions:
2. Check the DK GRN/WHT (389) wire for • Ignition Switch: RUN -
an open and check that connector C245 is • Gear Selector: NEUTRAL
mated correctly. If OK, see Cruise Con- • Raise car off the ground and turn the
trol, Section 8A-34. drive wheels by hand while making
measurement
Measure Correct
For Diagnosis
Between Voltage

Varying from
U(DKGRN/
less than 1
WHT) & See 1
volt to more
Ground "T'I
than 4 volts Iii
::XJ
(Continued on next page) o
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ."
in
:D
o
(Continued from previous page)
• If the voltage at U is correct and code 24 is
set, replace the ECM.
• If the voltage at U is correct and the
Cruise Control does not operate properly,
replace the Cruise Control.
1. Replace the Instrument Cluster (see Sec-
tion8C).

CIRCUIT OPERATION
The Vehicle Speed Sensor generates a signal
that indicates the speed of the vehicle. The sig-
nal produced is a sine wave, which is processed
into a square wave by the Vehicle Speed Sensor
Buffer to supply inputs to the Speedometer,
Electronic Control Module and Cruise Control
(if equipped).
The Vehicle Speed Sensor is mounted in the
Transaxle. A magnet rotates near a coil, pro-
ducing voltage pulses in the coil. The frequency
of the AC voltage coming from this coil depends
on the vehicle's speed. As the speed increases,
so does the number of voltage pulses per sec-
ond.
The Vehicle Speed Sensor Buffer takes the
sensor/voltage pulses from the Sensor, through
the PPLIWHT and YEL wires, and uses them
to close a Solid State output switch. The output
terminal is switched to ground at a rate that is
proportional to the speed of the car. The output
to the ECM and Cruise Control is switched at
2000 pulses per mile after it has been through a
"divide by two circuit" in the ECM. 00
»
The output switch in the Vehicle Speed Sen- I
sor Buffer is a Solid State switch, not a mechan- W
W
ical one. Self-powered test lamps or ohmmeters
should not be used to test it.
-" CRUISE CONTROL: K34, V6 VIN 9

RADIO HOT IN ACCY OR RUN

.5 YElt43 j-
I
--------1I
RADIO FUSE
FUSE
BLOCK
o
.5 YEL .5 YEl.~ .35 YEL ••
S2.0.1_ _ _ _.5.Y.E.L_ _ _... ......:.:
10..;:A'JMP I
~ r R!.'!!.o.._!
Y
43 ..- - - _
AAc235 43 A 43 ~ 43

BLU
~MUL TI.FUNCTION r--------...:..:~L...--------__. r---l CRUISE
I I BRAKE
LEVER
CRUISE
SWITCH
I
L
I __ _
I SWITCH
J--
OFF

D
VEHICLE
SET }
SWIT CH L_. . SPEED
SENSOR

GRN RED YEL

- -----------0 -----
£ill
B.... C

.5 GRY 397 .5 YEl /BLK 43

.5 OK BLU 84 .8 YE:I400 AI
.8 PP Li
WHT 401

A g G ~ ___ .B ill!l
.5 PPLI
OPEN WITH WHT 401
BRAKE .5 YEL 400
PEDAL
DEPRESSED

MANUAL
I
J-.. AUTOMATIC .5 GRY / r-------¥:.:.:,.-:.-:..--' . . ...:;-..:;-,;:,;¥=------------...
TS R Cl
INSTRUMENT

.5 YE~I~:8 .5 BR: ~! BL K 87 i POWER SPEED INPUTS t-c~-~N-S;-:-:

A CRUISE II INPUT II CIRCUIT

~
CLUTCH .5 OK GRN/ I SOLID STATE I
SWITCH
.5 OK GR rJ/
WHT
P_~-=;;(.!,
UrL
OUTPUT GROUND
II
e._ e._ OPENS WITH MULTI-PORT WHT 389 Cl I I

.5 GRY 397
",:l':;::~:;;~'" :~';~n" ~. • g!! - L------~~~~~!!~~~!~~.81.:B~LK-/W-~I,j,~::---J
, ' L, I .5 OK GRN/wHT!3B9

JiI__________
V C C245

A _______________ L.; ____ ~ ~---------~~~~R~~~~lj8g M IC203

r---"'CiiUj"sE"--------------iRAKE-------SEriCiiAST--R"ESUMEi------------~~;;~s;EEii'
I
I
I
I
ON
INPUT
INPUT INPUT ACCELERATE
INPUT
INPUT
£!!!!.!g
~
MODULE SEE MULTI.PORT
FUEL INJECTION
(FUEL CONTROL)
.8 BLK/WHT
~~r::;;. S504

1 BLK
.8 OK GRN
j 450

450

I ~~~
"'T'I
m
I ~G504 ::0
o
~-------------------------------------------------------------
"0 CRUISE CONTROL: VACUUM, V6 VIN 9 "T1
m
:l:I
o
HOT IN ACCY OR RUN CRUISE CONTROL MODULE
,.-
I
------ 1
RADIO FUSE ~---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I
---------------
I
: FUSE I BLOCK I I
I I
: 10 AMP : I I
I I
L __ ~~~~J I VACUUM VENT
SOLID STATE
SERVO POSITION I
I

~.---.
VALVE VALVE SENSOR INPUT I
.5Yell 43
~---K~~~~~~~~-----~~~~~~~~~===~~~~-~~~~~~=~~~~~~---~~
I CONTROL CONTROL lO HI , GROUND I

.5 LT BLU/BLK 399

.35 YEl}43
SEE FACING .5LTGRN .402 .5 OK BLUIWHT • 403 .5TAN.398 .5 BLK I 150
o C245 PAGE

E... F

"J~~~~~~~~-~~~~~~~~~~_
.5 YEl~.5 YEl •

r-l1'~
I
:
I
A

I •..-
L- a
I BRAKE
ISWITCH
43

I OPENS WITH BRAKE

PEDAL DEPRESSED
si ~:~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~'~
£ill

5 YEl/BLK 943 5LTGRNI402 .5 OK BLU}403 .8LTBLU/BLKI3991-

.8 TAN 398 .8 BLK 150

VENT
A C245
E A II 0 B
CRUISE

I
. CONTROL

, I
VACUUM VENT SERVO
.8 LT GRN/BLKI9-:
VALVE VALVE

,::f:OO
I
I VARIA8LE::'O'
AC SIGNAL
:CLOSED
VACUUM .••••
SOURCE
: : :<P SERVO
POSITION

VENT CLOSEO SENSOR <,

ClOSEO 'ill!!.!!!:! "-

)------
8-- ~
~ r{.~.
----====== "'_ b~~~"~~~~r
l.--. CONNECTED
TO THROTTlE

't\r
VACUUM
~
: l .,,'"

I
.8BLK
'IJJ :~~~~S~
150
r---~~
.8BLK ~
GT SE
I
150
.8 BLK

150
.8 BLK 't50

S4011
I'
}
1
SEE GROUND
DISTRIBUTION
3 BLK 1150
ce
l>

W
I
SEE GROUND
DISTRIBUTION ~
.A.~
~ill!! ....•
CRUISE CONTROL co
l>
I
Co\)
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS COMPONENT LOCATION Page-Figure ~
• Try the following checks before doing the Brake Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Top of brake pedal support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201-10- A ~
System Diagnosis. Cruise Brake Switch On brake pedal support 201-10-A
1. Check vacuum hose for leaks, kinks, and/or Cruise Clutch Switch . . . . . . . . . . . .. On clutch pedal support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201-10- A
restrictions. Also check Cruise Control Cruise Control Module Under console, near radio 201- 8-B
Servo linkage. Refer to Section 9 for vac- Cruise Control Servo. . . . . . . . . . . . .. Engine compartment, near LH shock tower. . . .. 201-13- A
uum hose routing and servo linkage Electronic Control Module (ECM) Between seats, on front of rear bulkhead 201- 7-A
adjustments. Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Behind LH side ofl/P ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201- 5-D
2. If the system works except for the Tap-Up Multi- Function Lever. . . . . . . . . . . .. Top LH side of steering column. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201- 6-F
and Tap-Down functions, replace the Vacuum Release Solenoid. . . . . . . . .. Engine compartment, on LH shock tower. . . . .. 201-13-A
Cruise Control Module (V6 VIN 9). Vehicle Speed Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . .. RH end oftransaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201- I-A
C203 (15 cavities) Between seats, in front of rear bulkhead 201- 7-A
• Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.
C235 (4 cavities) Middle of steering column. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201- 6-F
C245 (8 cavities) Below RH steering column support 201- 5-B
SYSTEM CHECK (ROAD TEST)
C255 (8 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Behind liP, right of steering column
• Use the System Check Table as a guide to C500 (34 cavities) Engine compartment, near battery 201-11-B
normal operation. G202 Between seats, near rear bulkhead 201- 5-A
G400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. RH rear of engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201- 9-B
SYSTEM CHECK TABLE G504(VIN9) LHtopofengine, below throttle body 201- 3-A
ACTION CORRECT RESULT G504 (VIN R) Top LH front of engine, above Starter Solenoid .. 201- 2-A
1. Drive car faster Car should main- S201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Main harness, above steering column. . . . . . . . .. 201- 8-A
than 25 mph. Turn tain speed S213 ......•.................... Main harness, behind rear bulkhead grommet 201-17-A
Cruise Switch ON. S216 Main harness, behind center liP 201-17-A
Depress Set button S401. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Rear lights harness, LH side of back panel. . . . .. 201-13- A
at the end of the S504. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Engine harness, under rear console. . . . . . . . . . .. 201- 7-A
Multi-Function
Lever
2. Hold Set button Car should coast to (Continued from previous column) (Continued from previous column)
in and take foot off a slower speed 4. Slide Cruise Car should 7. Slide Cruise Car should acceler-
accelerator Switch to R/ A and accelerate Switch momentarily ate to former set
3. Release Set Cruise Control hold it there toR/A speed
button should engage and 5. Release Cruise Car should hold new
hold a slower speed, Switch back to ON faster speed 8. While cruising, Car should coast
if the new speed re- 6. Tap brake pedal Car should coast accelerate, then back to set speed
mains above 25 mph slower (Cruise remove foot from
(Continued in next column) disengages) accelerator
!!
(Continued in next column) m
:xl
o
CRUISE CONTROL ::!!
m
:D
o

ISOLATION TEST
Connect: QUICK CHECKER (J-34185. SPECMO QC-3 or EQUIVALENT)or VOLT-OHMMETER
At: CRUISE CONTROL MODULECONNECTOR (Disconnected)
9. While cruising, Car speed should Conditions:
tap Cruise Switch increase 1mph for • Ignition Switch: RUN
to R/A each tap, up to ten • Test with Quick Checker (J-34185 or equivalent) or Digital Meter
taps, then system
• Do tests in the sequence listed
may have to be reset
to a new speed With Without Quick Checker. For
Quick Checker. Using a Digital Meter Different
10. While cruising, Car speed should Test Condition
tap Set button decrease by 1 mph Correct Meter Connector Correct Response.
for each tap, until Response Range Terminals Response do Test
25 mph is reached 1 Cruise Switch Off J&
when Cruise Con- - 200 ohms
Ground
o ohms B
trol will not operate
All Lights Off
200 VDC A&J o volts A
11. Slide Cruise Cruise Control
Switch to OFF turns off 200 VDC M&J o volts
2 Cruise Switch On ON/OFF
• Refer to System Diagnosis when a result is 200 VDC A&J Battery voltage B
Light On
not normal.
BRK Light On 200 VDC G&J Battery voltage C
SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS VENT Light On 200 ohms C&J 30 to 55 ohms D
V6 VIN 9 VAC Light On 200 ohms K&J 30 to 55 ohms E
• Use the Isolation Test below to choose the SPS Light On 200 ohms F&H 15 to 25 ohms F
proper diagnostic tests. R/ A Light Off 200 VDC M&J o volts A
• Tests follow the Isolation Test. SC Light Off 200 VDC L&J o volts A
1. Do not press both the Set and R/ A Switches 3 Cruise Switch On, Set SC Light On 200 VDC L&J Battery voltage G
at the same time while the engine is running Switch pressed VAC&
and Cruise Control Servo is connected to the SHORT 200 ohms K&J 30 to 55 ohms H
Throttle. Lights Off
2. If the Quick Checker displays a short light,
4 Cruise Switch in R/ A ON/OFF
release the switches immediately. Shorts 200 VDC A&J Battery voltage A
Light On
can damage the Quick Checker.
R/A Light On 200 VDC M&J Battery voltage I
00
VENT & »
SHORT 200 ohms C&J 30 to 55 ohms J I
Lights Off W
~
(Continued on next page)
(J'I
lJ CRUISE CONTROL co
l>

(Continued from previous page) I

w
Pulses between
D: VENT CIRCUIT OPEN ~
VSS Light approximately If you are testing with a digital voltmeter and en
Cruise Switch On, drive
5 flashes On and 200 VDC A&D Battery voltage K,L you measured less than 30 ohms, perform Test J.
wheels turned by hand
Off and less than Otherwise, proceed to the following action:
7 volts
• Remove the connector from the Cruise Con-
Disconnect Servo-
Connect fused trol Servo. Measure the resistance between
Throttle linkage. Vacuum holds
With engine running, jumper from C to M Vacuum holds terminals A and C of the Servo.
the servo
and holding Cruise and from K to L the servo all - If it is greater than 55 ohms, replace the
6 all the M
before operating the way in Servo.
Switch in RIA, press Set waym
switches
Switch, wait for servo to - If it is less than 55 ohms, check for an open
pull in, and release Set DK BLU or DK BLU/WHT (403) wire
Switch between terminal C of the Cruise Control
Quick Checker not Module and terminal A of the Cruise Con-
7 200 ohms F&J Over range N
connected trol Servo. Check that terminal C of the
Quick Checker not servo connector is grounded (see sche-
8 200 ohms F&H 15 to 25 ohms 0
connected matic).
• If all the responses are correct, do Test P.
E: VAC CIRCUIT OPEN
A: CRUISE SWITCH SHORT 4. Check continuity between terminals A and If you are testing with a digital voltmeter and
B of the male half of connector C235 with you measured less than 30 ohms, perform Test
Check for shorts to voltage in the wires to ter-
the Cruise Switch On. H. Otherwise, proceed with the following
minals G, A, M, and L of the Cruise Control
action:
Module (see schematic). • If the switch is open, replace the Multi- Func-
tionLever. • Remove the connector from the Cruise Con-
• If the wires are good, replace the Multi- Func-
trol Servo. Measure the resistance between
tion Lever. 5. Check for an open in GRY (397) wire be-
terminals E and C of the servo.
tween terminal B of connector C235 and
- If it is more than 55 ohms, replace the
B: POWER CIRCUIT OPEN terminal A of the Cruise Control Module
servo.
1. Check the RADIO Fuse. connector.
- If it is less than 55 ohms, check for an open
2. Check that terminal J is grounded. in the LT GRN (402) wire between termi-
C: BRK CIRCUIT OPEN
3. Disconnect connector C235 and check for nal K of the Cruise Control Module and
1. Check for an open Brake Switch or Cruise
battery voltage at terminal A of the female terminal E of the Cruise Control Servo.
Clutch Switch (see schematic).
half with Ignition Switch in RUN. Check that terminal C of the servo connec-
2. Check for an open in the BRN (86) wire, GRY
• If battery voltage is missing, check/repair tor is grounded (see schematic).
(397) wire or YEL (918) wire.
YEL (43)wire.
:!!
m
::J:J
o
CRUISE CONTROL "
m
:Il
o
F: SPS CIRCUIT OPEN I: RIA CIRCUIT OPEN M: VACUUM SYSTEM
If you are testing with a digital voltmeter and Disconnect C235 and check switch continuity Connect: TEST LAMP
you measured less than 15 ohms, perform Test between terminals A and C of the male half with At: VACUUMRELEASESOLENOID CON-
N. Otherwise, proceed to the following action: the Cruise Switch in R/A. NECTOR (Disconnected)
Condition:
• Remove the connector from the Cruise Con- • If the switch is open, replace the Multi-Func-
• Ignition Switch: ACCY
trol Servo. Measure the resistance between tionLever.
terminals B and D of the servo. For
• If the switch is not open, check for an open in
Connect Correct Diagnosis
- If it is more than 25 ohms, replace the the GRY/BLK (87) wire between terminal C Between Result Of Incorrect
servo. of connector C235 and terminal M of the Results
- If it is less than 25 ohms, check for an open Cruise Control Module.
A (PPL) Test Lamp
in the LT BLUIBLK (399) wire between See 1
J: VENT CIRCUIT SHORT & Ground lights
terminal H of the Cruise Control Module
and terminal D of the Cruise Control Remove the connector from the Cruise Control A (PPL) Test Lamp
See 2
& B (BLK) lights
Servo. Check for an open in the TAN (398) Servo and measure the resistance between ter-
wire between terminal F of the module and minals A and C of the Servo. • If both results are correct, go to M1.
terminal B of the servo. • If it is less than 30 ohms, replace the servo. 1. Check/adjust Cruise Brake Switch, and
check YEL/BLK, LT GRN/BLK, and
• If it is 30 ohms or more, check for a short to
G: SC CIRCUIT OPEN PPL (943) wires for an open.
ground in the wire from terminal C of the
Disconnect C235 and check the switch con- 2. Check BLK (150) wire for an open.
Cruise Control Module to terminal A of the
tinuity between terminals B and D of the male Cruise Control Servo.
half with the Set Switch pressed. M1. Check for a blocked or leaking vacuum
• If the switch is open, replace the Multi-Func- K: VSS CIRCUIT OPEN source. If the vacuum source is good, plug the
tionLever. If the VSS light does not come on, or the volt- Vacuum Release Port and repeat Test 6 of the
age between terminals A and D remains less Isolation.
• If the switch is not open, check for an open in
the DK BLU (84) wire between terminal D of than 7 volts, check for an open in the DK • If the vacuum now holds the throttle open,
connector C235 and terminal L of the module. GRN/WHT (389) wire from the Vehicle Speed replace or repair the Vacuum Release Sole-
Sensor Buffer. Refer to p. 33-0 for diagnosis of noid or the hose to it.
H: VAC CIRCUIT SHORT Vehicle Speed Sensor. • If the test still fails, replace the Cruise Con-
Remove the connector from the Cruise Control trol Servo.
Servo and measure the resistance between ter- L: VSS CIRCUIT SHORT
minals C and E of the Cruise Control Servo. If the VSS light does not go off or battery volt-
• If it is less than 30 ohms, replace the servo. age remains between terminals A and D, check co
l>
for a short to ground in the DK GRN/WHT
• If it is 30 ohms or more, check for a short to
ground in the wire from terminal K of the
(389) wire from the Vehicle Speed Sensor I
Co\)
Buffer. Refer to p. 33-0 for diagnosis of Vehicle
module to terminal E of the servo. ~
Speed Sensor.
(Continued on next page) I.:..
" CRUISE CONTROL 00
l>
(Continued from previous page) I
Co\)
N: SPS CIRCUIT SHORT CRUISE CONTROL DOES NOT WORK PROPERLY (TABLE 1)
~
Connect: SCAN TOOL
At: ALDLCONNECTOR
Disconnect the Cruise Control Servo con- Or Measure: VOLTAGE
00
nector and repeat Test 7 of the Isolation Test. At: ELECTRONICMODULECONNECTORSC1 & C2
Conditions:
-If using Scan Tool, follow manufacturer's instructions & setfor 1987 Pontiac EFt.
• If the resistance is now over range, replace .If using voltmeter, turn Ignition OFF before disconnecting ECM.
-Ignition Switch: RUN
the Cruise Control Servo.
With Scan Tool Without Scan Tool
Set For Diagnosis
• If the resistance is still low, find and repair Controls
Scan Tool Correct Measure Correct
Position or Mode Display Between Voltage
the short in the wire from terminal F of the Cruise
Cruise CI-20 (GRY)
Cruise Control Module to terminal B of the Switch:
Switch
OFF
& Ground
o volts See 1
OFF
Cruise Control Servo. Cruise
Cruise CI-20 (GRY) Battery
Switch: ON See 2
Switch & Ground Voltage
ON
0: SPS SHORT Cruise
Switch:
Brake
ON
C2-14 (BRN)
Battery See 3
Switch & Ground
ON
If all other tests were OK, replace the Cruise Brake
Brake C2-14 (BRN)
Control Servo. Pedal:
Switch
OFF
& Ground
o volts See 4
DEPRESSED
P: CRUISE MODULE Cruise Cruise
CI-21 (OK BLU)
Switch: Set/Coast OFF
& Ground
o volts See 5
1. Check the resistance between G202 and ON Switch
Set Cruise
CI-21 (OK BLU)
G504. Switch: Set/Coast ON
& Ground
Battery See 6
PRESSED Switch

• If it is more than 0.1 ohm, clean and tighten Cruise Cruise

CI-4 (BLK)
Switch: Resume/ OFF
& Ground
o volts See 7
both grounds and the negative battery ON Accel. Switch
Cruise Cruise
cable. In cases where the ground circuit is Switch: Resume/ ON
CI-4 (BLK)
Battery See S
& Ground
RIA Accel. Switch
suspect, add a ground strap between the Gear Shift
engine block and the bulkhead. Drive Park/Neutral CI-IS
(Automatic Switch
ON
(ORN/BLK) o volts See 9
2. Connect a new Cruise Control Module and transmission
only)
& Ground

check for normal operation. Drive Car

Speed of car
(with Scan MPH See 10
• If the Cruise Control operates normally, I Tool only) in mph

leave the new module in permanently. Cruise

Switch: ON C!-20IGRYI Pulses betwee
Turn drive approximately
• If the Cruise Control still does not operate & C1-23 See 10
wheels hy hand battery & less
(if not using than 7 volts
normally, refer to the AC Custom Cruise 3 DKGRN

Systems Service Manual for further diag- . Scan Tool

If all the displays
1. Replace
are correct,
the Multi-Function
go to Table
Lever.
2.

nostics procedures. 2. Check the RADIO Fuse, the Cruise Clutch, and the YEL(43) and GRY (397) wires for an
open (see schematic).

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS 3. Check the Brake Switch, the Cruise Switch (with manual transaxle), the GRY (397) wire,
YEL (918) wire and the BRN (86) wire for an open (see schematic).
L4 VIN R 4. Adjust/replace the Cruise Brake Switch.
5. Check the Set Switch for a short.
Note: If any diagnostic codes are set, refer to 6. Check the Set Switch and DK BLU (84) wire for an open (see schematic).
7. Check the Cruise Switch for a short (see schematic).
Section 6E. 8_Check the Cruise Switch and GRY BLK (87) wire for an open (see schematic).
• Do the tests below if the Cruise Control does 9. Check the Gear Selector Switch and ORN/BLK (434) wire for a short to ground (see ."
schematic). m
not operate. 10_ Refer to Section SA-33. ;g
o
CRUISE CONTROL ."
m
::%J
o

CRUISE CONTROL DOES NOT WORK (Continued from previous column) CIRCUIT OPERATION
PROPERLY (TABLE 2) Vacuum holds The Cruise Control System operates a me-
Measure: RESISTANCE Jumper chanical linkage to the throttle bymeans of a
Servo all the Go to Table 4
At: ELECTRONICCONTROLMODULE Removed Vacuum Motor. This is a diaphragm moved by
way in
CONNECTORC2 (Disconnected) a vacuum applied to one side. A solenoid oper-
• If all results are correct, replace ECM .
ated valve connects the Vacuum Motor to a
Measure Correct For
Between Resistance Diagnosis Vacuum Tank. Another solenoid valve vents
CRUISE CONTROL DOES NOT WORK the vacuum to reduce the suction. The Cruise
10 (LTGRN) & PROPERLY (TABLE 4) Control Module (V6 VIN 9) or Electronic
30 to 55 ohms See 1
Ground Connect: TEST LAMP Control Module (L4 VIN R) controls the Vac-
11 (DKBLU/ At: VACUUMRELEASESOLENOID uum Motor and the throttle by pulsing these
WHT) & 30 to 55 ohms See 2 CONNECTOR (Disconnected) solenoid valves on and off.
Ground Condition: One input to the module is the vehicle speed .
• If all results are correct, go to Table 3. • Ignition Switch: ACCY
This input comes from the Vehicle Speed Sen-
1. Check Cruise Control Servo, LT GRN (402) sor Buffer. If the actual speed signal is dif-
wire and BLK (150) wire Cruise Control Connect Correct For ferent from the speed that was set into and
Servo ground (see schematic). Between Result Diagnosis
remembered by the module, the module gener-
2. Check Cruise Control Servo, DK BLU and ates pulses to change the vacuum and return
DK BLUlWHT (403) wires (see schematic). A (PPL) Test Lamp the vehicle to the speed set. Other inputs to
See 1
& Ground lights the module are from the Cruise Switch and the
A (PPL) Test Lamp Set Switch. A disconnect input to the module
See 2 comes from a switch on the brake pedal. A
& B (BLK) lights
CRUISE CONTROL DOES NOT WORK separate vacuum shut-down ofthe Cruise Con-
PROPERLY (TABLE 3) • If both results are correct, go to AI.
trol comes from the Cruise Brake Switch on
Connect: FUSEDJUMPER 1. Check/adjust Cruise Brake Switch, and
the brake pedal.
At: CRUISECONTROLSERVO (Disconnected) check YEL/BLK, LT GRN/BLK, and
The two outputs of the Cruise Control Mod-
PPL (943) wires for an open.
Conditions: ule operate the coils of the Vacuum Valve and
• Disconnect Servo-Throttle linkage 2. Check BLK (150) wire for an open.
the Vent Valve. Both valves are located in the
• Jumper terminal C of Servo to ground A 1. Check for a blocked or leaking vacuum Cruise Control Servo. These valves move the
• Jumper terminal A of Servo to Battery source. Plug the Vacuum Release Port and throttle by means of the Vacuum Motor.
• Engine running repeat the test in Table 3. With V6 VIN 9 engine, the Servo Position
Connect Correct For Sensor coil senses the position and motion of
• If the vacuum now holds the servo all the way
Between Result Diagnosis
in, replace or repair the Vacuum Release the Vacuum Motor. It feeds this information
Vacuum pulls Valve or the hose to it. back to the module to provide smooth acceler- co
l>
E & Battery Servo all the Go to Table 4 ation while the vehicle is in Cruise Control.
way in
• If the test still fails, replace the Cruise Con- I
Co\)
trol Servo.
• Remove jumper from terminal E ~
(Continued in next column) CD
o CRUISE CONTROL

With the L4 VIN R, the Throttle Position Sen-

sor in the Throttle Body senses the position and ....
o
motion of the vacuum motor. It feeds informa-
tion back to the module to provide smooth
throttle changes while the vehicle is in Cruise
Control.
With the L4 VIN R a number of additional
safety features are included in the system. If
the ECM diagnostics detect a fault with the
throttle position sensor (codes 21 and 22), with
the vehicle speed sensor (code 24) or with a
constant check engine light that will not dis-
playa code cruise is inhibited. Cruise will also
be inhibited if the transmission is shifted to
neutral (automatic trans), declutched resulting
in a very rapid change in engine RPM (manual
trans), if the engine exceeds red line RPM, or if
cruise is requested above 90 MPH. (Changing
of the transmission speedometer gear to a new
gear ratio may adversely impact cruise in lower
gears (manual trans only).

'T1
in
::u
o
." HORNS 00
l>
I
~
HOT AT ALL TIMES
o
.. - - - - - - - - - , FUSE o
: M!l..!!!t I BLOCK
I 25AMP :--
I SEE FUSE I
t __ !.L!~.!'~~I.!:.SJ
1 DRN 40

1 OK GRN 29

H6 ClOD

FOR Cl08 TERMINAL 1 OK GRN 29

VIEW, SEE BULKHEAD
CONNECTOR PAGE 202·0

1 OK GRN 29

:!!
m
::c
o
HORNS ."in
::a
o
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS COMPONENT LOCATION Page-Figure
• Try the following checks before doing the Sys- Convenience Center Behind RH side of liP 201-14-B
tem Diagnosis. Fuse Block. Behind LH side ofI/P 201- 5-D
1. Check the BAT Fuse by operating the Cigar Slip Ring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Top of steering column, below steering wheel
Lighter. CIOO(34 cavities) .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. LH side of front bulkhead, right of brake master
cylinder 201-11-A
2. Check that grounds are clean and tight.
C210 (11 cavities) Lower RH side ofsteering column 201- 6-D
3. If only one Horn sounds, check the DK GRN S210 Mainhamess,behindRHsideofIlP 201- 5-C
(29) wire for an open between the Horns (see
schematic).
B:NONEOFTHEHORNSSOUND CIRCUIT OPERATION
• Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.
Connect: TEST LAMP When the Horn Switch is depressed, one side
At: CONVENIENCECENTER of the coil of the Horn Relay is grounded. The
SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
Conditions: relay is energized. Its contacts close and bat-
• Diagnostic steps for the symptoms listed in • Horn Relay: REMOVED tery voltage is applied to the Horns.
the following table are listed after the table. • Horn Switch: OFF
Connect Correct
SYMPTOM TABLE For Diagnosis
Between Indication
A. Horns sound continuously
A (ORN)& Test Lamp See 1
B. None of the Horns sound Ground ON
• Horn Switch: ON
A: HORNS SOUND CONTINUOUSLY
A(ORN)&B Test Lamp
See 2
Connect: TEST LAMP (BLK) ON
At: CONVENIENCECENTER
• If all the tests yield the correct results,
Conditions:
check the Horns and the DK GRN (29)
• Horn Relay: REMOVED
wire for an open. If OK, replace the Horn
• Horn Switch: OFF
Relay (see schematic).
Connect Correct 1. Check the ORN (40) wire for an open (see
For Diagnosis
Between Indication schematic).
A(ORN)&B Test Lamp See 1 2. Check the BLK (28) wire and the Horn
(BLK) OFF Switch for an open (see schematic).
• If the test yields the correct response,
replace the Horn Relay.
co
1. Check BLK (28) wire and Horn Switch for ~
a short to ground (see schematic). I
~

..o
-0 BRAKE WARNING SYSTEM

HOT IN RUN . BULB TEST OR START

o
,..~---------' FUSE
: GAGES FUSE : BLOCK
I to AM' I
I SEE FUSE I
l __ !.L!~!~~~J
1 PNK/ BLK139

S203
~
.~~~+
SEE FUSE BLOCK
DETAILS

.8 PNK/ BLK ~ 39

9 i C2
r--r=--~-----" INSTRUMENT PANEL
I INSTRUM ENT, ~='="==~=-
I
I
I
G) "SRAKE "
---
PANEL I PRINTE 0 CI RCUIT
I
I

: 1 iNo"iCA'To
MANUAt I WARNING I
TRANSAXLE R :
ONLY I I

TRUNK
.5 TAN/WHT '5TAN;~r~-- - ---_J ~
RElEASE 33 DIODE
.5 TANIWHT .;S2;0;;;;5~_~~~~~.5~T~A~NIW~H~T_~~t!:!!~~~I!!:Oi_~~.~5:;;TAiliN./W~HT_~~.. ~
~1!!:OOII~_~II"'!!:O_~I!:Oi-='-I"'!:OiI-:~. AUOIO
ALARM
33 33 33 SYSTEM

F6 Cl00

",,,,,1:-
.5 TAN/WHT 33
!LRAKE flUID LEVel
.8 PPL 209
CLOSED WITH LOW
BRAKE flUID

"':F~
.8BLK 150

IDm.e--<IIII SEE GROUNO

OISTRIBUTION r--
I
--- -]=------.
G2 Cl

I SWITCH
illl!.I!.Q.!i

L---.I i
I I--
I ACCV~ tSTART I
PARK BRAKE
1 BLK 150

"'ill!
: LOCK"

L___ ~:__ ~~ ___ J

.....

-=
BULB
TEST
:

GQ _

-=
SWITCH
CLOSED WITH
PARK BRAKE
APPLIED
BRAKE WARNING SYSTEM :!!
m
XI
o
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS COMPONENT LOCATION j Page-Figure
• Try the following checks before doing the Brake Pressure Switch. . . . . . . . . . .. Front compartment, left of brake master cylinder
System Check. 201-12-C
1. Check GAGES Fuse by observing the Service Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Behind LH side of IIP . 201- 5-D
Engine Soon Indicator with the Ignition Ignition Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. At base of steering column . 201-1I-D
Switch in RUN and engine off. In-Line Diode Behind IIP, near LH shroud . 201- 6-A
2. If brake fluid is low and the BRAKE Warn- Parking Brake Switch. . . . . . . . . . . .. On parking brake support . 201- 8-C
ing Indicator does not light, check the Brake CWO (34 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. LH side of front bulkhead, right of brake master
Fluid Level Switch. cylinder . 201-1I-A
C201 (8 cavities) LH shroud above center access hole ......•.... 201-16-A
3. If the BRAKE Warning Indicator does not
C305 (4 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Behind dash, near LH shroud . 201- 9-A
light and the Audio Alarm sounds with the
G 101 On LH fender, below headlamp . 201-12-A
Park Brake applied and the Ignition Switch
SW3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Front lights harness, near bulkhead connector .. 201-13-B
in RUN, check the In-Line Diode.
S203. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Main harness, above steering column . 201- 8-A
• Go to System Check for a guide to normal S205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Main harness, above steering column . 201- 8-A
operation.
• Refer to System Diagnosis for diagnostic
tests. (Continued from previous column) SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
With the Ignition BRAKE Warning • Diagnostic steps for the symptoms listed in
SYSTEM CHECK Switch in RUN, Indicator lights and the following table are listed after the table.
• Use the System Check Table as a guide to apply the Park Brake Park Brake warning
normal operation. sounds SYMPTOM TABLE
• Refer to System Diagnosis for a list of symp- Release the Park BRAKE Warning A. BRAKE Warning Indicator remains on
toms and diagnostic steps.
Brake Indicator does not with the Ignition Switch in RUN and the
light and Park Brake . Park Brake OFF
warning does not
SYSTEM CHECK TABLE B. BRAKE Warning Indicator does not light
sound
ACTION
at all
NORMAL RESULT
• Refer to System Diagnosis when a result is C. BRAKE Warning Indicator does not light
With the Park Brake BRAKE Warning
not normal. with the Park Brake applied
released, turn the Indicator lights
Ignition Switch D. BRAKE Warning Indicator does not light
slowly past the RUN with the Ignition Switch in BULB TEST
position
Release the Ignition BRAKE Warning
Switch to the RUN Indicator does not ~
position light I
(Continued in next column) ...a
~

(Continued on next page) ...•

BRAKE WARNING SYSTEM !:
I
~
(Continued from previous page) ••••••
(Continued from previous column) • If the BRAKE Warning Indicator lights,
Action Correct Result For Diagnosis perform tests for Symptoms C and D. N

A: BRAKE WARNING INDICATOR • If the BRAKE Warning Indicator does not

REMAINS ON WITH THE IGNITION BRAKE
Warning light, check/repair the Indicator bulb,
SWITCH IN RUN AND THE PARK Disconnect
Park Brake Indicator does PNKlBLK (39), TANIWHT (33) wires and
BRAKE OFF (TABLE 1) See 1 the Instrument Cluster (Printed Circuit)
Switch not light, Park
Separate: CONNECTOR Connector Brake warning for opens.
At: BRAKEFLUIDLEVELSWITCH does not sound
Conditions:
• Ignition Switch: RUN • If result is correct, replace the Park Brake c. BRAKE WARNING INDICATOR
Switch. DOES NOT LIGHT WITH THE PARK
• Park Brake: OFF
1. Go to Table 3. BRAKE APPLIED
Action Correct Result For Diagnosis
Connect: FUSED JUMPER
Disconnect BRAKE At: PARK BRAKESWITCH CONNECTOR
Brake Fluid Warning A: BRAKE WARNING INDICATOR (Disconnected)
See 1 REMAINS ON WITH THE IGNITION
Level Switch Indicator does Condition:
Connector not light SWITCH IN RUN AND THE PARK • Ignition Switch: RUN
• If result is correct, refer to Section 5 of the
BRAKE OFF (TABLE 3) Connect
Correct Result For Diagnosis
Chassis Service Manual to test the Brake Measure: RESISTANCE Between
Hydraulic System. Replace the Brake At: IGNITIONSWITCH CONNECTOR BRAKE
Fluid Level Switch if the Brake Hydraulic Condition: Warning
Park Brake
System is OK. • Ignition Switch: RUN Indicator
Switch
1. Go to Table 2. Connect lights, Park See 1
Correct Result For Diagnosis Connector &
Between Ground Brake warning
sounds
A: BRAKE WARNING INDICATOR G2 & terminal
Infinite Ohms See 1
REMAINS ON WITH THE IGNITION ground • If BRAKE Warning Indicator lights,
SWITCH IN RUN AND THE PARK • If result is correct, check/repair TANIWHT replace the Park Brake Switch.
BRAKE OFF (TABLE 2) (33) wires and Instrument Cluster (Printed 1. Check/repair TANIWHT (33) and PPL
Circuit) for shorts to ground. (209) wires for an open (see schematic).
Separate: CONNECTOR
At: PARKBRAKESWITCH 1. Replace the Ignition Switch.
Condition:
• Ignition Switch: RUN
B: BRAKE WARNING INDICATOR
(Continued in next column)
DOES NOT LIGHT AT ALL
Remove the Brake Fluid Level Switch Con-
nector and connect a fused jumper from the
center terminal to ground. Turn the Ignition
."
Switch to RUN. m
::IJ
o
BRAKE WARNING SYSTEM
D: BRAKE WARNING INDICATOR
DOES NOT LIGHT WITH THE
IGNITION SWITCH IN BULB TEST
Connect: FUSED JUMPER
At: IGNITION SWITCH CONNECTOR C1
(Connected)
Condition:
• Ignition Switch: RUN
Connect
Correct Result
Between
.";;;
~
o
The Brake Fluid Level Switch closes to light
the BRAKE Warning Indicator when there is
low brake fluid in the hydraulic brake systems.
This could be caused by a leak in one of the
brake lines. The Switch can be reset to an open
condition by refilling the reservoir. This can
only be accomplished after the faulty system
has been repaired .
For Diagnosis

BRAKE
G2 (TAN/
Warning
WHT) & See 1
Indicator
Ground
lights
• If BRAKE Warning Indicator lights, check/
repair the connector terminal. Replace the
Ignition Switch if the connector terminal is
OK.
1. Check/repair TANIWHT (33) wire for an
open (see schematic).

CIRCUIT OPERATION
Battery voltage is applied to the BRAKE
Warning Indicator when the Ignition Switch is in
RUN, BULB TEST, or START. Three switches
are connected to the BRAKE Warning Indicator.
When anyone ofthese Switches closes, ground is
provided and the Indicator lights.
The Ignition Switch provides a ground when it
is in the BULB TEST and START positions. The
BRAKE Warning Indicator lights.
The Park Brake Switch provides a ground
when the Park Brake is applied. The BRAKE
Warning Indicator lights and the Audio Alarm ~
sounds to alert the driver. I
.p..
••••
Co)
." HEATER: C41 (Xl
l>
I
0')
o
'MiliWill HOT AT ALL TIMES
o
r- ~
I
-------. FUSE
I BUiCK FUSIBLE
II FUSE
__ I
I -- LINK A
I ______ .JI
l I 1 RED

BLOWER
SWITCH

5 REO

1 YE~I51 °1·B OR!I52

llTBlU 12

Jl~r-..................~1~Y~E~l
51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .':B3~1t---~2 ~
c BLOWER
RAESISTORS 1 l T BlU
__ _ 3]1
72 -1.--~
S206
5 REO 2
SEE POWER
DISTRIBUTION

[B E41~
.B ORN 52
A 3 REO 2

:~:~I.65~ ................................................ ~I~~1------------3-P: ------------~I~1 :~ ~: ': '"

65
3PPLi65 -

~r~~:"
.8 BLK 150

:::: ~~~.B·B·l·K .............................................. ..I

_ • - WIPERIWASHER
150
3 BlKI150

A4 Cl00

""l~S212 • _ _ - . SEE GROUND

DISTRIBUTION

3 BlK

I 150

~9l!!!
"T1
m
:lJ
o
HEATER: C41 "T1
m
::xJ
o
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS COMPONENT LOCATION Page- Figure
• Try the following checks before doing the Blower Motor Center offront bulkhead 201-11-A
System Check. Blower Resistors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Front compartment, lower RH side of heater-A/C
1. If Blower Motor does not operate at all, check module 201-1l-A
the HTR AlC Fuse. Fuse Block Behind LH side of liP 201- 5-D
2. Check ground G201 by operating the Wiper/ Fusible Link A .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. RH front of engine compartment, at Battery
Washer. Junction Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201-11- B
• Go to System Check for a guide to normal High 8peed Blower Relay. . . . . . . .. On RH side of heater- A/C plenum. . . . . . . . . . . .. 201-11-A
operation. CWO (34 cavities) .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. LH side of front bulkhead, right of'brake master
cylinder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201-11-A
• Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.
G201 Behind center of liP 201- 5-C
SYSTEM CHECK 8106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Heater-A/C harness, center of front bulkhead. .. 201-11-A
8107 Heater-A/C harness, RH side of front bulkhead .. 201-11-A
• Use the System Check Table as a guide to
8206. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Main harness, above LH side ofsteering column. 201-11- D
normal operation.
8212 Main harness, behind center of dash 201- 5-C
• Refer to System Diagnosis for a list of symp-
toms and diagnostic steps.
SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS (Continued from previous column)
SYSTEM CHECK TABLE • Do the tests listed for your symptom in the Blower Motor oper- I Replace the Blower
Symptom Table below. ates with the Blower Switch
ACTION NORMAL RESULT
• Tests follow the Symptom Table.
Switch in OFF and
With the Ignition Blower Motor does the Ignition Switch
Switch in RUN, set not operate in RUN
the Blower Switch to SYMPTOM TABLE
Blower Motor oper- Replace the High
OFF SYMPTOM I FOR DIAGNOSIS
ates in HI with the Speed Blower Relay
Set Blower Blower Motor oper- Blower Motor does C: Blower Motor Ignition Switch OFF
Switch to LO ates at Low speed not operate at all Test
I
8etBlower Blower Motor oper- Blower Motor does D: High Speed
Switch to MED ates faster at Me- not operate in HI but Blower Relay Test
dium speed operates in LO and/
Set Blower Switch to Blower Motor oper- forMED
HI ates at High speed A: Blower Switch
Test
• Refer to System Diagnosis when a result is
not normal.
~
(Continued in next column) I
(Continued on next page) ~
-a
HEATER: C41 ;
I
(Continued from previous page) B: BLOWER RESISTORS TEST C: BLOWER MOTOR TEST ~
Measure: VOLTAGE N
Measure: VOLTAGE
A: BLOWER SWITCH TEST At: BLOWER RESISTORS CONNECTOR At: BLOWER MOTOR CONNECTOR
Measure: VOLTAGE (Disconnected) (Disconnected)
At: BLOWER SWITCH CONNECTOR Conditions: Conditions:
(Connected) • Ignition Switch: RUN • Ignition Switch: RUN
Condition: • Blower Switch: LO • Blower Switch: HI
• Ignition Switch: RUN Measure Correct Measure
For Diagnosis Correct Voltage For Diagnosis
Measure Correct Between Voltage Between
For Diagnosis
Between Voltage
C(YEL)& PPL (65)wire
Battery See 1 Battery See 1
E (BRN) & Ground & Ground
Battery See 1
Ground • Blower Switch: MED PPL (65)wire
• Blower Switch: LO &BLK(150) Battery See 2
A(LT BLU) & wire
Battery See 2
C(YEL)& Ground
Battery See 2 • If all results are correct, replace the Blower
Ground • Blower Switch: HI Motor.
• Blower Switch: MED B(PPL)&
Battery See 3 1. Check PPL (65) wire for an open. If wire is
D (LT BLU) & Ground OK, perform Test A: Blower Switch Test.
Battery See 2
Ground
• If all voltages are correct, replace the 2. Check BLK (150)wire for an open (see sche-
• Blower Switch: HI Blower Resistors. matic).
B(ORN)& 1. Check YEL (51) wire for an open (see
Battery See 2 D: HIGH SPEED BLOWER RELAY TEST
Ground schematic).
(TABLE 1)
• If all results are correct, perform Test B: 2. Check LT BLU (72) wire for an open (see
Blower Resistors Test. schematic). Measure: VOLTAGE
At: HIGH SPEED BLOWER RELAY
1. Check/repair BRN (50) wire for an open 3. Check PPL (65) wire for an open (see sche-
matic). CONNECTOR (Disconnected)
(see schematic).
Conditions:
2. Replace Blower Switch. • Ignition Switch: RUN
• Blower Switch: HI
Measure Correct
For Diagnosis
Between Voltage

E (RED) &
Battery See 1
Ground

."m
(Continued on next page) I~
HEATER: C41 ."m
:a
o
(Continued from previous page) CIRCUIT OPERATION
The Blower Motor delivers air to the interior of
A (ORN) & the vehicle. Its speed is controlled by the Blower
Battery See 2
Ground Switch and the Blower Resistors. When the
A (ORN) & C Ignition Switch is in RUN, battery voltage is
Battery See 3 applied to the Blower Switch. With the Blower
(BLK)
Switch in LO, voltage is applied across both
• If all voltages are correct, go to Table 2.
Blower Resistors and the Blower Motor. The
1. Check RED (2) wire and Fusible Link A for Blower Motor runs at its slowest speed. With the
an open (see schematic). Blower Switch in MED, one of the Blower
2. Check ORN (52) wire for an open. Perform Resistors is bypassed and the Blower Motor runs
Test A: Blower Switch Test if ORN (52) faster. When the Blower Switch is set to HI, the
wire is OK.
High Speed Blower Relay is energized. The relay
3. Check BLK (150) wire for an open (see contacts close and battery voltage is applied
schematic). directly to the Blower Motor. The Blower Motor
runs at its fastest speed.
D: HIGH SPEED BLOWER RELAY TEST
(TABLE 2)
Connect: FUSED JUMPER
At: HIGH SPEED BLOWER RELAY ~
'CONNECTOR (Disconnected)

Jumper
Correct Result For Diagnosis
Between

E (RED) & B Blower Motor

See 1
(PPL) runs
• If the result is correct, replace the High
Speed Blower Relay.
1. Check PPL (65) wire for an open (see
schematic).

00
»
I
~
w
"1J REAR DEFOGGER: C49 co
l>
I
0)
HOT AT ALL TIMES HOT IN RUN, BULB TEST OR START --'
,..~--------' FUSE FOR FIRST OPERATION,
INTERIOR o
r~Eru;J-pWRAcC-1FUSE
1 BLOCK CiiiCiiiT I BLOCK
I
I
GAGES FUSE
10 AMP MANUAL
: BLOCK
I
TIMER CONTACT CLOSES
LIGHTS
DIMMING
1 ----- I FOR 10 MINUTES.
1 DETAILS ~ I I SEE FUSE I
1 - 30AMP -' I t~ __!.L!~!~~~J FOR FURTHER OPERATIONS,
TIMER CONTACT CLOSES
- (BRN)
FOR 5 MINUTES.

.m~"~V
3 ORN/BlK 160
w

I
GRY) .B GRY • 8
.8 PNK/BLK
.C200
(GRY) Y 39

3 ORN/BL: 60 E~
AA if' IDEFOGGER
I 'I' CONTROL

•
i_-~-~-----[ SOLID STATE
TIMER
~

""/W", ~ .""'""' "-n

(wH~T)-K
~
293

~h """
® .. WiCATOR
~rt\
~\V
J
(wHTlI

3 PPL 192
.8 BLK .,50 I I
__ C302
D

B l192

rn
.8 BLK
REAR
DEFOGGER 150

~
'{illI.E

."m
.••. G303 ••. G203 :x:I
-- o
REAR DEFOGGER: C49 ."in
::zJ
o
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS COMPONENT LOCATION Page-Figure
• Try the following checks before doing the Defogger Timer Relay On brake pedal support 201- 5-E
System Check. Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Behind LH side of IfP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201- 5-D
1. Check the GAGES Fuse by leaving the key C200 (16 cavities) LH shroud ahead of center access hole 201- 5-D
in the ignition, opening the driver's door, C302 (1 cavity) Near LH side of rear window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201- 9-A
and observing that the key warning chime G203 On RH steering column support 201- 5-F
sounds. G303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. On RH B pillar
2. Check the PWR ACC Circuit Breaker by
operating the Power Door Locks (if
equipped). SYSTEM CHECK TABLE
3. Check grounds G303 and G203 to make sure FOR DIAGNOSIS
ACTION NORMAL RESULT
they are clean and tight. OF OTHER RESULTS
1. Turn the Ignition Switch to The switch button returns to Do Test A
4. If the symptom only involves the time that
RUN, and depress the the rest position, and the ON
the Rear Defogger operates, replace the Defogger Control Switch Indicator in the center of the
Defogger Timer-Relay.
Defogger Control lights
5. If the problem is panel illumination, see Inte- T
The Defogger grid removes fog Do Test B
rior Lights Dimming, Section 8A -117. ,
from the rear window Do Test C
• Go to System Check for a guide to normal I
The ON Indicator and the Rear Replace the Defogger Timer-
operation. Defogger turn off after approxi- Relay
• Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests. mately 10 minutes
2. Depress the Defogger Con- The ON Indicator and the Rear Replace the Defogger Timer-
SYSTEM CHECK trol Switch again Defogger turn on, and after Relay
• Use the System Check Table as a guide to approximately 5 minutes, they
normal operation. Refer to the diagnosis turnoff
given if other results occur. 3. Depress the Defogger Con- The ON Indicator and the Rear Do Test A
trol Switch, and immedi- Defogger turn on, and then
• Tests follow in System Diagnosis. '
ately press the Defogger turnoff
Control Switch again

• H all results are normal, the system is OK.

~
I
0)
••••
(Continued on next page) l.:a
REAR DEFOGGER: C49 ~
I
en
SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS B: DEFOGGER TIMER-RELAY TEST C: DEFOGGER CONTROL VOLTAGE -'
• Do the tests below when directed by the Sys- Connect: TEST LAMP TEST N

tem Check. At: DEFOGGER TIMER-RELAY CONNECTOR Measure: VOLTAGE

(Connected) At: DEFOGGER CONTROL CONNECTOR
Conditions: (Connected)
A: DEFOGGER TIMER-RELAY INPUT
• Ignition Switch: RUN Conditions:
VOLTAGE TEST • Defogger Control Switch: ON (Hold) • Ignition Switch: RUN
Measure: VOLTAGE • Defogger Control Switch: ON (Hold)
Connect
At: DEFOGGER TIMER-RELAY CONNECTOR Correct Result For Diagnosis
Between Measure Correct
(Connected) For Diagnosis
Between Voltage
Condition: B (LT BLU) &
Lamp lights See 3
• Ignition Switch: RUN Ground A (PNKlBLK)
Battery See 1
Measure Correct D (BLK) & B & Ground
For Diagnosis Lamp lights See 2
Between Voltage (LT BLU) B (LT BLU) &
Battery See 2
A (PPLIWHT) Ground
C (ORNIBLK) Lamp lights See 1
Battery See 1 & Ground C (PPLIWHT)
& Ground Battery See 3
• Defogger Switch: OFF & Ground
E (PNKlBLK)
Battery See 2 D(BLK)&
& Ground B (LT BLU) & Lamp does not o Volts See 2
See 4 Ground
• If all the voltages are correct, go to Test B. Ground light
D (BLK) & B Lamp does not • If all the voltages are correct, and the Rear
1. Check the ORNIBLK (60) wire for an open
See 4 Defogger still does not operate properly,
(see schematic). If the wire is OK, check (LT BLU) light
do Test D.
the PWR ACC Circuit Breaker. A (PPLIWHT) Lamp does not
See 1 1. Check the PNKlBLK (39) wire for an open
2. Check the PNKlBLK (39) wire for an open & Ground light
(see schematic). If the wire is OK, check (see schematic). If the wire is OK, check
• If all the results are correct, do Test D. the GAGES Fuse.
the GAGES Fuse.
1. Replace the Defogger Timer-Relay. 2. Replace the Defogger Control.
2. Check the BLK (150) wire for an open (see 3. Check the PPLIWHT (293) wire for an
schematic). Check that ground G203 is open (see schematic).
clean and tight.
3. Check the LT BLU (292) wire for an open
(see schematic). If the wire is OK, do Test
C.
4. Replace the Defogger Control.

."
m::a
o
REAR DEFOGGER: C49
D: REAR DEFOGGER TEST
With the Ignition Switch in RUN, and the
Defogger Control Switch pressed ON, connect
one lead of a test lamp to ground. From inside
the car at the Rear Window Defogger, lightly
touch the other lead to each grid line, and slowly
move it along the length of the grid. The bril-
liance of the test lamp bulb should increase as
the test lamp is moved from left (passenger's
side) to right (driver's side).
• If the test lamp does not light along anyone
of the grid lines, check PPL/WHT (293) and
PPL (192) wires to the Defogger Timer- Relay
for an open (see schematic). If OK, do Test E.
• If the test lamp bulb shows full brilliance at
both ends of the grid, check the braided wire
for an open to ground (see schematic).
• If the test lamp suddenly lights as it is moved
along the grid, a break in the continuity of the
grid line exists. Refer to the GM Body Service
Manual for grid line repair procedure.
E: DEFOGGER LAMP TEST
Connect: TEST LAMP
At: REAR DEFOGGER CONNECTOR C302
(Connected)
Conditions:
• Ignition Switch: RUN
• Defogger Control Switch: ON
Connect
Correct Result For Diagnosis
Between
C302 (PPL) &
Lamp lights See 1
Ground
(Continued in next column)
""in
~
(Continued from previous column) The timer also shuts off at any time when the
C302 (PPL) & Defogger Control On-Off Switch is depressed
G303 Braided Lamp lights See 2 OFF. In order to reset the Defogger Timer-
Wire Relay for the initial 10 minute time interval, the
Ignition Switch must be turned OFF and then
• If all the results are correct, refer to the
GM Body Service Manual, Section 2, for back to the RUN position before activating the
grid line repair. Rear Defogger.
1. Do Test B.
2. Check the braided wire for an open. Check
that ground G303 is clean and tight (see
schematic).
CIRCUIT OPERATION
With the Ignition Switch in RUN, voltage is
applied to the Defogger Control.
When the Defogger Control Switch is pressed
ON, voltage is then applied to the Defogger
Timer-Relay. The contact closes, which pro-
vides voltage to the ON Indicator and the Rear
Defogger. The rear window will become warm
to remove the fog from the surface of the win-
dow.
The contact in the Defogger Timer-Relay will
stay closed until the Defogger Control Switch is
turned OFF, or until the timer cycle is complete.
The first time the Defogger Control Switch is
pushed in, the Defogger Timer-Relay will allow
the Rear Defogger to operate for approximately
10 minutes. Each time after the Defogger Con-
trol Switch is pushed in, the Defogger Timer-
Relay will reset to operate for approximately 5
minutes. The Defogger Timer-Relay will reset
to 10 minutes when the Ignition Switch is
~
turned OFF and then back to the RUN position.
I
en
~
w
AIR CONDITIONING: SYSTEM CHECK 00
l>
I
en
Overall AIC System Check Complete this procedure with the tem- N

This procedure is an overall check of the Air perature outside the car above 60 of (16°C) and o
Conditioning System. All of the steps can be with the engine running at idle.
performed without the use of tools or without
disassembly. References to other sections of
the manual are given which provide detailed
diagnostic procedures.

Set AlC Controls: Expected Result Refer To:

1. OFF
• Fanisnotrunning BA-63 Blower Controls
Fan Switch at LO
2. Move Temperature Lever rapidly back and forth • Temperature Door hits stop in each direction BA-65 Air Delivery
• .Blower runs at low speed BA-63 Blower Controls
3. HEATER • Warm air flows from floor outlets BA-65 Air Delivery
Temperature Lever at HOT • Slight air flow at windshield and side window
outlets
4. Move Fan Switch from LO to HI • Increased air flow at each step BA-63 Blower Controls
• Warm air flows from windshield and side window
BA-65 Air Delivery
outlets
5. DEF
• Slight air flow at floor outlets
, • Compressor turns on BA-64 Compressor Controls
6. VENT • Air at outside temperature flows from Instrument BA-65 Air Delivery
Temperature Lever at COLD Panel outlets
• Compressor does not run BA-64 Compressor Controls
• Air flows from Instrument Panel and floor outlets BA-65 Air Delivery
with slight air flow at windshield
7. BI-LEVEL
• Compressor turns on BA-64 Compressor Controls
• Engine coolant fan may run BA-31 Coolant Fans
• Air flow becomes cold BA-64 Compressor Controls
• Air flows from Instrument Panel outlets with slight
BA-65 Air Delivery
B. NORMAL air flow at floor
• Compressor continues to run BA-64 Compressor Controls
9. MAX • Blower noise increases as outside air door closes BA-65 Air Delivery
BA-63 Blower Controls
10. OFF • Blower and Compressor turn off
BA-64 Compressor Controls
::!!
m
:IJ
o
AIR CONDITIONING: BLOWER CONTROLS ."in
::a
C60,MANUAL o
TROUBLESHOOTINGHINTS COMPONENTLOCATION Page- Figure
• Try the following checks before doing the AlC Power Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Front compartment, on RH side of heater-A/C
System Diagnosis. module 201-12-B
1. Check the HTR AIC Fuse by visual in- Blower Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Center of front bulkhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201-11-A
spection. Blower Resistors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Front compartment, lower RH side of heater-A/C
module 201-11-A
2. Check that ground G201 is clean and tight.
Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Behind LH side ofI/P 201- 5-D
3. Check that Blower Motor connectors and Fusible Link A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. RH front of engine compartment, at Battery
Blower Relay are mated correctly and firmly Junction Block 201-11-B
seated. High Speed Blower Relay. . . . . . . . .. On RH side of heater-A/C plenum. . . . . . . . . . . .. 201-11.-A
• Go to the AlC System Check in 8A-62 for a CWO (34 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. LH side of front bulkhead, right of brake master
guide to normal operation of the entire AlC cylinder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201-11-A
System. G201 Behind center ofI/P 201- 5-C
• Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests 8106 Heater-A/C harness, center of front bulkhead. .. 201-11-A
of Blower Controls. 8107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Heater- AIC harness, RH side of front bulkhead.. 201-11-A
8206. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Main harness, above LH side of steering column. 201-11-D
SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS 8212. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Main harness, behind center of dash. . . . . . . . . .. 201- 5-C
• Do the tests listed for your symptom in the
Symptom Table below.
(Continued from previous column) A: BLOWERMOTOR TEST
• Tests follow the Symptom Table.
No high speed Do Test B Measure: VOLTAGE
operation Do Test D At: BLOWER MOTOR CONNECTOR
SYMPTOM TABLE (Disconnected)
High speed operation Do Test B
SYMPTOM FOR DIAGNOSIS Conditions:
only Do Test D
Blower runs all the Replace High Speed • Ignition Switch: RUN
time with Ignition Blower Relay None of the above Do Tests A, B, C, D • AlC Mode: VENT
OFF and E • Blower Switch: HI

Blower runs all the Do Test E

time with Ignition in
RUN
Blower will not run Do Test A
in any mode Do Test E
Do Test F
00
No low speed Do Test C l>
operation I
(Continued in next column) 0)
W
(Continued on next page) ...•
AIR CONDITIONING: BLOWER CONTROLS co
l>
C60,MANUAL I

(Continued from previous page) B: HIGH SPEED BLOWER RELAY TEST

(TABLE 2)
(Continued from previous column)
I. If resistances are correct, Blower Resistors
II ~
0')
W

Measure Correct Measure: RESISTANCE are operating normally. If Blower does not
For Diagnosis
Between Voltage At: HIGH SPEED BLOWER RELAY operate in LO, M1 or M2, but does operate
CONNECTOR (Disconnected) in HI, check for an open in the PPL (65)
C1 (PPL) & wire between Blower Resistors Terminal B
Battery See 1 Conditions:
Ground and S107.
• Ignition Switch: OFF
C1 (PPL) & C2 • Negative Battery Terminal: 1. Install new Blower Resistors.
Battery See 2
(BLK) DISCONNECTED
• If the voltages are correct but the blower Measure Correct
does not run, install a new Blower Motor. Between Resistance
For Diagnosis D: BLOWER SWITCH TEST (TABLE 1)
1 Check the PPL (65) wire for an open. If Measure: VOLTAGE
C (BLK) &
wire is good, do Test B and Test D. Ground
o ohms See 1 ,At: BLOWER RESISTORS CONNECTOR
(Disconnected)
2. Check the BLK (150) wire for an open and
B(PPL)& Less than 3 Conditions:
that ground G201 is clean and tight. See 2
Ground ohms • Ignition Switch: RUN
• AlC Mode: VENT
• If voltages in Table 1 and resistances in
• Blower Switch: LO
B: HIGH SPEED BLOWER RELAY TEST Table 2 are correct, but Blower Relay does
(TABLE 1) not operate, replace the Blower Relay. Measure Correct
For Diagnosis
1. Check the BLK (150) wire for an open. Between Voltage
Measure: VOLTAGE
At: HIGH SPEED BLOWER RELAY 2. Check the PPL (65) wire for an open. If A (LT GRN) &
Battery See1&5
CONNECTOR (Disconnected) wire is good, recheck measurements made Ground
Conditions: in Test A. C (TAN) &
• Ignition Switch: RUN Ground
o Volts See 2
• AlC Mode: VENT
• Blower Switch: HI C: BLOWER RESISTORS TEST • Blower Switch: M1
Measure Correct Measure: RESISTANCE C (TAN) &
For Diagnosis Battery See3&5
Between Voltage At: BLOWER RESISTORS (Disconnected) Ground
Condition: D (LT BLU) &
E (RED) &
Battery See 1 • Ignition Switch: OFF Ground
o Volts See 2
Ground Correct
Measure
For Diagnosis • Blower Switch: M2
A (ORN)& Between Resistance
Battery See 2 D (LT BLU) &
Ground Battery See 4 &5
A&C 1.5 ±.5 ohm See 1 Ground
• If voltages are correct, proceed to Table 2.
C&D 0.7±.5 ohm See 1
1. Check RED (2) wire for an open back to
Fusible Link A. D&B 0.2 ± .1 ohm See 1
2. Check ORN (52) wire for an open. If wire is (Continued in next column)
good, do Test D.
."iii
- (Continued on next page) :D
o
AIR CONDITIONING: BLOWER CONTROLS ."m
:Xl
C60,MANUAL o
(Continued from previous page) (Continued from previous column) (Continued from previous column)
• If voltages are correct, Blower Switch is • If all voltages are correct but Blower will not
• If all voltages are correct, go to Table 2. operating normally. Return to Symptom operate in any mode or it runs when AlC
1. Check LT GRN (51) wire for an open. Table. mode is OFF, replace the AlC Power Relay.
2. If battery voltage is present, check for a 1. If voltage is present, check ORN (52) wire 1. Check HTR AlC FUse and BRN (50) wire for
wire to wire short to voltage (see sche- for a wire to wire short to voltage. If wire an open.
matic). If wire is good, replace the Blower is good, replace Blower Switch. 2. Check for an open in the BRN and ORN
Switch. 2. Check ORN (52) wire for an open. If wire is (951) wires. If wires are good, do Test F.
3. Check TAN (63) wire for an open. good, replace Blower Switch. 3. Check for an open in the BLK (150) wire.
4. Check LT BLU (72) wire for an open. 4. Check for an open in the PNK and BLK/
5. If voltage is not present at any of the termi- E: AlC POWER RELAY TEST WHT (922) wires. If wires are good, do
nals A, C, or D, check the PNK and BLKI TestD.
Measure: VOLTAGE
WHT (922) wire for an open between the At: AlC POWER RELAY CONNECTOR
AIC Power Relay Terminal B and the (Disconnected) F: AlC MODE SELECTOR TEST
Blower Switch Terminal E. If wire is good, Conditions:
do Test E. If voltage is missing from only Measure: VOLTAGE
• Ignition Switch: RUN
one or two terminals, replace the Blower At: AlC CONTROL HEAD CONNECTOR
• AlC Mode: VENT
Switch. (Connected)
• Blower Switch: LO, M1 or M2
Conditions:
Measure Correct • Ignition Switch: RUN
For Diagnosis
D: BLOWER SWITCH TEST (TABLE 2) Between Voltage • AlC Mode: OFF
Measure: VOLTAGE E(BRN)& Measure Correct
Battery See 1 For Diagnosis
At: HIGH SPEED BLOWER RELAY Ground Between Voltage
CONNECTOR (Disconnected) A (BRN)&
Battery See 2 N(BRN)&
Conditions: Ground Battery See 1
Ground
• Ignition Switch: RUN
• AlC Mode: VENT
A (BRN) & C B(ORN)&
(BLK)
Battery See 3
Ground
o Volts See 2
• Blower Switch: M2
Measure Correct E (BRN) & B • AlC Mode: All positions except OFF
For Diagnosis Battery See 4
Between Voltage (PNK)
B(ORN)&
(Continued in next column) Battery See 2
A (ORN)& Ground
Ground
o Volts See 1

• Blower Switch: HI
A (ORN)& 00
Battery See 2 l>
Ground
I
(Continued in next column) 0)
W
(Continued on next page) Co)
AIR CONDITIONING: BLOWER CONTROLS
COO, MANUAL
(Continued from previous page)
• If all voltages are correct, AlC Mode Selec-
tor is operating normally. Return to Symp-
tom Table.
1. Check BRN (50) wire for an open back to
HTR AlC Fuse.
2. Replace AlC Control Head.
3. If battery voltage is present at Terminal
N but is not present at Terminal B,
replace the AIC Control Head.
~
I
0')
When the Blower Switch is in the HI position, Co\)
voltage is applied through the ORN (52) wire to
the coil of the High Speed Blower Relay. The
High Speed Blower Relay operates, applying
battery voltage directly to the Blower Motor.
The Motor runs at maximum speed.

CIRCUIT OPERATION
The Blower Motor is a variable speed Motor,
which runs at a speed proportional to the applied
voltage. The higher the voltage applied to the
Motor, the faster the speed.
When the Ignition Switch is in the RUN posi-
tion, battery voltage is applied to the AIC Con-
trol Head through the HTR-A/C Fuse. With the
Mode Selector in the OFF position, no voltage
is supplied to the AIC Power Relay coil and its
contacts remain open. In any other mode the
relay is energized and its contacts close provid-
ing voltage to the Blower Switch.
With the Blower Switch in the LO position,
voltage is applied through all three Blower Re-
sistors to the Blower Motor. The blower runs at
low speed.
As the Blower Switch is moved through posi-
tions Ml and M2, the switch bypasses part of the
Blower Resistors. This allows more voltage to be
applied to the Blower Motor which will increase
its speed.
."
iii
::g
o
-" AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR CONTROLS
eGO, MANUAL

- - - - - - , FUSE o
I BL 0 CK
.!!!.!l..M..
Fuse I
AIR
25"AMP I
______ .J
CONDITIONING:
I BRN
BLOWER
CONTROLS . - - - -...
50
~I BRNN 50

r -----~~--l---------'
I
MOOE SElECTOR
Off
_AlC
DEFROST I CONTROL
I
I MAX IHTR
I HEAO
I--

II ""'-VENT
B-l
I
I
I I
~--------- ---------,
L4"'" ""::1::... ,&V," \
'.8 LT GRNl66
A3}CIOO

"""l·
.8LTG RN 66
o C203
.8 LT GRN 16-6-
r-?Ir:.'-, ~

~
AlC LOW
PRESSURE ~
SWITCH SWITCH
.. - OPENS BELOW .. - OPENS BELOW 1651(Pa (24 PSI)
55 kP. (8P SI) CLOSES ABOVE 330 kPa (48 PSI)

"II!!""'~ __ __ __
~~ ~~
.8 GRY/RED
.8GRY/REO

~~_~"::;;_=--~_""""":;_.

901 1-
901

S530
.8 LT BLU

A3 I
67

CIOO

.8 GRY/REO 901

"'''J-7
[lJ
AlCHIGH
PRESSURE
o ~

CUT·OUT
-... SWITCH
OPENS ABOVE .8 LT BLU 67

I
.8 LT BLU 67
2930 kPa (425 PSI)

'~------~--------~v-~------------------J

.8 LT BLU 67

::!2
m
::D
o
 !!
m
::II
o
CONTINUED
.8 LT BLU 67

V
FR E63'0

• _ _ _ _~.~8LT
••BL.U-----. ~

67 ~t--------=~IAlC
ILJci==-_-,-
.8GRY/ 901 COMPRESSOR
RED CONTROL RELAY

459 (V6 VIN 9)

458 (L4 VIN R)

1 OK GRN 59
Cl (V6 VIN 9)
VIN 9) C2(L4 VIN R)
g (V6
B8 - _____ ,
~
ELECTRONIC

r---1---;;;lING 1
""
. li (L4 VIN R)
2
- - - - -Ale- ON
---
- - - - - - - - - ; - - - Al e
~~ I
~
.. ... II MOO'"

"'''~
RELAY

~
.5
I _., '"''''' I "''' "'''
~
899
II '''''' II " ' " .,"'"
I -=- AlC A/C

[J
_ I "."''''
COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR

:
I fI~
~ ____ _ _______ J DIODE
SEEDETAIL
II ~ AlC CLUTCH
DIODE IS TAPED
L._________
I - - - - - - - - - 1 - ' " " i : i i L 4 VIN R)
01 Ci (V6 VIN 9) INSIDE COMPRESSOR
CONNECTOR
.5

899
1 BLK 150 (V6 VIN 9)
1 BLKIWHT 450
1 BLK 153 (L4 VIN R)

V6VIN9

~ ·l~~~ ~~EOUNO
(V6 VIN 9) 1 BLK 450 DISTRIBUTION 1 BLKl150
(L4 VIN R) 1 BLK/WHT 450 ~ ~

... - ~
AlC HIGH PRESSURE CUT·OUT
. ~ GROUND • 1 BLK
__ _ _,
OPENS A BOVE 2930 kPa (425 PSI)
... Qlli DISTRIBUTION 152 [ ]

...
AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR CONTROLS
C60, MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS
• Try the following check before doing the
System Diagnosis.
Check the HTR AlC Fuse.
• Go to System Check for a guide to normal
operation.
• Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.
SYSTEM CHECK
• Go to AlC System Check in SA-62 for ~ guide
to normal operation of the AlC System.
• Use the System Check Table on next page as a
guide to normal operation.
• Refer to System Diagnosis for a list of symp-
toms and diagnostic steps.
COMPONENT LOCATION
A/C Compressor Clutch .......... .
A/C Compressor Control Relay .... .
A/C Compressor Diode ........... .
A/C High Pressure Cut-Out Switch ..
A/C Low Pressure Switch ......... .
Electronic Control Module (ECM) .. .
Fuse Block. .................... .
High Pressure Switch. . . . . . . . . . . ..
Pressure Cycling Switch...........
CloO (34 cavities) ... . . . . . . . . . . . ..
C203 (15 cavities) ................
G504 (VIN 9) ....................
G504 (VIN R) ...................
S504 ...........................
S512 (VIN 9) ....................
S512 (VIN R) ....................
S530 ...........................
Page-Figure
N
LowerRHfrontofengine ................... 201- 2-A
Engine compartment, LH side of rear bulkhead . 201-10-C
Taped inside compressor clutch connector. . . . .. 201- 2-A
RH front of engine, LH end of AlC compressor .. 201- 4-D
RH front of engine, LH end of A/C compressor.. 201- 2-A
Between seats, on front of rear bulkhead . . . . . .. 201- 7-A
Behind LH side ofIlP ................ . . . . .. 201- 5-D
RH front of engine, LH end of AlC compressor .. 201- 2-A
Front compartment, on accumulator .......... 201-12-B
LH side of front bulkhead, right of brake master
cylinder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201-11-A
Between seats, in front of rear bulkhead ........ 201- 7-A
LH top of engine, below throttle body ....... .. 201- 3-A
Top LH front of engine, above Starter Solenoid .. 201- 2-A
Engine harness, under rear console ............ 201- 7-A
Engine harness, center of rear bulkhead, in
engine compartment ...................... 201- 7-A
Engine harness, under rear console ............ 201- 7-A
Engine harness, RH front of engine ........... 201- 2-A

"iii::a
o
AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR CONTROLS
,.
in
C60, MANUAL ~
SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
L4 VIN R
SYSTEM CHECK TABLE
I • Use the Isolation Tests below to choose the
ACTION NORMALRESULT proper diagnostic test.
1. Turn Ignition Switch to RUN and start engine A click can be heard when the clutch engages
Move Ale Mode Selector to OFF then to MAX ISOLATION TEST (TABLE 1)
2. Move AIC Mode Selector between OFF and Verify that clutch engages in MAX position Measure: VOLTAGE
MAX several times Clutch plate movement can be seen on the front of At: AIC COMPRESSOR CONTROL RELAY
,-
,
the compressor pulley . CONNECTOR (Disconnected)
Conditions:
~ , - If clutch does not engage, go to step 4
, • Ignition Switch: RUN (Engine need not
, - If clutch operates normally, continue to step 3 be running)
3. Put AIC Mode Selector in MAX to engage Engine Coolant Fan runs when Compressor is • AIC Mode: NORM
clutch " engaged
I
• Temperature Outside Car: ABOVE 60°F
J:' .L~~·f.~.~I:f ltLl , .•. Ii I, : ~ "- (1~C)
Air moves freely through condenser
Measure Correct
Feel the suction (cold) and output (warm) pipes of For Diagnosis
l'c. c
Between Voltage
the Compressor
.
! r

r ,',~ ~
r r f 'If If there is not a wide temperature difference after E (BLKlWHT)
- - Battery See 1
-
I the Compressor has run for several seconds, see & Ground
."
(A~),I -'
fL •
I J f;, j Section IB for Refrigerant and Compressor A (LTBLU) &
diagnostics Battery See 2
Ground
4. Turn off Ignition Switch and check refrigerant If pressure.is less than 207 kPa (30 psi), refer to • If both voltages are correct, leave AIC
pressure at the low side service fitting Section IB for refrigerant diagnostics Compressor Control Relay disc~nnected
,- If refrigerant pressure is higher than 207 kPa (30 and go to Table 2.
~ ·'~~L '-"t-
.
",8 ..· .1
-
I~' , . psi), isolate trouble conditions using procedures in
System Diagnosis
1. Check BLK/WHT (922) wire for an open.
2. Do Test C.
• Refer to System Diagnosis when a result is not normal.

~
I
~
(Continued on next page) I Co)
AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR CONTROLS ~
C60,MANUAL I
(Continued from previous page) (Continued from previous column) (Continued from previous column) ~
••
- -

Measure Correct Jumper

ISOLATION TEST (TABLE 2) For Diagnosis Correct Result For Diagnosis
Between Voltage Between
Connect: FUSED JUMPER
C2/24 AIC
At: AIC COMPRESSOR CONTROL RELAY
(GRY/RED) & Battery See 1 Compressor
CONNECTOR (Disconnected) 3 (DKBLU) &
Ground Control Relay See 1
Conditions: Ground
C1I2 (LT BLU) operates and
• Ignition Switch: RUN (Engine not Battery See 2
& Ground clutch engages
running)
• AIC Mode: NORM C2/3 • If the result is correct, but AIC System
• Temperature Outside Car: ABOVE 60°F (DKBLU) & Battery See 3 does not operate normally, condition is due
(16"C) Ground to the ECM. Refer to Section 6E for ECM
diagnostic procedures.
Jumper • If all voltages are correct, go to Table 2.
Correct Result For Diagnosis 1. Replace AIC Compressor Control Relay.
Between
1. Check for an open in the GRY IRED (901)
E (BLKlWHT) wire.
Clutch B: AIC COMPRESSOR CLUTCH TEST
&B(DK See 1 2. Check for an open in the LT BLU (67) wire.
engages
GRN) Measure: VOLTAGE
3. Check for an open in the DK BLU (458)
• If the result is correct, do Test A. wire. If wire is good, replace the AIC At: AIC COMPRESSOR CLUTCH
1. Do Test B. Compressor Control Relay. CONNECTOR (Disconnected)
Conditions:
• Ignition Switch: RUN (Engine not
A: ECM COMPRESSOR CONTROL A: ECM COMPRESSOR CONTROL running)
TEST (TABLE 1) TEST (TABLE 2) • AIC Mode: NORM ,.

Connect: FUSED JUMPER· • AIC Compressor Control Relay:

Measure: VOLTAGE
At: ECM CONNECTOR C2 (Disconnected) DISCONNECTED
At: ECM CONNECTORS C1 8r. C2 ,.
Conditions: • AIC Compressor Control Relay
(Disconnected)
• Ignition Switch: RUN (Engine not Terminals Band E: JUMPERED
Conditions:
• Ignition Switch: RUN (Engine not running) Measure Correct
For Diagnosis
running). • AIC Mode: NORM Between Voltage
• AIC Mode: NORM • Temperature Outside Car: ABOVE 60°F
DKGRN (59)
• Temperature Outside Car: ABOVE 600f (16°C) Battery See 1
& Ground
(16"C) (Continued in next column)
• AIC Compressor Control Relay: DK GRN (59)
Battery See 2
CONNECTED: & BLK (153)
(Continued in next column)

~
m
(Continued on next page) I~
AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR CONTROLS "TI
;;;
C60, MANUAL ~
(Continued from previous page) • If battery voltage is present, refer to (Continued from previous column)
Section IB to check for normal re- Measure Correct
frigerantcharge. If refrigerant charge is For Diagnosis
• If both voltages are correct, but clutch Between Voltage
does not engage when connected, replace normal, replace the AIC Low Pressure
the AIC Compressor Clutch. Switch. Check
E
BLK/WHT
1. Check for open in DK GRN (59) wire. • If battery voltage is not present, go to (BLK/WHT) Battery
(922) wire for
C2. & Ground
2. Check for open in BLK (153) wire to an open
ground. C2. Measure the voltage at terminal A of the Check LT
AIC Compressor Control Relay with a fused BLU (67) wire
jumper connected across the terminals of A (LTBLU)
C: AIC COMPRESSOR FUNCTION Battery for an open
& Ground
CONTROL TEST the AIC High Pressure Cut-Out Switch If wire is good,
connector (disconnected). do Test C
Measure: VOLTAGE
At: AIC CONTROL HEAD CONNECTOR • If battery voltage is present, replace the • If voltages are correct, leave the AIC Com-
(Connected) AIC High Pressure Cut-Out Switch. pressor Control Relay disconnected and go
Conditions: • If battery voltage is not present, check to Table 2.
• Ignition Switch: RUN (Engine need not the wiring between the switches back to
be running) the AIC Control Head (see schematic).
• AIC Mode: NORM
ISOLATION TEST (TABLE 2)
• Temperature Outside Car: ABOVE 60°F Connect: FUSED JUMPER
(16°C)
SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS At: AIC COMPRESSOR CONTROL RELAY
Measure V6 VIN 9 CONNECTOR (Disconnected)
Correct
For Diagnosis Conditions:
Between Voltage • Use the Isolation Tests below to choose the
proper diagnostic tests. • Ignition Switch: RUN (Engine not
N (BRN) & running)
Battery See I
Ground • AIC Mode: NORM
ISOLATION TEST (TABLE 1)
G (LT GRN) & • Temperature Outside Car: ABOVE 60°F
Battery See 2 Measure: VOLTAGE (16°C)
Ground
At: AIC COMPRESSOR CONTROL RELAY
• If both voltages are correct, go to C1. Jumper
CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Correct Result For Diagnosis
Between
1. Check for open HTR AIC Fuse or open Conditions:
BRN (50) wire. • Ignition Switch: RUN (Engine need not E
2. Replace AIC Control Head. be running) (BLK/WHT) Clutch
Do Test B
• AIC Mode: NORM &B(DK engages
C1. Measure the voltage at terminal A of the • Temperature Outside Car: ABOVE 60°F GRN)
AIC Compressor Control Relay with a fused (16°C) • If the result is correct, do Test A.
jumper connected across the terminals of (Continued in next column) ~
the AIC Low Pressure Switch connector I
(disconnected).
~
(Continued on next page) I c.n
AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR CONTROLS ~
l
C60,MANUAL I
(Continued from previous page) A: ECM COMPRESSOR CONTROL B: AIC COMPRESSOR CLUTCH TEST i!
TEST (TABLE 2) Measure: VOLTAGE
en
A: ECM COMPRESSOR CONTROL Connect: FUSED JUMPER At: AIC COMPRESSOR CLUTCH
TEST (TABLE 1) At: ECM CONNECTOR C1 (Connected) CONNECTOR (Disconnected)
Measure: VOLTAGE Conditions: Conditions:
At: ECM CONNECTORS C1 & C2 • Ignition Switch: RUN • Ignition Switch: RUN (Engine not
(Disconnected) • AIC Mode: NORM running)
Conditions: • Temperature Outside Car: ABOVE 60°F • AIC Mode: NORM
• Ignition Switch: RUN (Engine not (16°C) • AIC Compressor Control Relay:
running) Jumper DISCONNECTED
• AIC Mode: NORM
Correct Result I For Diagnosis • AIC Compressor Control Relay
Between
• Temperature Outside Car: ABOVE 60°F Terminals E and B: JUMPERED
(16°C) AIC Measure Correct
Compressor For Diagnosis
• AIC Compressor Control Relay: Between Voltage
CONNECTED Control Relay
ClIC2 (DK
operates and DKGRN &
Measure Correct BLU) & See 1 Battery See 1
For Diagnosis AIC Ground
Between Voltage Ground
Compressor DKGRN
C2/B8 (LT Clutch Battery See 2
&BLK
BLU) & Battery See 1 engages
• If both voltages are correct, but clutch does
Ground • If the result is correct, but AIC System not engage when connected, replace the
ClIC2 (DK does not operate normally, condition is due AIC Compressor Clutch.
BLU) & Battery See 2 to the ECM. Refer to Section 6E for ECM
1. Check for open in DK GRN (59) wire.
Ground diagnostic procedures.
2. Check for open in BLK (150) wire to
• If both voltages are correct, go to Table 2. 1. Replace the AIC Compressor Control
ground. Check that AI C High Pressure
1. Check for open in LT BL U (67) wire. Relay.
Cut-Out Switch is closed. If it is open,
2. Check for an open in the DK BLU (459) replace it.
wire. If wire is good, replace AIC Com-
pressor Control Relay.

"
i::an
o
AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR CONTROLS
C60,MANUAL
• If battery voltage is present, refer to
Section 1B to check for normal re-
C: AIC COMPRESSOR FUNCTION frigerant charge. If refrigerant charge is
CONTROL TEST normal, replace the Pressure Cycling
Measure: VOLTAGE Switch.
At: AIC CONTROL HEAD CONNECTOR
(Connected) CIRCUIT OPERATION
Conditions: The Compressor for the Air Conditioning
• Ignition Switch: RUN (Engine need not System is belt driven by the engine through the
be running) AIC Compressor Clutch. The clutch allows the
• AIC Mode: NORM Compressor to be disengaged when air condi-
• Temperature Outside Car: ABOVE 60°F
tioning is not required, and also allows the air
(16°C)
conditioning load to be removed from the
Measure Correct
For Diagnosis engine when needed.
Between Voltage
Operation of the Compressor depends on the
N(BRN)& particular mode selected by the driver. When the
Battery See 1
Ground AIC Mode Selector is in MAX, NORM, BI-
G (LT GRN) & LEVEL, or DEF, battery voltage is applied
Battery See 2
Ground through the HTR AIC Fuse and AIC Control
• If both voltages are correct, go to Cl. Head Selector to the AIC Compressor Control
Relay.
1. Check for open HTR AIC Fuse or open
BRN (50) wire. L4 VIN R
2. Replace AIC Control Head. For vehicles equipped with the L4 VIN R
engine, the path to the AIC Compressor Control
Relay is through the AIC Low Pressure Switch
Cl. Measure the voltage at terminal A of the
and the AIC High Pressure Cut-Out Switch,
AIC Compressor Control Relay with a fused
which are both normally closed. The AIC Low
jumper connected across the terminals of
Pressure Switch opens if the refrigerant charge
the Pressure Cycling Switch connector
is too low to operate the AIC Compressor with-
(disconnected).
out possible damage to it. The AIC High Pres-
• If battery voltage is not present with the sure Cut-Out Switch opens when refrigerant
jumper connected, check the wiring be- pressure is too high for normal operation.
tween the switches back to the AIC Con-
The AIC Compressor Control Relay is oper-
trol Head (see schematic).
ated by the ECM. When the ECM receives the
AIC On signal at terminal 2, it grounds terminal
3, energizing the Relay. When the Relay is
energized, voltage is applied to the AIC Com-
."m
:IJ
o
pressor Clutch through the contact of the relay.
If the ECM determines that engine load should
be reduced, such as during full throttle, the AIC
Compressor Control Relay is de-energized. This
removes voltage from the AIC Compressor and
removes the AIC load from the engine.
V6VIN9
The voltage path from the AIC Control Head is
through the Pressure Cycling Switch to the coil
of the AIC Compressor Control Relay. Voltage is
also applied to terminal B8 of the Electronic
Control Module (ECM). When the ECM receives
the voltage input at terminal B8, it will ground
terminal C2 to energize the AIC Compressor
Control Relay. The Pressure Cycling Switch
opens when the refrigerant pressure is less than
165 kPa (24 psi). It closes again when the pres-
sure rises enough to indicate that additional
cooling is required. This operation causes the
Compressor to cycle on and off so that the
evaporator temperature does not drop low
enough to cause icing.
When the AIC Compressor Control Relay op-
erates, it applies voltage from the AIC Power
Relay through its contacts to the AIC Com-
pressor Clutch. The ECM will remove the
ground at terminal C2 to de-energize the AIC
Compressor Control Relay when the air condi-
tioning load should be removed from the engine,
such as during wide open throttle.
The AIC Compressor Clutch is grounded
through the normally closed AIC High Pressure
Cut-Out Switch which opens if refrigerant pres-
sure rises too high. ~
I
~
....,
~'
" AIR CONDITIONING: AIR DELIVERY 00
»
C60, MANUAL I
FUSE
en
U1
I BLOCK
BLOWER
CONTROLS
.----IIi-;
1 BRN
50
25AMP I
______ .J
I o

50

··-----------.. -·.-'---~l-·----·-··-------------------
__________________ ------------------------------------------------------_r.
-----_________________________ I AIC
CONTROL

!!!AQ.

L-----·--,--,--,--,~~~-·-~r~~~----~:~r'--·--,--,--·--·--·--·--.1-·--·--·--·--··-··-··-··-·.-------------~,--
o ____ ,_~--,--.--.------J
,
,,,
.B YEL 952
.8 GRY 953
,
.MQ!!i. ,,, r------..;;..r---~r---__. RECIRCULATING
ODOR ACTUATOR
!!!!!!!!. ,
ACTUATOR
,,,
,
,,,
,
,,,

•
DEFROST Ale
.,
r
.8 BLK
,
,,
8212
.8 BLK
A

...1
OUTLET OUTLET I 150
,
I
PARTIALLY OPEN

I
I
I
BY DESIGN 3BLK

=
150

~
•
OUTSIDE
I
I ....,.nT'J---------:::::=:::::::::-----j, AIR INLET
:-..
I, ,
I
"I.'
iI ",
.. EVAPORATOR
CORE I
I
I
I
,

IN·CAR
AIR
!iilli
~ BYDESIGN INLET
DOOR RECIRCULATING
ODOR
AIR CONDITIONING: AIR DELIVERY ."m
::I:J
C60, MANUAL o
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS COMPONENT LOCATION Page-Figure
• Try the following checks before doing the Fuse Block Behind LH side of liP 201- 5-D
System Check. Mode Door Actuator . . . . . . . .. Rear of heater- A/C module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201- 6-C
1. If either of the door actuators works when Recirculating Door Actuator. . . . . .. Rear of heater-A/C module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201- 6-C
first operated, but slows down or stops after G201 Behind center of liP 201- 5-C
a few operations, check the actuator and S212 Main harness, behind center of dash 201- 5-C
linkage for binding.
2. If actuator operation can be heard, but air
delivery is not correct, check actuator (Continued from previous column) SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
I I I I
linkage. NORM A A A Fresh Air • Do the tests listed for your symptom in the
• Go to System Check SA-62 for a guide to from Instru- Symptom Table below.
normal operation of the entire AlC System. ment Panel
• Tests follow the Symptom Table.
• Go to. System Check for a guide to normal
Outlets and
Floor
operation of the AIC Air Delivery. SYMPTOM TABLE
BI-LEV A B A Fresh Air
• Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests. SYMPTOM DO TEST
from Instru-
ment Panel, Air delivery does not Test A
SYSTEM CHECK Floor and switch from
• Use the System Check Table as a guide to Windshield recirculate to outside
normal operation of the AlC Air Delivery. Outlets to recirculate when
VENT A A A Fresh Air Mode pushbuttons
• Refer to System Diagnosis for a list of symp-
are set for MAX,
toms and diagnostic steps. from Instru-
ment Panel then NORM, then
Outlets and MAX
SYSTEM CHECK TABLE
Floor Air delivery does not Test B
Out- switch from AlC
Heat! side/ HTR A C A Fresh Air
from Floor Outlets to AlC and
Mode De- Mode Recir-
Air Flow
and bypass to Heat Outlets to Heat
Selector frost Door culat-
Windshield Outlets to Defrost
Door ing
Outlets as Mode
Door DEF B C A Fresh Air pushbuttons are set
OFF A C A No Blower from Wind- for VENT, B/L,
operation shield and by- HTR, and
MAX A A B Recirculated pass to Floor DEFROST
Air from In-
• Refer to System Diagnosis when a result is ~
strument
not normal. I
Panel Outlets
and Floor 0)
UI
(Continued in next column) (Continued on next page) I..:..
AIR CONDITIONING: AIR DELIVERY ~
C60, MANUAL I
(Continued from previous page) TEST B: MODE DOOR (Continued from previous column) m
N
ACTUATOR TEST • If all results are correct but the Mode Door
TEST A: RECIRCULATING DOOR Actuator does not operate, replace the
Connect: TEST LAMP
ACTUATOR TEST Actuator.
At: MODE DOOR ACTUATOR HARNESS
Connect: TEST LAMP CONNECTOR (Disconnected) • If none of the results are correct or the Test
At: RECIRCULATING DOOR ACTUATOR Conditions: Lamp lights only dimly in all checks, check
HARNESS CONNECTOR (Disconnected) • Ignition Switch: RUN Thermistor RTI for high resistance. If
Conditions: • AlC Mode: DEFROST Thermistor is good, check Mode push but-
• Ignition Switch: RUN Connect Correct
tons for poor contacts.
For
• AlC Mode: MAX Between Result Diagnosis 1. Check TAN (363) wire for an open. If wire
Connect Correct For is good, check Mode pushbutton.
Between Result Diagnosis B (TAN) & Test Lamp
See 1 2. Check BLK (150) wire for an open.
Ground lights
B(YEL)& Test Lamp 3. Check RED (362) wire for an open. If wire
See 1 B (TAN) & Test Lamp
Ground lights See 2 is good, check Mode pushbutton.
A (BLK) lights
B(YEL)& Test Lamp 4. Check PPL (361) wire for an open. If wire
See 2 • AlC Mode: OFF is good, check Mode pushbutton.
A (BLK) lights
F (RED) & Test Lamp 5. Check LT BLU (955) wire for an open. If
• AlC Mode: NORM See 3
A (BLK) lights wire is good, check Mode pushbutton.
C(GRY)& Test Lamp
See 3 • AlC Mode: HTR
A (BLK) lights
F(RED) & Test Lamp CIRCUIT OPERATION
• If all results are normal but actuator does See 3
A (BLK) lights
not operate, replace the Recirculating Door The Air Conditioning System uses four doors
Actuator. • AlC Mode: B/L to distribute air throughout the car and to con-
• If none of the results are correct or the Test D(PPL)& Test Lamp trol its temperature. The air distribution doors
See 4
Lamp lights only dimly in all tests, check A (BLK) lights are operated by two electric actuators controlled
Thermistor RT2 for high resistance. If • AlC Mode: MAX by the Mode Switch. The Temperature Door is
Thermistor is good, check Mode pushbut- cable operated by the Temperature Lever.
C (LT BLU) & Test Lamp
tons for poor contacts. See 5
A (BLK) lights The Mode Door has three positions, routing air
1. Check YEL (952) wire for an open. If wire
• AlC Mode: NORM to the floor and Defrost vents, the Instrument
is good, check Mode pushbutton.
Panel vents, or a mixture of both. This door is
2. Check BLK (150) for an open. C (LT BLU) & Test Lamp
See 5 arranged to provide a slight air bypass when in
A (BLK) lights
3. Check GRY (953) wire for an open. Ifwire either closed position.
is good, check Mode pushbutton. • AlC Mode: VENT
C (LT BLU) & Test Lamp
See 5
A (BLK) lights
(Continued in next column)
."m
::a
o
AIR CONDITIONING: AIR DELIVERY
C60, MANUAL
The Heat/Defrost Door routes to either the
Heat Vent or the Defrost Vent with a slight air
bypass in either position. An electric actuator
operates both the Mode and HeatlDefrost Doors
as controlled by the Ale Mode Switch.
The actuator consists of a non-reversing elec-
tric motor, a mechanical drive train and a rotat-
ing contact assembly which can break the motor
circuit in any of four positions. When any of the
Mode Switch buttons is pushed the motor is en-
ergized through the contact assembly. The motor
will then run until the contact assembly opens
the motor circuit and the motor stops at the se-
lected position. The actuator motion is trans-
ferred to the Mode Door and Heat/Defrost Door
by two spring loaded telescopic links.
The Outside/Recirculating Door has two posi-
tions, allowing either outside air or recirculated
air with a portion of outside air into the blower.
An electric actuator similar to the Mode Door
Actuator, but with only two positions, operates
this door.
The Mode Switch contains the contacts re-
quired to select each of the seven modes.

CAl
" WARNINGS AND ALARMS: CHIME 00
»
I
-...J
-...J
HOT AT ALL TIMES HOT IN RUN, BULB TEST OR START
- - - - - - - - -... FUSE o
GAGES FUSE IBLOCK
10 AMP I

BLOCK DETAILS
SEE FUSE I
_.!:?:.~!;,e!!;~.J

r-~~~~-"-"-"--~-"'-''-''-''-''''lIGHT
SWITCH

.B ORN 140 1 PNK/ BLK 39

.B BRN SEE LIGHT

SWITCH DETAILS

r-~=:":':':'=~'-''-''-''-'-'''''''~~ PAN El . I NTE RI 0 R

LIGHTS CONTROL

.B BRN

.B ORN SEE FUSE

5204 • _ _ _ _ FUSE
.~~~ BLOCK
111.~

S203
o BLOCK DETAILS
140 DETAILS

Eg
REMOTE
.B OK GRN/WHT C iiiMMER
(B (TRANSISTOR)
944 B E

.B OK GRN 44
.B DRN 140 .B PNK / BLK 39

r--
I
-iNiii.PsFUSe-i FUSE
SAMP I BLOCK
I
II...
I
L.... SEE LIGKT
~ SWITCH DETAILS I
--r---------
I
.B GRY B
SEE INSTRUMENT
~ . - -. . . PANEl / CONSOLE .B ORN EXTERIOR

,__ ____________________________
I
~~~R_BYl~---------~~~~---- _____________ L __~_____~:~:______ ________~:~~:~~____, I AUDIO I
I LlGHTS.ON INPUT POWER INPUT IGNITION INPUT ALARM I
I MODULE I
~
II SOLID STATE II m
L__________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 00 NOT MEASURE
~~~~~~_J
::0
o
 "T1
iii
::D
CONVENIENCE
o
CENTER
j--------------------_._-----------------------_.__ .----------------------------------------------------------===----,
• AUDIO
I CHIME ALARM: FAST PULSED CHIME. PARKING BRAIIE WARNING Ai:AilM I.•
'. FAST PULSED CHIME. LIGHTS ON M-OD.U
.LE I
FAST CHIME, KEY WARNING ___ ,
, SLOW CHIME. SEATBEl T WARNING SOLID STATE •
, DO NOT ,
Il________ ________________ ________________ ________________________________ _________ . .
KEY IN IGNITION INPUT FASTEN BElTS INPUT PARKING BRAKE INPUT FASTEN BelTS OUTPUT GROUND MEASURE,
' 6 4 5 ~ , ..t________.;...___
3 RESISTANCE .J,
_ __________

.5 TAN/WHT 33
.5LTGRN 80
.5 BLK . 238
.5 YEL 237

IN·lINE DIODE

.5 TANIWHT
F C210
C .... ---------------:~ C201 33

·":I~~----------~.:J':"
.5 TAN/WHT 33
LTGRN 80
8 ~

.....- L - IGNITION
KEY WARNING B ~-
BRAKE
WARNING
:
... - - - - - - - - - - - . , INSTRUMENT

: ~
l~:~
BelTS I PRINTED .8 BLK 150
SWITCH

t
FOR C201 TERMINAL SYSTEM, : INDICATOR: CIRCUIT
CLOSEO WITH
VIEW, SEE BODY TRUNK
I INSTRUMt.NT. :

L____·~:~4_J
KEY IN IGNITION RELEASE
CONNECTOR PAGE
.8 BLKIWHT 238
TAN 159 202·3
.8 PPL 209
11 9.
E C210
B .5 BLK 150
SEATBElT
.5 TAN 159
SWITCH

F Q!!l
[]
... -
OPEN WITH
LH FRONT SEATBEl T
A l BUCKLED
.8 BLK 150 SEE GROUNO
DISTRIBUTION
~
..____
-------.--------~
J ;liill.

.8 TAN 159
~·--I
.8 BLKl150

Dl
c305
1
:8 BLK 150 SEE 3 BLK 150
.llil.-~ GROUND
.8 BLK 1150 DISTRIBUTION
H C201 ~ ~

[!£] I JI
LHFRONTDOOR
.8 BLK 11"50

~
JAMB SWITCH PARKING BRAKE
S212. _ _ _ 00
_--=- -- - _-= CLOSED WITH
DOOR OPEN
3-;;;:;-115~_
~
CLOSED WITH »
I
"'ill!.
- PARKING BRAKE
~201 _ APPlIEO ......
......
 00
WARNINGS AND ALARMS: CHIME >
I
COMPONENT LOCATION Page-Figure l:j
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS
Convenience Center . Behind RH side of liP 201-14-B N
• Try the following checks before doing the Fuse Block . Behind LH side of liP 201- 5-D
System Check. Ignition Key Warning Switch . In upper portion of steering column . . . . . . . . . .. 201-11-C
1. Check the STOP HAZ Fuse by operating the In-Line Diode . Behind liP, near LH shroud 201- 6-A
Hazard Flashers. Parking Brake Switch . On parking brake support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201- 8-C
2. Check the GAGES Fuse by observing the De- Remote Dimmer . Below center of liP, near steering column support
fogger Indicator. ....................................... 201- 6-E
3. Check the TAIL Fuse by putting Light Seatbelt Switch . BehindLH seat 201- 9-A
Switch in PARK and observing Tail Lights. C201 (8 cavities) . LH shroud above center access hole 201-16-A
4. Check that ground G201 is clean and tight. C210 (11 cavities) . Lower RH side of steering column . . . . . . . . . . .. 201- 6-D
5. Check the INST LP Fuse by observing In- C305 (4 cavities) . Behind dash, near LH shroud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201- 9-A
strument Cluster illumination. G201 . Behind center of liP 201- 5-C
S203 . Main harness, above steering column 201- 8-A
6. If the Fasten Belts Chime Reminder and
S204 . Main harness, to right ofsteering column 201- 8-A
Indicator operate continuously, replace the
S209 . Main harness, right of steering column. . . . . . . .. 201- 5-C
Audio Alarm Module.
S211 . Main harness, behind RH side of liP 201- 5-C
• Go to System Check for a guide to normal S212 . Main harness, behind center of dash. . . . . . . . . .. 201- 5-C
operation. S311 . Crosscar harness, LH side of liP 201-16-A
• Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests. S313 . Body harness, under LH front seat 201- 9-A

SYSTEM CHECK
(Continued from previous column) (Continued from previous column)
• Use the System Check Table as a guide to
normal operation. Do not buckle the The chime stops and With the Ignition The fast chime
seatbelt the indicator goes Switch in ACCY, alarm sounds (faster
out after 4 to 8 LOCK, or OFF, and than the seatbelt
SYSTEM CHECK TABLE
seconds the key still in the chime)
ACTION NORMALRESULT ignition, open the
Repeat above, but No chime sounds
Sit in the driver's A slow chime alarm buckle seatbelt LH Front Door
seat and close the sounds The Fasten Belts
Remove the key The alarm stops
driver's door Indicator lights for 4
from the ignition
to8 seconds
Turn the Ignition The Fasten Belts (Continued on next page)
Switch to RUN Indicator lights in (Continued in next column)
the Instrument
Cluster
(Continued in next column)
."m
;g
o
 ."
WARNINGS AND ALARMS: CHIME m
XI
o
(Continued from previous page) (Continued from previous column) (Continued from previous column)
With the key
removed from the
The fast chime The Fasten Belts
Chime Reminder
C: Fasten Belts
Input Test
7 (ORN) & 3 I Test Lamp -, See 2
alarm sounds (faster (BLK) lights
ignition, turn the than the key chime) operates when
• If results are correct and none of the
Light Switch to seatbelt is buckled chime functions were working, replace the
PARK The Fasten Belts D: Fasten Belts Audio Alarm Module.
Turn the Light The alarm stops Indicator does not Indicator Test 1. Check the ORN (140) wire for an open.
Switch OFF operate, but the
2. Check the BLK (150) wire for an open.
With the Ignition The fast chime Fasten Belts Chime
Switch in RUN, alarm sounds Reminder operates
depress the Parking The Fasten Belts D: Fasten Belts B: KEY IN IGNiTION INPUT TEST
Brake Indicator is always Indicator Test Connect: SELF-POWERED TEST LAMP
Release the Parking The alarm stops on, but the chime At: CONVENIENCE CENTER
Brake operates properly Conditions:
• Audio Alarm Module: REMOVED
• Refer to System Diagnosis when a result is , • Ignition Switch (Key In): ACCY, LOCK,
Only the Lights-On E: Lights-On Input
not normal. Chime Reminder or OFF
Test
• LH Front Door: OPEN
does not operate
SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS Only the Lights-On
Connect
E: Lights-On Input Correct Result For Diagnosis
• Do the tests listed for your symptom in the Between
Chime Reminder Test
Symptom Table below. operates when it 6 (LTGRN) & Test Lamp
See 1
• Tests follow the Symptom Table. should not Ground lights
Only the Parking F: Parking Brake • Ignition Switch (Key In): ACCY,
SYMPTOM TABLE Brake Warning does Input Test· LOCK or OFF
SYMPTOM DO TEST
not operate • LH Front Door: CLOSED
Only the Parking F: Parking Brake 6 (LTGRN) & Test Lamp
None of the chime A: Audio Alarm Brake Warning Input Test See 2
Ground does not light
alarms operate Module Test operates when it
Only the Key In B: Key In Ignition should not
• Ignition Switch: KEY OUT
Ignition Warning Input Test
• LH Front Door: OPEN
does not operate A: AUDIO ALARM MODULE TEST 6 (LTGRN) & Test Lamp
See 3
Connect: TEST LAMP Ground does not light
The Key In Ignition B: Key In Ignition
Warning operates Input Test At: CONVENIENCE CENTER • If all the test lamp results are correct, re-
when it should not Condition: place the Audio Alarm Module.
• Audio Alarm Module: REMOVED 1. Make certain LH Front Door Jamb Switch
The Fasten Belts C: Fasten Belts
Connect is properly grounded. Check LT GRN (80) co
Chime Reminder Input Test
Between
Correct Result For Diagnosis
and TAN (159) wires for an open. If wires
»
does not operate I
are OK, check that switches are closed. If a
7 (ORN) & Test Lamp •••••
See 1 switch is open, replace it. •••••
Ground lights
(Continued in next column) (Continued in next column) (Continued on next page) Co)
WARNINGS AND ALARMS: CHIME ~
I
•••••
(Continued from previous page) D: FASTEN BELTS INDICATOR TEST (Continued from previous column) •••••
2. Check LT GRN (80) and TAN (159) wires Connect: FUSED JUMPER • Light Switch: PARK or HEAD .a::.
for a short to ground. If wires are OK, At: CONVENIENCE CENTER
8 (GRY) & ~pproximatelYI See 1
check that LH Front Door Jamb Switch is Condition: Ground 10 volts
open. If closed, replace it. • Audio Alarm Module: REMOVED
• If both the voltages are correct, replace
3. Check that Ignition Key Warning Switch is Connect Correct
For Diagnosis the Audio Alarm Module.
open. If closed, replace it. Between Result
1. Check/repair the GRY (8) wire.
Fasten Belts
C: FASTEN BELTS INPUT TEST 7 (ORN) &
Indicator See 1 F: PARKING BRAKE INPUT TEST
2 (YEL)
Connect: TEST LAMP lights
Connect: SELF-POWERED TEST LAMP
At: CONVENIENCE CENTER
At: CONVENIENCE CENTER
Conditions: Fasten Belts
Remove Conditions:
• Audio Alarm Module: REMOVED Indicator does See 2
Jumper • Audio Alarm Module: REMOVED
• Ignition Switch: RUN not light • Parking Brake: APPLIED
• LH Front Seatbelt: UNBUCKLED
• If the indicator response was correct, Connect Correct
Connect Correct For Diagnosis
For Diagnosis replace the Audio Alarm Module. Between Result
Between Result
1. Check/repair the bulb, the YEL (237) wire, 5 (TAN/WHT) Test Lamp
(PNKlBLK)& Test Lamp See 1
See 1 the BLK (150) wire, and the Instrument & Ground lights
Ground lights
Cluster Printed Circuit for opens.
1 (PNKlBLK& Test Lamp • Parking Brake: RELEASED
See 2 2. Check the Instrument Cluster Printed Cir-
4 (BLK) lights 5 (TAN/WHT) Test Lamp
cuit for a short to Battery. See 2
& Ground does not light
• LH Front Seatbelt: BUCKLED
h (PNKlBLK) & Test Lamp E: LIGHTS-ON INPUT TEST
• If both results are correct, replace the
See 3 Audio Alarm Module.
4 (BLK) does not light
Measure: VOLTAGE 1. Check the Parking Brake Switch, PPL
• If all the results are correct, replace the At: CONVENIENCE CENTER (209) wire, and TAN/WHT (33) wire for an
Audio Alarm Module. Conditions: open (see schematic).
1. Check the PNKJBLK (39) wire for an open. • Audio Alarm Module: REMOVED
2. Check Parking Brake Switch and In-Line
2. Check for an open Seatbelt Switch or an • Ignition Switch: RUN
• Light Switch: OFF Diode for shorts. Check PPL (209) and
open in the BLK or BLKlWHT (238) wires
or the BLK (150) wires (see schematic). TAN/WHT (33) wires for shorts to
Measure Correct ground.
For Diagnosis
3. Check that the Seatbelt Switch is open, or Between Voltage
for a short to ground in the BLK (238) wire
8 (GRY)&
(see schematic).
Ground
o volts See 1

(Continued in next column)

on
m
:lJ
(Continued on next page) o
 WARNINGS AND ALARMS: CHIME ."
iii
:lJ
o

CIRCUIT OPERATION The Lights-On Warning sounds when voltage

The Audio Alarm System calls attention to is present at the Lights-On Input, and not pre-
several conditions by sounding a built-in chime. sent at the Ignition Switch Input. If either of
These conditions are: 1) the LH front seatbelt is these changes (lights OFF or ignition ON), the
not buckled; 2) the key is in the ignition and the fast pulsed Lights-On chime will stop.
LH front door is open, 3) the lights are on and The Parking Brake Warning sounds when the
the Ignition Switch is not in RUN, BULB Parking Brake is applied, and the Ignition
TEST or START and 4) the Parking Brake is Switch is in RUN. Once the brake is released,
applied and the Ignition Switch is in RUN, the chime will stop.
BULB TEST or START.
Battery voltage to operate the module is sup-
plied at all times to the Ignition Input at termi-
nal 7. Voltage is also applied to two other
inputs. One of these, at terminal 8, receives
voltage from the Instrument Panel Lights
whenever the Headlights or Park Lights are on.
The other, at terminal 1, receives voltage in
RUN. BULB TEST. or START.
To sound the Seatbelt Warning, two inputs to
the module must be present: 1) battery voltage
at the Ignition Input, and 2) a ground at the
Fasten Belts Input. This occurs when the Seat-
belt Switch is closed and because the LH front
seatbelt is not buckled. While the slow chime
sounds, the module also supplies steady bat-
tery voltage to the Fasten Belts Output to light
the Fasten Belts Indicator.
To sound the Key In Ignition Warning, both
the Ignition Key Warning Switch and the LH
Front Door Jamb Switch must be closed. This
condition grounds terminal 6 of the Audio co
Alarm Module. These switches are closed when »
the LH front door is open and the key is in the I
.....
ignition. .....
"b INSTRUMENT PANEL: INDICATORS CLUSTER co
l>
INDICATORS, GAGES MiP TACHOMETER I
HOT IN RUN , BULB TEST OR START 00
po ---------, FUSE o
: GAGES FUSE • MK
I llAM' :-- o
I SEE FUSE I
L_ __!L.22.!~!'~J

1 PNK/81K 39

SEE FUSE
~ e~~--+ BLOCK OETAILS

.8 PNK/BLK 39

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

·-Hooonfti.
DOOR
iKi---------'-------------------·-----------------'----'-- ---------------------'-----':_--------------'---------. PRINTED CIRCUIT
OIL PRESSURE
INDICATOR

n' '
COOLANT TACHOMETER
"AJAIr "BRAKE"
INDICATOR TEMPERATURE
ill! G) UPSHIFT
INDICATOR
-

,..,"'' "
~
t.)
SOLID STATE
I _

~____ Jl__: _______ ___________~_~__________________ :::_~~_________

11.--- ---------------
4 ---------- ----- 11
g",,,,,, .~:----~~:,~:: ~ ---------" ---------------:::::~;:;TI ---------
: :-----------" -------------- --,-~I:
----~

.35 BLK 150

L4 VIN R
~--
C3 ~ V6~ VI'!, 9
__----~A~----------~ .5 BLK 150
I B
1 PNK
C502
30
SEE GROUND
DISTRIBUTION
MULTI·PORT
FUEL
UNIT TANK I r 1;;.------'I fUEL
BRAKE RESISTANCE : I GAGE I

IJ .5 LTGRN 135
FUEL INJECTION,
ELECTRONIC
FUEL INJECTION
WARNING
SYSTEM
.5 OK GRN 35 90 OHMS AT FULL I
oOHMS AT EMPTY L___
SENDER
.! ______ J
I

Il~5:02
TACHOMETER
gge _ _
1 BL:
.5 LT GRN
.581K ~
3 BLK 150 !ill..~-------.
150

,
S213
3 BLK

.-
1
SENDER RESISTANCE: ~ 3 BLK 150 ,~SEEGRoUND
1365 OHMS AT 180' F (38' C) CLOSED ABOVE 1125' &)257' F TEMPERATURE DISTRIBUTION ."
55 OHMS AT 268' F (121' C) _ OPEN BELOW (1111' C) 2311' F SEN OER/ in
~~---------------.----~~------------~SWITCH :l:I
o
"b INSTRUMENT PANEL: INDICATORS CLUSTER
INDICATORS
HOT IN RUN, BULB TEST OR START

,
,,,
r' - - - - - - - - - , FUSE
GAGES FUSE : BLOCK
10AMP ,---
, SEE FUSE
__ !!-.!!':!!:!~~J
,

1 PNK/BLK 39

Sl03 ._IEOII~~ SEE FUSE

- BLOCK DETAILS
WARNINGS AND ALARMS HEADLIGHTS LIGHTS: LH TURN LIGHTS: RH TURN

,8 OK
.8LT8LU 14 INTERIOR LIGHTS DIMMING

.5 BLK 150 MULTI·PORT

FUEL .5 BLK 150
INJECTION,
ELECTRONIC
.35 BLK 150
FUEL INJECTION

3BLK 150

00
»
I
00
o
...
." INSTRUMENT PANEL: INDICATORS CLUSTER ex)
»
HOOD/TRUNK/DOOR AJAR INDICATOR I
00
HOT AT ALL TIMES HOT IN RUN , BULB TEST OR START
o
,..- - - - - - - , FUSE - - - - - - ... - - , FUSE
I
I ~ : BLOCK GAGES FUSE : BLOCK
I FUSE I 10 AMP I
I
I Z'ii"AMP : SEE FUSE I
l_ _ _____ .J __ .!!2E.~D!~~~

1 PNK/BLK 39

S203 ~~~ SEE FUSE BLOCK

lORN/ OK BLU 340 DETAILS
.8 PNK/ BLK139

9 g
SEE FUSE
BLOCK DETAILS
+~~.SI25 r-T-..-coiiiANT--. INSTRUMENT
~ TEMPERATURE I CLUSTER
I
I
I
I
G) GAGE
HDOD/TRUNK/
I
I
PiiiNTEii"
I CIRCUIT
lORN/ OK BLuj 340 I DOOR "AJAR" I

L_I~~D~C~~O~_J
. .,,1--
H9 C500

0 -
.35 OK GRN
10 C2

146
ff\!!!.!lli!
~hill!!I

.BWHT TI
F8ll C500
156

.. .8 OK GRN

-----------------.~~~~~~~~~~~=-~
146 gji, 158
.5 BLK/PNK

.8 BLK/DRN 158

'"""":I:--' .8 OK
GRN 146
.35 OK GRN 146

.8 WHT 156
B A
03 ClOO
~
AJAR
SWITCH
CLOSED WITH
.8 OK GRN 146 SEE GROUND
HOOD OPEN
~ DISTRIBUTION
.8 BL~1150 I .8 BLK H
C C250
1150 ~

3::l~ ,~
.8 BLK C201 150 S311 150
SEE GROUND
DISTRIBUTION ~----.g!1, !!ill!..!!.
A:!.M.
SWITCH
3 BLK 1150 CLOSED WITH ."
HOOD OPEN iii
Jl G202 Jl9 201 :xl
o
-c INSTRUMENT PANEL: INDICATORS CLUSTER ."iii
:0
GAGES AND VOLTMETER o
HOT IN RUN, BULB TEST OR START HOT IN RUN, BULB TEST OR START
L4 VIN R
,.t---------'
I
I
I
GAGES FUSE
10 AMP
SEE FUSE
I BLOCK

I
FUSE
I--
V6 VIN 9
:
I
I
..E---------'
GAGES FUSE
10 AMP
SEE FUSE
I FUSE
:--
I
BLOCK

I BLOCKDETAILSJ l __ !L~:K~~~I~J

1 PNK/BLLK ~-------- SEE FUSE

seE FUSE
~~~ BLOCK OETAILS BLOCK DETAILS

.8 PNK/BLK
P""

iI 39
---
.8PNK/BLK
"
eLi'ii3
39 A

C211
(NOT
USEO)
"II

.8 PNK/BLK • 39
e~
.8 PNK/BLK • 39

A RC211

.35 PNKlBLK • 39

g 5Ag
----------------------1--------- 1 ~~S:S~~~ENT
I
2"
~
I RALLY
GAGE
: PiiiNi'ED PANEL
I CIRCUIT
ff\ CHARGE
~ iNiiiCATOR

_______________
I~_ !ll!: VOLTMETER
PRESSURE
~

~--.-- 11 --------------------- 6
INTERIOR
LIGHTS (NDT

...-c ~
USED)
.5 TAN B (NOT 0 .8 BRN 3
25 31 .35 BL~ Y,50 1
.5 BLK. 150 .5 TAN. 31 31 USED) 25 .35 TAN
gu C211 GENERATOR
B
-----------------------i!1------ 0
.35 BRa25 C211

r
I
DIODE
31 -
fill .5TAN .5 BLK 150 .8 BRN 25
.--egg
•
•
Ise'£ GROUND .8 TAN 31 B31C500
(NOT
17

USEO) C3

-:;TAN!31
SEe GRDUNO
DISTRIBUTION ~--e~
--,
DISTRIBUTION E C203

r[-..
I .8TA:I~

q
3 BLK .,50 .8 BRN 125

l r-
3BLK.,50 OIL OIL B3 ••• C500 00
I-
I I PRESSURE l>
I
I
1..-_ -"
SENiiER'
I __
, 90 OHMS SEE STARTER
:
I
I
: PRESSURE
I~
190 OHMS
_1.-. I
00
",G201 AT MAXIMUM AND CHARGING L_ _J AT MAXIMUM --
"'G201 SEe STARTER

- PRESSURE SYSTEM = PRESSURE

AND CHARGING
SYSTEM
0
.
Co)
INSTRUMENT PANEL: INDICATORS CLUSTER co
»
ObOMETERS AND SPEEDOMETEfi1 I
00
TRANSAXLE

fiElD
SENSOR
(pERMANENT
HOT IN ACCY OR RUN
--~------, FUSE
M!!!.!!
10 AMP

--_._----_.1I
RADIO
IBLOCK
I
1
!
:
I
Il_._____
l
, . - - - - - - - - - - - , ELECTRONIC
lGN

. VS$
INPUT

___ :
;~~~~~L(ECM)
!I SiiliiiST ATE
1 00 NOT MEASURE

.J
RESISTANCE
r-----------.., CRUISE
I,
II
1
II SOLIO

L_____ ___
,STATE
IGII

VS$ 1
INPUT "
,
J
___
1 CONTROL
I MODULE
1---
o

COil MAGNET GENERATOR)

4000 PULSES
PER Mi lE
23
AID
If! (L4 VIN R)
C2 (V6 VIN 9) .5 OK GRN/WHT
o

.5 VEL 43 (NOT USED)

.8 OK GRN 389 (L4 VIN R)

A
.8 PPLIWHT
r--------
401
B]
.8 VEL
G
400
C203
S201 . _ . . . SEE FUSE
-~ I!!;!lCK DETAILS
.8 BRN

H
.5 OK GRN/WHT
$l16 • •
437 (V6 VIN 9)

Tj;g-
C203
.5 OK GRN/WHT
""""-'~I!!::ii-'=-",,,,"_"";'''''';;_''''-=_,,,,",,-'~•
__
l4 VIN R
CIC245

.5 PPL/W:Tf~I--- ~;V~f~ .5 VEL/BLK 43 .5 OK GRN;;;;; ~ 389 389

R S T ~~
r---------··-------"L~~~~~~-~~i=~~~~~~~~~~ ~=~~~~~~~~~=-Jl--------~l----------------------'~'"
I VEHICLE CIRCUIT
tI SPEED

I POWER
INPUT
BUffER

!
COilS
CONTROL +2

SPEEDOMETER
-=
COil A
CONTRUl SOUD
4000 PPM VSS SIGNAL STATE
TO SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETERS
COlli
CONTROL
TOTAL ODOMETER TRIP ODOMETER
tOil A STEPPER MOTOR STEPPER MOTOR
CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL -=

TOTAL ODOMETER TRIP OOOMETER

I'
I
'------------------------------------------------------------------ --------- -----------.- -------
.8 BLKIWHT
PIC! 450
-------------~

M C203
ASSEMBL Y LINE A
DIAGNOSTIC
.8 BLKIWHT .8 BLK/WHT
>;;"50
J
•
4SO-
S504
LINK (ALDL) W
CONNECTOR ! BLKIWHT ~ 450 ."
SEE GROUND ~_ _ _ _ ...
_ ~
iii
:xl
DISTRIBUTION o
 "'1"1
INSTRUMENT PANEL: INDICATORS CLUSTER iii
::1:1
REAR VIEW 0
CONNECTOR C1 PINOUT
A Not Used
B Not Used
C Not Used
D Not Used
E Not Used
® ® F Not Used
® ® G Not Used

00 °0 ® H Not Used

@ CD J
K
Not Used
Not Used
1
2
3
® ® 789 101112 L
M
Not Used
Not Used
4
5 N Not Used
6
7 P Ground
8
9 R Vehicle Speed Sensor Lo
S Vehicle Speed Sensor High
T Ignition Power
U Speed Signal To ECM
CONNECTOR C3 PINOUT CONNECTOR C2 PINOUT BULB LOCATIONS
1 Upshift Indicator 1 Not Used A Illumination
2 LH Tum Indicator 2 Not Used B Illumination
3 Illumination 3 Not Used C UPSHIFT Indicator
4 RH Tum Indicator . 4 Ground D RH Tum Indicator
5 Ignition 5 Not Used E Charge Indicator
6 Charge Indicator 6 Not Used F Fasten Belts Indicator
7 Fuel Gage 7 Illumination G SERVICE ENG INE SOON Indicator
8 Fasten Belts Indicator 8 Not Used H AJ AR Indicator
9 Ignition Indicator 9 Ignition I LH Tum Indicator
lO SERVICE ENGINE SOON Indicator 10 AJAR Indicator J Coolant Temperature Indicator
11 Ground 11 Coolant Temperature Gage K Hi Beam Indicator
12 Hi Beam Indicator 12 Illumination L Illumination
13 Coolant Temperature Indicator M BRAKE Indicator
14 Brake Indicator co
N Illumination »
15 Illumination I
16 Not Used 00
17 Oil Pressure Gage 0
18 Tachometer c.n

INSTRUMENT PANEL: INDICATORS CLUSTER
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS
• For a list of possible symptoms, go to System
Diagnosis.
• For Instrument Cluster removal and replace-
ment procedures, see Section 8C of the Chas-
sis Service Manual.
• Try the following checks before doing the Sys-
tem Check.
1. Check GAGES Fuse by visual inspection.
2. Check the CTSY/LID Fuse by visual inspec-
tion.
3. Check the RADIO Fuse by visual inspec-
tion.
4. Check Indicator bulbs.
• Go to System Check for a guide to normal
operation.
• Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.
SYSTEM CHECK
• Use the System Check Table as a guide to
normal operation. Refer to the diagnosis given
if other results occur.
• Tests follow in System Diagnosis.
00
»
I
00
COMPONENT LOCATION Page-Figure
o
Assembly Line Diagnostic Link
(ALDL) Connector .............. In console, near rear of shifter ................ 201- 7-A
Coolant Temperature Switch/Sender
(VIN 9). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Top LH of engine, above exhaust manifold
Coolant Temperature Switch/Sender
(VIN R) ....................... LH top of engine ........................... 201- 2-A
Cruise Control Module ............ Under console, near radio .................... 201- 8-B
Direct Ignition System (DIS) ....... Top rear of engine
Electronic Control Module (ECM) ... Between seats, on front of rear bulkhead ....... 201- 7-A
Fuel Tank Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Top of fuel tank
Fuse Block...................... Behind LH side of liP ...................... 201- 5-D
Hood Ajar Switch ................ Front compartment, center offront bulkhead ... 201-14-C
Ignition Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Top of engine, left of throttle body . . . . . . . . . . .. 201- 3-A
Ignition Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. At base of steering column .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201-11-D
Tachometer Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Top of engine, near ignition coil .............. , 201- 7-B
Trunk Ajar Switch ............... LH side of engine compartment
Vehicle Speed Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . .. RH end of transaxle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201- I-A
C100 (34 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. LH side of front bulkhead, right of brake master
cylinder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201-11-A
C201 (8 cavities) ................. LH shroud above center access hole .......... , 201-16-A
C203 (15 cavities) ................ Between seats, in front of rear bulkhead ........ 201- 7-A
C207 (7 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Behind dash, near steering column. . . . . . . . . . .. 201-11-D
C245 (8 cavities) ................. Below RH steering column support ........... 201- 5-B
C250 (4 cavities) ................. Center of rear bulkhead, in engine compartment. 201-13-C
C315 (2 cavities) ................. InlowerrearofLHdoor .................... 201-18-A
C316 (2 cavities) ................. In lower rear of RH door .................... 201-18-A
C500 (34 cavities) ................ Engine compartment, near battery ............ 201-11-B
C502 (3 cavities) ................. Engine compartment, center of rear bulkhead ... 201-11-B
C511 (2 cavities) ................. Top of engine, near ignition coil ............... 201- 3-A
G201 .......................... Behind center of liP ........................ 201- 5-C
G202 .......................... Between seats, near rear bulkhead ............ 201- 5-A
G504 (V IN 9) .................... LH top of engine, below throttle body ........ , 201- 3-A
G504 (VIN R) ................... Top LH front of engine, above Starter Solenoid .. 201- 2-A
S125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Main harness, behind LH side of liP, near Fuse
Block ................................... 201- 5-D "'T'I
iii
::J:J
o
INSTRUMENT PANEL: INDICATORS CLUSTER "
iii
::ICI
o
COMPONENT LOCATION Page- Figure
S201 . Main harness, above steering column 201- 8-A
S203 . Main harness, above steering column 201- 8-A
S212 . Main harness, behind center of dash. . . . . . . . . .. 201- 5-C
S213 . Main harness, behind rear bulkhead grommet. .. 201-17-A
S214 . Main harness, behind LH side of liP. . . . . . . . . .. 201- 8-A
S216 . Main harness, behind center liP . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 20 1-17-A
S311 . Crosscar harness, LH side ofIJP 201-16-A
S312 . Crosscar harness, LH side of liP . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201-16-A
S504 . Engine harness, under rear console 201- 7-A

SYSTEM CHECK TABLE

ACTION
Turn Ignition Switch to RUN
With Ignition Switch in RUN, operate first the
RH Turn Signal then the LH Turn Signal
NORMAL RESULT FOR DIAGNOSIS
SERVICE ENGINE SOON Indicator is on See Section 6E
Fasten Belts Indicator will come on for 4 to 5 See Warnings and Alarms, Section 8A-76
seconds
The Audio Alarm will sound if the Passenger's See Warnings and Alarms, Section 8A-76
seatbelt is unbuckled
Fuel Gage shows current fuel level See Symptom Table
Voltmeter shows battery voltage Do Test 0
Oil Pressure Gage shows 0 psi See Symptom Table
Coolant Temperature Gage shows the coolant See Symptom Table
temperature
Tachometer displays 0 rpm DoTestP
RH and LH Turn Indicators flash See Exterior Lights, Section 8A-11O

00
l>
I
00
o
"
 co
INSTRUMENT PANEL: INDICATORS CLUSTER »
I
00
(Continued from previous page) o
co
With Ignition Switch in RUN, apply the Park Brake Warning Indicator is on See Brake Warning System, Section 8A-41
Brake
With Ignition Switch in RUN, turn the Head or Instrument Cluster illumination varies with dim- See Instrument Panel Dimming, Section 8A-117
Park Lights on and adjust the dimmer control mer control
Start engine and let idle Brake Warning Indicator lights while cranking See Symptom Table
Coolant Temperature Gage indicates current
coolant temperature See Symptom Table
Oil Presssure Gage indicates current oil pressure Do Test P
Tachometer indicates the engine rpm
• If all results are normal. the system is OK.
(Continued from previous column) (Continued from previous column)
SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS Coolant Coolant Do Test K (also see
Do Test G (also see
• Do the tests listed for your symptom in the Temperature Gage Test B terminal 11) Temperature Test C terminal 13)
Symptom Table below. indicates hot with Indicator does not
• Tests follow the Symptom Table.
engine cool and light with the engine
Ignition Switch in coolant overheated
RUN Do Test L (also see
SYMPTOM TABLE Oil Pressure Gage
Coolant Do Test H (also see indicates low Test C terminal 17)
SYMPTOM FOR DIAGNOSIS
Temperature Gage Test B terminal 11) pressure when oil
Fuel Gage indicates Do Test D (also see indicates cold at all pressure is normal
E when there is fuel Test C terminal 7) times Oil Pressure Gage Do Test M (also see
in the tank
Coolant Do Test I (also see indicates high Test C terminal 17)
Fuel Gage indicates Do Test F (also see Temperature Gage Test B terminal 11) pressure at all times
F or beyond at all Test C terminal 7) is inaccurate
times Oil Pressure Gage is Do Test N (also see
Coolant Do Test J (also see inaccurate Test C terminal 17)
Fuel Gage is Do Test E (also see Test C terminal 13)
inaccurate Test C terminal 7)
Temperature
Indicator lights
Voltmeter is Do Test a
inaccurate
(Continued in next column) when engine coolant
is not overheated Tachometer does not DoTestP
operate
(Continued in next column)
(Continued on next page)

"T1
in~
o
INSTRUMENT PANEL: INDICATORS CLUSTER
."m
::a
o
(Continued from previous page) (Continued from previous column)
Either Speedometer Replace the Cluster Illumination See Interior Lights
or Odometers do not Speedometer lights do not operate Dimming, Section
operate Assembly (see properly SA-1l7
SectionSC)
Speedometer and See Vehicle Speed
odometers do not Sensor, Section
operate SA-33
Service Engine Soon See Section 6E
Indicator does not
operate properly
Hi Beam Indicator See Headlights,
does not operate Section SA-100
properly
Fasten Belts See Warnings and
Indicator does not Alarms, Section
operate properly SA-76
BRAKE Indicator See Brake Warning
does not operate System, Section
properly SA-41
Turn Indicator does See Exterior Lights,
not operate properly Section SA-110 (also
see Test C terminals
1 and 4)
Charge Indicator See Starter and
does not operate Charging System,
properly Section SA-30
AJAR Indicator is Do Test Q
always on
AJAR Indicator Do Test R
does not light for
only one input
Upshift Indicator DoTestS CD

does not operate

»
I
properly CO
(Continued in next column) o
(Continued on next page) I~
 00
INSTRUMENT PANEL: INDICATORS CLUSTER l>
I
CO
(Continued from previous page) o
A: CONNECTOR C1 PINOUT TEST ....
o
• IGNITION SWITCH IN RUN NOT USED ! ~OTUSED
EXCEPT FOR RESISTANCE
MEASUREMENTS NOT USED
I\
~------------------~I~\ \
F
I I NOTUSED
I C
NOT USED G \ \ I I I NOTUSED
• MAKE ALL RESISTANCE I B
MEASUREMENTS TO GROUND I-N-OT-us-E-D----------H-T!=r\ \ \ I " L~/r--:":"INO-=cT=-cU:7S:-:E=D~---------j
WITH THE NEGATIVE BATTERV I I I ~A______________________~
CABLE REMOVED
NOT USED
~-----------------~
J!\\ \\ \\ \\ I
I I
I I
I I
I
I
I
I
I

• MEASURE VOLTAGES TO \ \ \ \ \ I I I I
GROUND UNLESS ANOTHER \ \ \ \ \ I I I I
TERMINAL IS GIVEN \ \ \ \ \ I I I I
\ \ \ \ \ I I I I
\ \ \ \ \
I I I I
• CLUSTER CONNECTOR C1 AS \ \ \ \ \
\ \ \ \ \ I I I I
SEEN FROM THE DRIVER'S I I I I
SEAT WITH THE INDICATORS \ \ \ \ \
CLUSTER REMOVED \ \ \ I I I

• CONNECTOR C11S AT THE

LOWER LEFT SIDE OF THE
CLUSTER, FACING UP

• IF THE CORRECT VOLTAGE OR

RESISTANCE IS FOUND AT THE I
TERMINALS, AND THE CLUSTER I
FUNCTION THAT USES THOSE I
TERMINALS DOES NOT
OPERATE, CHECK BULBS, AND I
PRINTED CIRCUIT. IF OK, I
REPLACE THE INSTRUMENT I
CLUSTER (SEE SECTION SC) I
I
I
• IF THE CORRECT VOLTAGE OR I
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL TO ECM AND
RESISTANCE IS NOT FOUND AT NOT USED
CRUISE. SEE SECTION SA-33.
A TERMINAL, DO THE TEST K U OK GRN/WHT (3S9)
GIVEN OR GO TO THE PAGE NOT USED
REFERRED IGNITION POWER TO CLUSTER. SEE SECTION
SA-11.
NOT USED T VEL (43)
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR HIGH. SEE SECTION
NOT USED SA-33.
S VEL/BLK (400)
GROUND TO G504. VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR LOW. SEE SECTION
SEE SECTION SA-11. SA-33.
BLK/wHT (450) P R PPL/WHT (401) ."
m
:a
o
INSTRUMENT PANEL: INDICATORS CLUSTER .";;;
~
o

B: CONNECTOR C2 PINOUT TEST

• IGNITION SWITCH IN RUN HOOD/TRUNK/DOOR AJAR INDICATOR. IGNITION POWER FROM GAGES FUSE. SEE
EXCEPT FOR RESISTANCE GROUNDED WITH HOOD. TRUNK. OR DOOR OPEN. SECTION 8A-11.
MEASUREMENTS DO TESTS Q AND R. 9 PNK/BLK (39)
DKGRN (146) NOT USED
TEMPERATURE GAGES FROM COOLANT 8
• MAKE ALL RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE SENDER/SWITCH. 66 OHMS AT PANEL ILLUMINATION INPUT. VARIABLE
MEASUREMENTS TO GROUND 260°F (127°C). 1365 OHMS AT 100°F (38°C) VOLTAGE WITH LIGHTS ON AND DIMMER
WITH THE NEGATIVE BATTERY DO TESTS G. H AND I. CONTROL ADJUSTED. SEE SECTION 8A-117.
CABLE REMOVED LTGRN (135) 7 GRY(8)
PANEL ILLUMINATION INPUT. VARIABLE
VOLTAGE WITH LIGHTS ON AND DIMMER
CONTROL ADJUSTED. SEE SECTION 8A-117.
• MEASURE VOLTAGES TO GRY(8) 12
GROUND UNLESS ANOTIiER
TERMINAL IS GIVEN

• CLUSTER CONNECTOR C2 AS
SEEN FROM THE DRIVER'S
SEAT WITH THE INDICATORS
CLUSTER REMOVED

• CONNECTOR C21S ON THE

LEFT SIDE

• IF THE CORRECT VOLTAGE OR

RESISTANCE IS FOUND AT THE
TERMINALS, AND THE CLUSTER
FUNCTION THAT USES THOSE 1 1 1
TERMINALS DOES NOT
\
OPERATE, CHECK THE BULBS
1 1 1 \
AND PRINTED CIRCUIT. IF OK 1 1 I \
REPLACE THE INSTRUMENT 1 1 1 \
CLUSTER (SEE SECTION 8C) 1 1 1
~ \
1 1 1 oc:. \\
1 1 1
1 1 1 ~\
• IF THE CORRECT VOLTAGE OR
RESISTANCE IS NOT FOUND AT 1 1 1 \
A TERMINAL, DO THE TEST 1 1 1 \
GIVEN OR GO TO THE PAGE 1 1 1 \
REFERRED 1 1 1 \
1 1 1
1 1 1
NOT USED V 1 1 NOT USED
1 1 6 CO
l>
NOT USED r 1
1 NOT USED
I
5
NOT USED [I GROUND TO G201. SEE SECTION 8A-14. (X)
4 BLK(150) 0
.
...•
(Continued on next page)
...•
INSTRUMENT PANEL: INDICATORS CLUSTER 00
l>
I
00
(Continued from previous page) o
C: CONNECTOR C3 PINOUT TEST ...
to.)

• IGNITION SWITCH IN RUN

EXCEPT FOR RESISTANCE
MEASUREMENTS

• MAKE ALL RESISTANCE

MEASUREMENTS TO GROUND FROM ECM TO UPSHIFT INDICATOR. DO
WITH THE NEGATIVE BATTERY TESTS.
CABLE REMOVED TAN/BLK (456)
LH TURN INDICATOR. FLASHING TACHOMETER INPUT. DO TEST P.
BATTERY VOLTAGE WITH LH TURN 1S WHT (121)
• MEASURE VOLTAGES TO SIGNAL ON. OIL PRESSURE GAGE FROM OIL
GROUND UNLESS ANOTHER SEE SECTION SA-110. PRESSURE SENDER. 0 OHMS (LOW) TO 90
TERMINAL IS GIVEN LTBLU(14) OHMS (HIGH) OIL PRESSURE. DO TESTS
PANEL ILLUMINATION. VARIABLE L,MANDN.
VOLTAGE WITH LIGHTS ON AND DIMMER 17 TAN (31)
• CLUSTER CONNECTOR C3 AS CONTROL ADJUSTED. NOT USED
SEE SECTION SA-117. __ - 16
SEEN FROM THE DRIVER'S
SEAT WITH THE INDICATORS GRY(S) 3 t-;;P:;-A-;;N::;EL:-;I~LL;-;U-;:M-::I-::N:-::A=TI:-::07N:-:CI:7NP::-:U-:-T::-.-V-A-R-IA-B-L-E-
CLUSTER REMOVED RH TURN INDICATOR. FLASHING VOLTAGE WITH LIGHTS ON AND DIMMER
BATTERY VOLTAGE WITH RH TURN 1-+--=~--~ CONTROL ADJUSTED.
SIGNAL ON. SEE SECTION SA-117 .
SEE SECTION SA-110. 15 GRY (S)
• CONNECTOR C31S ON THE DKBLU (15) 4
RIGHT SIDE BRAKE INDICATOR. 0 OHMS WITH PARK
IGNITION POWER TO THE CHARGE BRAKE SET. SEE SECTION SA-41.
INDICATOR. 14 TAN/WHT (33)
SEE SECTION SA-11 .
• IF THE CORRECT VOLTAGE OR PNK/BLK (39) 5 COOLANT TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
RESISTANCE IS FOUND AT THE FROM COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENDERI
CHARGE INDICATOR. SWITCH. DO TEST J AND K.
TERMINALS, AND THE CLUSTER SEE SECTION SA-30.
FUNCTION THAT USES THOSE 13 OK GRN (35)
BRN(25) 6
TERMINALS DOES NOT HI BEAM INDICATOR. BATTERY VOLTAGE
RESPOND CORRECTLY TO THE FUEL GAGE INPUT. 0 OHMS (EMPTY) TO WITH HI BEAMS ON.
MEASURED INPUTS, CHECK 90 OHMS (FUU). DO TESTS 0, F AND E. SEE SECTION SA-100.
THE BULBS AND PRINTED PNK(30) 7 12 LTGRN (11)
CIRCUIT, THEN REPLACE THE FASTEN BELTS INDICATOR. BATTERY GROUND TO G201.
GAGE OR INSTRUMENT VOLTAGE FOR ABOUT 6 SECONDS AFTER SEE SECTION SA-14.
CLUSTER (SEE SECTION SC) KEY IS SWITCHED TO RUN. 11 BLK (1501
SEE SECTIONS SA-75, 76, 77.
SERVICE ENGINE SOON INDICATOR.
YEL (237) S
SEE SECTION 6E.
IGNITION POWER FROM GAGES FUSE. 10 BRN/WHT (419)
• IF THE CORRECT VOLTAGE OR
SEE SECTION SA-11.
RESISTANCE IS NOT FOUND AT
PNK/BLK (39) 9
A TERMINAL, DO THE TEST
GIVEN OR GO TO THE PAGE
REFERRED

."
m
:XI
o
INSTRUMENT PANEL: INDICATORS CLUSTER
D: FUEL GAGE SHORT TEST F: FUEL GAGE OPEN TEST
Disconnect connector C502. Turn the Ignition Connect: FUSED JUMPER
Switch to RUN. Wait 1 minute to allow the At: FUEL TANK UNIT CONNECTOR
Gage to reach full. (HARNESS HALF) (Disconnected)
Condition:
• If Fuel Gage now indicates full, repair/
• Ignition Switch: RUN
replace the Fuel Gage Sender.
Jumper
• If Fuel Gage still indicates empty, check/ Correct Result For Diagnosis
Between
repair PNK (30) wires for shorts to ground,
B(PNK)& Fuel Gage
the Instrument Cluster Printed Circuit for See 1
Ground readsE
flaws and the Fuel Gage connections.
Replace the Fuel Gage if PNK (30) wires, B(PNK)&A Fuel Gage
See 2
Printed Circuit and Gage connections are (BLK) reads E
OK (see Section 8C). • If the Fuel Gage indicates correctly
repair/replace the Fuel Gage Sender and
E: FUEL GAGE SENDER TEST its wires.
1. Check/repair PNK (30) wires for opens.
Disconnect connector C502 and connect one red
lead of tester J-33431 to the PNK (30)wire and Check Printed Circuit for flaws and for
the other to ground. Set the resistance dials of clean and tight Fuel Gage connections.
the tester to 0 ohms and then to 90 ohms. The Replace Fuel Gage if the above checks are
OK (see Section 8C).
Fuel Gage should read E and then F. Wait 1
minute to allow the Gage to reach Full. 2. Check/repair the BLK (150) wire for an
open (see schematic).
• If the Gage responds correctly check the
BLK (150) wire for an open. If OK, replace
the Fuel Gage Sender.
G: COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAGE
• If the Gage does not respond correctly, SHORT TEST
check PNK (30)wire to the Instrument Clus-
Disconnect the Coolant Temperature Sender/
ter for high resistance. Also, inspect the
Switch connector and put the Ignition Switch
Printed Circuit for proper mating of the con-
in RUN.
nectors. Replace the Fuel Gage if the wire
and Printed Circuit are good (see Section • If the Coolant Temperature Gage reads
8C). Cold, replace the Coolant Temperature
Sender/Switch.
."
m
:g
o
• If the Coolant Temperature Gage does not
read Cold, check the Instrument Cluster
Printed Circuit mid the LT GRN and DK
GRN/YEL (135) wires for a short to ground
(see schematic). Replace the Coolant Tem-
perature Gage if all wires are good (see See-
tion8C).
H: COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAGE
OPEN TEST
Disconnect the Coolant Temperature Sender/
Switch connector. Jumper the DK GRNIYEL
(135) wire to ground and put the Ignition
Switch in RUN.
• If the Coolant Temperature Gage reads Hot,
replace the Coolant Temperature Sender/
Switch.
• If the Coolant Temperature Gage still reads
cold, check the LT GRN and DK GRN/YEL
(135) wires, Printed Circuit, and Gage con-
nections for an open. If OK, replace the
Coolant Temperature Gage (see Section 8C).
I: COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAGE
ACCURACY TEST
Disconnect the Coolant Temperature Sender
connector. Connect one red clip lead of the
J-33431 tester to the harness connector DK
GRN/YEL (135)wire, and the other red clip lead
to ground. Adjust the resistance dials of the
tester to 1400 ohms and then to 55 ohms. The
Coolant Temperature Gage should show Cold
00
and then Hot. »
I
00
o
...•
(Continued on next page) w
 00
INSTRUMENT PANEL: INDICATORS CLUSTER »
I
00
(Continued from previous page) (Continued from previous column) (Continued from previous column) o
• If the Coolant Temperature Gage reads cor- • If the result is correct, replace Coolant • If the result is correct, replace the Oil
..•~
rectly, the wiring and Gage are good. Temperature Sender/Switch. Pressure Sender.
Replace the Coolant Temperature Sender/ 1. Check DK GRN (35) wire and Instrument 1. Check TAN (31) wire and Instrument
Switch. Cluster Printed Circuit for an open. Cluster Printed Circuit for an open. If
• If the Gage is not correct, check the Gage wire and Printed Circuit are OK, replace
connection and the DK GRN/YEL (135) wire L: OIL PRESSURE GAGE SHORT TEST the Oil Pressure Gage (see Section SC).
for high resistance. If OK replace the Disconnect: CONNECTOR
Coolant Temperature Gage (see Section SC). At: OIL PRESSURE SENDER
N: OIL PRESSURE GAGE ACCURACY
Condition:
TEST
J: COOLANT TEMPERATURE • Ignition Switch: RUN Disconnect the Oil Pressure Sender. Connect
INDICATOR SHORT TEST For Diagnosis one red clip of the J-33431 tester to the harness
Action Correct Result
Disconnect the Coolant Temperature Sender/ connector, TAN (31) wire, and connect the other
Switch and put the Ignition Switch in RUN. Disconnect Oil red clip lead to ground. Set the resistance dials
Oil Pressure
Pressure of the sender to 0 ohms and then to 90 ohms.
Gage shows See 1
• If the Indicator stays on, check the D K GRN Sender
high pressure The Oil Pressure Gage should read low pressure
Connector
(35) wire and Printed Circuit for a short to and then high pressure.
ground. • If the result is correct, replace the Oil
• If the Oil Pressure Gage reads correctly,
• If the Indicator goes out, replace the Coolant 1. Check TAN (31) wire to Instrument Clus- replace the Oil Pressure Sender.
Temperature Sender/Switch. ter for a short to ground. Replace the Oil
Pressure Gage, if the wire is OK (see Sec- • If the Oil Pressure Gage does not read cor-
tion SC).. rectly, check the TAN (31) wire, the Gage
K: COOLANT TEMPERATURE connections, and Printed Circuit. If they are
INDICATOR OPEN TEST
good, replace the Oil Pressure Gage (see Sec-
Connect: A FUSED JUMPER
M: OIL PRESSURE GAGE OPEN TEST
tion SC).
At: COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENDER/ Connect: FUSED JUMPER
SWITCH CONNECTOR (Disconnected) At: OIL PRESSURE SENDER CONNECTOR
0: VOLTMETER TEST
Condition: (Disconnected)
• Ignition Switch: RUN Condition:
With the Ignition Switch in RUN, connect a
• Ignition Switch: RUN voltmeter between the positive and negative
Jumper
Correct Result For Diagnosis terminals of the Battery.
Between Jumper
Correct Result For Diagnosis
Between • If the voltage reading on the test voltmeter
Coolant is the same as the car's Voltmeter, the car's
B(DKGRN) Temperature Oil Pressure
See 1 B(TAN)& Voltmeter is OK.
& Ground Indicator Gage shows See 1
Ground
comes on low pressure
(Continued in next column) (Continued in next column)
"T'I
iii
::J:J
o

INSTRUMENT PANEL: INDICATORS CLUSTER
• If the voltage reading on the test voltmeter
is different from the car's Voltmeter, check
the Voltmeter Gage connections and the
PNK/BLK (39) wire for an open. If both are
OK, repair/replace the Voltmeter (see Sec-
tion8C).
P: TACHOMETER TEST
Disconnect the Ignition Coil connector (V IN 9)
or the Direct Ignition System connector (VIN
R). Connect the J-33431 Instrument Panel
Tester to the Ignition Coil connector (VIN 9) or
Direct Ignition System connector (VIN R)
using the J-33431-4 or J-33431-10 harness con-
nector. Connect the tester ground lead to a
known good ground. Plug the tester into an
outlet and put the Ignition Switch in RUN.
Turn the tester on and set the speed signal
switch to 54 mph.
• If the Tachometer reads 1350 rpm (VIN 9)
1800 (VIN R), check the Ignition Coil con-
nector (VIN 9) or Direct Ignition System
connector (VIN R). It should be clean and
tight.
• If the Tachometer does not read correctly,
check the WHT (121) wire for an open. If OK,
replace the Tachometer (see Section 8C).
Q. AJAR INDICATOR IS ON
With the Ignition switch in RUN disconnect
the Trunk Ajar Switch, Hood Ajar Switch, LH
Door Ajar Switch and RH Door Ajar Switch
connectors one at a time (see schematic).
• If the AJAR Indicator goes out replace the
Switch at fault.
• If the AJ AR Indicator is still lit with all four
wires disconnected, check the D K G RN
(146), BLK/PNK (158), and BLK/ORN (158)
wires for a short to ground.
R: AJAR INDICATOR DOES NOT
LIGHT FOR ONLY ONE INPUT
Disconnect the suspect door, trunk, or Hood
Ajar Switch connector. Jumper the connector
wire to ground and put the Ignition Switch in
RUN.
• If the Indicator lights, check the BLK (150)
wire for an open (except Hood Ajar Switch
connector). If OK, replace the suspect
Switch.
• If the Indicator does not light, check the
suspect wire for an open (see schematic).
S: UPSHIFT INDICATOR WIRE TEST
Disconnect ECM connector C2. Put the Igni-
tion Switch in RUN and measure the voltage at
terminal 7 (Electronic Fuel Injection), terminal
A 7 (Multi-port Fuel Injection) (see Section
8A-20).
• If battery voltage is present, see section 6E
for ECM diagnosis.
• If battery voltage is not present, check the
TAN/BLK (456) wire for an open.
CIRCUIT OPERATION
The operation of an individual Indicator is
described along with its circuit. Refer to the
schematic and text for the circuit that is stated
below each of the Indicators.
"T'I
m
:D
o
Fuel Gage
The pointer of the Fuel Gage is moved by the
magnetic fields of two coils. The coils are at
right angles to each other. Battery voltage is
applied to the E coil and the circuit divides at
the opposite end of this coil. One path continues
through the F coil. Another goes to the variable
resistor of the Fuel Gage Sender.
When the tank is low, the resistance of the
Sender is low. A large flow of current passes
through the E coil and the Fuel Gage Sender
resistor. This moves the pointer toward E on
the scale. When the tank is full the Sender
resistance is high. More current now flows
through the F coil, moving the pointer toward F
on the scale.
With two coils operating the pointer, the
Gage is not affected by changes in the system's
battery voltage.
Coolant Temperature Indicator
The Coolant Temperature Indicator warns
the driver of high coolant temperature. With
the Ignition Switch in RUN, BULB TEST or
START, voltage from the GAGES Fuse is
applied to the Coolant Temperature Indicator.
In RUN, the bulb can be grounded through the
Coolant Temperature Switch. The Switch
closes when the coolant temperature exceeds
258 OF (126 0C). The light glows.
~
I
00
o
(Continued on next page)
...
U1
INSTRUMENT PANEL: INDICATORS CLUSTER
(Continued from previous page)
Speedometer and Odometers
The Speedometer is operated by an electronic
circuit. The Vehicle Speed Sensor, located in the
trans axle, generates an AC voltage whose fre-
quency is proportional to the speed of the vehi-
cle. This voltage/frequency goes to the Vehicle
Speed Buffer and to the Speedometer in the
Instrument Cluster. The Solid State circuit
drives the point of the Speedometer. There is no
Speedometer cable in the vehicle.
The same speed signal from the Vehicle Speed
Buffer is processed to drive the Odometers.
They are operated by a stepper motor that
responds to pulses from the Speedometer cir-
cuit.
Tachometer
The Tachometer displays engine speed in
rpm. Voltage pulses are taken from the Ignition
System and sent to the Tachometer. The
Tachometer responds to the frequency of the
voltage pulses which increases with engine
speed. In coil equipped vehicles (VIN 9) there is
a Tachometer Filter in the circuit that rounds
off the pulses and removes voltage spikes.
Solid State circuits process these pulses into
a signal that drives the pointer of the meter.
Oil Pressure Gage
The engine oil pressure is displayed by the Oil
Pressure Gage. The pointer of the Gage is
moved by two coils, and its operation is similar
to that of the Fuel Gage.
~
I
CO
The Oil Pressure Sender is connected to the o
junction of the two coils. It has low resistance
when the oil pressure is low and 90 ohms
resistance when the oil pressure is high. This
changing resistance changes the current flow
through the coils. The magnetic fields of the
coils move the pointer from Low to High.
Coolant Temperature Gage
The Coolant Temperature Gage is also oper-
ated by two coils. Battery voltage is applied to
both coils. One is grounded directly and the
other is grounded through the Coolant Tem-
perature Sender. This has 55 ohms resistance
with hot coolant and its resistance becomes
greater at lower temperatures. It is approxi-
mately 1400 ohms with cold coolant. This
causes the current through the Sender and one
coil to increase as the coolant temperature
increases. This moves the pointer.
Voltmeter
The Voltmeter measures the electrical sys-
tem voltage with the Ignition Switch in RUN,
BULB TEST, or START. With the engine run-
ning, the Voltmeter indicates Charging System
operation. With the engine stopped, the Volt-
meter indicates battery condition.
HoodlTrunk/Door Ajar Indicator
With the Ignition Switch in RUN, BULB
TEST, or START, voltage is available through
the GAGES Fuse to the AJAR Indicator.
Switches mounted in the doors, trunk, and hood
complete current paths to ground.
."
iii
::IJ
o
-" WIPER/WASHER ())
):>
I
c.o
HOT IN ACCV OR RUN
o
,..-T------'.
I
I
I
WIPER
.EJru.
-
,FUSE
--
I BLOCK
I
o
I 2SAMP I

p07 1 WHT
--_....
I

WHT lWHT

___________________________________~--~93~----~D--~9~3--------------------__, 93
... WIPER!
WASHER
CONTROL

• WASHER ______ 4
)
OFF
SWITCH
_. ON
HI
, •
MIST

LO..... OFF

PNK 94 PPL 92 GRY 91 DRN 98

B --- - - - -- --- - - - - - - --- - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - C207

FOR CI80 TERMINAL

VIEW, SEE BULKHEAD '
CONNECTOR PAGE 202-8'
"'J'I
1 PNK
C3 -------------- - - --- ---~-
94
"'~I"--- "'1'
---~!.. - --- ------ -~-
"':l~ --------- - - - --------------------------"
A

~~:~:"
1
1 PPL 92 1 GRY 91 10RN 98

1WHT 93
o C

*
SEE GROUND B
DISTRIBUTION .8 BLK 150

IIL _ _
~
CAPACITOR

I HI LO

T
eSl06 M - - - - - - - .... - _____ _ RUNIPARK
SWITCH

I 38LKlrn
CAPACITORI CIRCUIT
PARk
A4
1 Cl00
1- ; -
BREAKER
-.....--;----'
A

L
38LK
_ _ _ eS212

3 BlK 1150 =
.,!. G201
!!
m
:::c
o
WIPER/WASHER "T'I
m
::;g
o
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS COMPONENT LOCATION Page- Figure
• Try the following checks before doing the Sys- Fuse Block. Behind LH side of IIP 201- 5-D
tem Check. Washer Pump. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Front compartment, LH side of washer fluid
1. Check WIPER Fuse by visual inspection. reservoir 201-10-B
2. Check that the three Wiper Motor mounting Wiper Motor Front compartment, center of front bulkhead 201-14-C
bolts are clean and tight. ClOO (34 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. LH side of front bulkhead, right of brake master
cylinder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201-11-A
3. Check that the Wiper/Washer Control con-
C207 (7 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Behind dash, near steering column. . . . . . . . . . .. 201-11- D
nector C207 is mated correctly.
G201 Behind center of IIP 201- 5-C
4. If the Washer does not operate, check that: S106 Heater-A/C harness, center offront bulkhead 201-11-A
- Washer reservoir if filled. S212 Main harness, behind center of dash. . . . . . . . . .. 201- 5-C
- Hoses are not pinched or kinked.
- Hoses are correctly attached.
- Nozzles are not clogged. (Continued from previous column) SYMPTOM TABLE
• Go to System Check for a guide to normal With Wiper Switch Same operation as SYMPTOM DO TEST
operation. in HI, hold the Low speed wash Wipers do not A: Wiper/Washer
Washer Switch ON except that the operate in any mode Control Battery
• Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.
for about 1 second wipers run at High Voltage Test
speed
SYSTEM CHECK B: Wiper Motor
Move Wiper Switch Wipers run Input Voltage
• Use the System Check Table as a guide to toLO continuously at Low Test
normal operation. speed
Wipers run in Low B: Wiper Motor
• Refer to System Diagnosis for a list of symp- Move Wiper Switch Wipers run speed only (High Input Voltage
toms and diagnostic steps. toHI continuously at high speed inoperative) Test
speed
SYSTEM CHECK TABLE Wipers run in High B: Wiper Motor
Move Wiper Switch Wipers return to speed only (Low Input Voltage
NORMAL to OFF PARK position at Speed inoperative) Test
ACTION
OPERATION Low speed
Wipers will not shut B: Wiper Motor
Hold Washer Switch Washer sprays • Refer to System Diagnosis when a result is not off Input Voltage
ON for about 1 windshield as long normal. Test
second as Washer Button is
held ON Washer will not C: Washer Pump
SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS operate Voltage Test
Wipers run at Low
speed and continue • Do the tests listed for your symptom in the
Symptom Table below. ~
to run at Low speed
I
until turned off • Tests follow the Symptom Table. (D
manually o
(Continued in next column) ..•
WIPER/WASHER ~
I
CD
(Continued from previous page) (Continued from previous
-
column) C: WASHER PUMP VOLTAGE TEST o
• Wiper Switch: OFF Measure: VOLTAGE N
A: WIPER/WASHER CONTROL At: WASHER PUMP CONNECTOR
BATTERY VOLTAGE TEST B(ORN)& I o Volts See 3 (Disconnected)
Measure: VOLTAGE
Ground I Conditions:
At: WIPER/WASHERCONTROL • Wiper Switch: OFF, LO, & HI • Ignition Switch: ACCY
CONNECTOR C207 (Disconnected) A(WHT)& I Battery See 4
• Wiper Switch: OFF, HI, or LO
Condition: Ground I • Washer Switch: ON
• Ignition Switch: ACCY • If all voltages are correct, but the Wiper Measure Correct
For Diagnosis
Measure Correct Motor does not operate normally, remove Between Voltage
For Diagnosis
Between Voltage the Wiper Motor for repair. See Section
A (PNK) &
8E for diagnostic procedures. Battery See 1
D(WHT)& Ground
Battery See 1 1. Check GRY (91) wire for an open. Check
Ground A(PNK)&B
that connectors C207 and CIOO are cor- Battery See 2
• If voltage is correct, do Test B . rectly mated. If wire and connectors are
(BLK)
1. Check WIPER Fuse and WHT (93) wire OK, replace the Wiper/Washer Control. • If all voltages are correct, replace the
for an open. 2. Check PPL (92) wire for an open. Check Washer Pump.
that connectors C207 and CIOO are prop- 1. Check that connectors C207 and C100 are
B: WIPER MOTOR INPUT VOLTAGE erly mated. If wire and connectors are properly mated. Check PNK (94) wire for
TEST OK, replace the Wiper/Washer Control. an open. If OK, replace the Wiper/Washer
3. Check ORN (98) wire for an open. Check Control.
Measure: VOLTAGE
At: WIPERMOTOR CONNECTOR that connectors C207 and C100 are prop- 2. Check BLK (150) wire for an open. Check
(Disconnected) erly mated. If wire and connectors are that ground G201 is clean and tight.
Conditions: OK, replace the Wiper/Washer Control.
• Ignition Switch: ACCY 4. Check WHT (93) wire for an open. If OK,
• Wiper Switch: LO & MIST check the WIPER Fuse.
Measure Correct
For Diagnosis
Between Voltage
C(GRY)&
Battery See 1
Ground
• Wiper Switch: HI
D(PPL)&
Battery See 2
Ground
(Continued in next column)

on
m
:xl
o
 ."
WIPER/WASHER iii
:0
o
CIRCUIT OPERATION When the Washer Switch is pressed, Battery
voltage is applied to the Washer Pump and the
When the Wiper/Washer Switch is in LO or
Wiper Switch is mechanically advanced to the
MIST, Battery voltage is applied to the Wiper
LO position. The washer sprays the windshield
Motor through the GRY wire. In Lo, the Wiper
Motor will continue to run at Low speed until as long as the switch is held on. The wipers
the Wiper Switch is turned to the OFF position. must be turned off manually after the wash
cycle.
When the Wiper Switch is turned to OFF,
voltage is still applied to the Wiper Motor at the
Low speed brushes through the Run/Park
Switch, and ORN and GRY wires. The wipers
complete the last sweep in Low speed. When the
wiper blades reach the PARK position, the
Run/Park Switch opens, shunting the Wiper
Motor causing it to stop immediately. The
wipers remain in the PARK position.
When the Wiper Switch is in HI, Battery
voltage is applied directly to the Wiper Motor
through the PPL wire to the High speed
brushes. The wipers run continuously at High
speed. When turned off, the wipers make the
last sweep in Low speed and park, similar to LO
speed operation.
The Wiper Motor is protected by a Circuit
Breaker. The Circuit Breaker opens if the
wipers are blocked by ice on the windshield, for
example. The Circuit Breaker resets automati-
cally when it cools.

00
l>
I
CD
o
~ WIPER/WASHER: PULSE 00
l>
I
HOT IN ACCY OR RUN
to
...\
o

~,
93 D~C207
WHT 93
WIPER!
WASHER
WIPER SWITCH

1 WH 93
MIST ~
Off
--------------------;l-------
...•.. -'
PULSE LO
HI MIST ~~
Off
~.,
PULSE
LO
HI
----;~;;:-I
'"
OFF"' ..••. LO
PULSE
JY
~TCH
Hi
WASHER
SWITCH
IMAXI DELAY OFF -~ ON
d
IMINI i:l

I
GR~ ~ ~1___________________ P!,;j ~~ ____ ~~_I9~---------------- __~N~.19:.n'

Bl
1 WHT
n- ------------------,-------------
A
93 1 GRY
C
91 -~~~t9;---I-~R:I;8-------------------~]·
.~
WIPER
MOTOR 1 PNK 94
~ CONTROL
MODULE
BOARD
A

.
f
~-- --
L-.. ~\r ARK
RUN
RELAY!
~
~
M
PUMP
--

.8 Bl~1150

SOLIO STATE
I PULSE!
SPEED! ,
-
.§!M.e-----
.~ WASH
CONTROL , 3 BlK1150 I
•• I
--- - - A4 Cl00 SEE GROUND

I
- DISTRIBUTION

J
3 BlK 150

.~('~~----------~~~ WIPER ; ~
MOTOR
l' CAPACITORS
S21,e

. CIRCUIT
BREAKER
MOTOR HAS A
SElF·RESETTING
CIRCUIT BREAKER
"
3-: 1150 :!!
m
~-
-= .-..
-= -=--
...
- ---
",G201
:c
o
WIPERIWASHER: PULSE 'TI
m
::a
o
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS COMPONENT LOCATION Page- Figure
• Try the following checks before doing the Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Behind LH side of liP .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201- 5-D
System Check. Washer Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Front compartment, LH side of washer fluid
1. Check the Wiper Fuse by visual inspection. reservoir 201-10-B
2. Check that the three Wiper Motor mounting Wiper Motor Module Front compartment, center of front bulkhead 201-14-C
bolts are clean and tight. CloO (34 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. LH side of front bulkhead, right of brake master
cylinder 201-11-A
3. Check that connector C207 and the Wiper
C207 (7 cavities) Behind dash, near steering column. . . . . . . . . . .. 201-11-D
Motor Module connector are mated correctly.
G201 Behind center of liP 201- 5-C
4. If the Washer does not operate, check that: S106 Heater-A/Charness, center of front bulkhead 201-11-A
• The Washer reservoir is filled. S212 Main harness, behind center of dash 201- 5-C
• The hoses are not pinched or kinked.
• The hoses are correctly attached. SYSTEM CHECK TABLE (Continued from previous column)
• The nozzles are not clogged. NORMAL Turn the Wiper The Wipers make
ACTION
• Go to System Check for a guide to normal OPERATION Switch to PULSE one complete stroke,
operation. Press the Washer The Washer sprays (delay mode) then pause for 0 to 25
Switch for a short the windshield and seconds before
• Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.
interval (less than continues to spray making the next
one second) for 2112 seconds after stroke
SYSTEM CHECK
switch is released The wait time is
• Use the System Check Table as a guide to adjusted by turning
The Wipers run at
normal operation. the Wiper Switch
low speed and
• Refer to System Diagnosis for a list of symp- continue for through the delay
toms and diagnostic steps. approximately 6 range
seconds after spray
cycle is completed,
then return to park
(Continued in next column)

~
I
CD
•••••
(Continued on next page) ..•
WIPERIWASHER: PULSE ;
I
CD
(Continued from previous page) SYMPTOM TABLE A: WIPERIWASHER BATTERY -a.
SYMPTOM DO TEST VOLTAGE TEST N

With the Wiper The Washer sprays Wipers do not )l: Wiper!VVasher Measure: VOLTAGE
Switch in PULSE, the windshield as operate in any mode Battery Voltage At: WIPERIWASHER SWITCH CONNECTOR
push Washer Switch long as the Washer Test C207 (Disconnected)
to ON for one or two Switch is held ON Condition:
B: Wiper Motor
seconds The Wipers run at • Ignition Switch: ACCY
Module Input
low speed during Voltage Test Measure Correct
For Diagnosis
spray period and Between Voltage
continue running for No delay in pulse C: Wiper!VVasher
approximately 6 mode Pulse Control D (WHT) &
Battery See 1
seconds after the Resistance Test Ground
Washer stops Wipers will not shut B: Wiper Motor • If the voltage is correct, return to the
The Wipers return off Module Input Symptom Table.
to pulse operation Wipers run at high Voltage Test 1. Check the WIPER Fuse and the WHT
speed only (low (93) wire for opens.
Turn the Wiper The Wipers run
speed inoperative)
Switch to LO continuously at low
speed Washer will not B: Wiper Motor B: WIPER MOTOR MODULE
operate Module Input INPUT VOLTAGE TEST
Turn the Wiper The Wipers run at a
Voltage Test
Switch to HI faster speed Measure: VOLTAGE
D: Washer Pump
Turn the Wiper The Wipers return to At: WIPER MOTOR MODULE CONNECTOR
Test
Switch to OFF the park position at (Connected)
low speed Wipers run at low B: Wiper Motor Condition:
speed only high, Module Input • Ignition Switch: ACCY
Turn the Wiper The Wipers make
speed inoperative Voltage Test Measure Correct
Switch to MIST one complete stroke For Diagnosis
and then park Between I Voltage

• Wiper Switch: )lNY POSITION

• Refer to System Diagnosis when a result is
not normal. )l (WHT) & I Battery See 1
Ground
SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS • Wiper Switch: MIST, LO, or HI
• Do the tests listed for your symptom in the C (GRY) & I Battery See 2
Symptom Table below. Ground
• Tests follow the Symptom Table. • Wiper Switch: HI
D (PPL) & I Battery See 3
Ground
."in
(Continued on next page)
~
WIPERIWASHER: PULSE ."m
~
(Continued from previous page) (Continued from previous column) 0: WASHER PUMP TEST (TABLE 2)
• Move the Wiper Switch through delay Measure: VOLTAGE
• Wiper Switch: OFF range to the maximum delay position At: WASHER PUMP (Disconnected)
Resistance Conditions:
• Washer Switch: ON
A (WHT) & increases to • Ignition Switch: ACCY
C (GRY) & I Battery See 4 C (GRY) approximately
See 1 • Washer Switch: ON
Ground I 500 K ohms Measure Correct
• If all the voltages are correct but the Wiper For Diagnosis
Between Voltage
Motor Module does not operate normally, • If the resistances are correct but the pulse
remove the Wiper Motor Module for repair. mode does not operate, remove the Wiper A (PNK) &
Motor Module for repair (see Section 8E for Battery See 1
See Section 8E for diagnostic procedures. Ground
diagnostic instructions).
1. Check the WHT (93) wire for an open back A (PNK) &
1. Check the WHT (93) and GRY (91) wires Battery See 2
to the WIPER Fuse. B (BLK)
for opens. If the wires are good, replace
2. Check the GRY (91) wire for an open. If the the WiperlWasher Switch. • If the voltages are correct, replace the
wire is good, replace the WiperlWasher Washer Pump (see Section 8E for the
Switch. procedure).
3. Check the PPL (92) wire for an open. If the 0: WASHER PUMP TEST (TABLE 1) 1. Check the ORN (98) and PNK (94) wires
wire is good, replace the WiperlWasher Measure: VOLTAGE for an open. If they are good, replace the
Switch. At: WIPER MOTOR MODULE (Connected) WiperlWasher Switch.
4. Replace the WiperlWasher Switch. Conditions: 2. Check the BLK (150) wire for an open to
• Ignition Switch: ACCY ground.
• Washer Switch: ON
C: WIPERIWASHER PULSE CONTROL
RESISTANCE TEST Measure Correct
Between Voltage
For Diagnosis CIRCUIT OPERATION
Measure: RESISTANCE The WiperlWasher Switch sends signals to the
At: WIPER MOTOR MODULE CONNECTOR C(GRY)& Solid State Pulse/SpeedlWash Control which is
Battery See 1
(Disconnected) Ground
mounted inside the Wiper Motor Module.
Conditions: B (ORN) &
• Ignition Switch: OFF Battery See 2 The Wiper Motor is protected by a built-in Cir-
Ground
• Negative Battery Terminal: cuit Breaker. If the Wipers are blocked (by ice
• If the voltages are correct, go to Table 2. on the windshield, for example), the Circuit
DISCONNECTED
• Wiper Switch: LO 1. Check the GRY (91) wire for an open. If the Breaker opens. The Circuit Breaker resets itself
• Ohmmeter positive lead to terminal wire is good, replace the WiperlWasher when it cools.
A (WHT) Switch.
Measure Correct 2. Replace the Control Board. LOW SPEED
For Diagnosis
Between Resistance Battery voltage is applied to the Wiper/
~
Washer Switch and the Park/Run Relay through
A (WHT) & Approx.
See 1 I
C (GRY) 10 K ohms the WHT (93) wires. With the WiperlWasher CD
~
(Continued in next column) (Continued on next page)
w
WIPERIWASHER: PULSE
(Continued from previous page)
Switch in MIST, LO, HI, or WASHER position,
voltage is applied to the Solid State Control
through the GRY (91) wire. This voltage signals
the Solid State Control to ground the coil of the
Park/Run Relay. With the Park/Run Relay ener-
gized, voltage is applied through the contacts of
the relay to the Wiper Motor for low speed
operation.
PARK
When the Wiper/Washer switch is turned to
OFF, the Park/Run Switch provides the ground
for the Park/Run Relay. The relay contacts
remain closed and the Wiper Motor continues
to run in low speed until the Wipers reach
PARK position. At this time, a cam on the large
gear mechanically opens the Park/Run Switch,
which removes ground from the Park/Run
Relay. This de-energizes the relay, and the relay
contacts open. Battery voltage is removed from
the Wiper Motor, shutting off the Wipers.
HIGH SPEED
For high speed wiping, battery voltage from
the Wiper/Washer Switch is directly applied to
the HI speed terminal of the Wiper Motor
through the PPL (92) wire. When the Wiper/
Washer Switch is turned to OFF, the Wipers
park at the low speed under control of the Park/
Run Switch.
PULSE
With the Wiper/Washer Switch in PULSE,
voltage is applied to the Solid State Pulse/Speed/
Wash Control through the GRY (91) wire. This
voltage signals the Solid State Pulse/Speed/Wash
Control to momentarily ground the coil of the
Park/Run Relay. With the Park/Run Relay ener-
gized, voltage is applied through the contacts of
the relay to the Wiper Motor.
After the Wipers have started, the Park/Run
Switch supplies battery voltage until the Wipers
return to PARK position. The Wipers remain
parked until the Solid State Pulse/Speed/Wash
Control again grounds the Park/Run Relay coil.
The length of the delay time between strokes
is controlled by the variable pulse delay resistor.
From the low position, the delay cycles are 18,
10, 6, 3, and 1.25 seconds.
MIST
When the control is moved to MIST and re-
leased, the Wipers make one sweep at low speed
and return to park. The circuit operation is the
same as that of LO.
WASHER
When the Washer Switch is depressed, this
signals the Solid State Control to apply battery
voltage to the Washer Pump (ORN to PNK
wires) and also to start the wiper cycle. The
Washer continues as long as its switch is held
down. The Solid State Control keeps the Wipers
on for about six seconds after the Washer goes
off. If the Washer is switched on during pulse
operation, the cycle of wash with six seconds of
low speed wipes is completed before the system
returns to delayed pulse wiping.
:!!
m
=
o
.., HEADLIGHTS GO
l>
I
...a
o
SEE POWER J REO .!:O/iVH~""" o
OISTRIBUTlON ......- - _ . HOT AT ALL TIMES
2 1 REO
o

D 1 WHT

1 VEL
~=====1=03=::::;~· HEADLIGHT
'lOORS

HEAOLIGHT

[ZlJ lO .... __ ". HI

DIMMER
SWITCH

'h..
lT~: ]~~~~;Jll~I::"""""""""""""I.I"""""""""""""""""'l
.8LTGRN

12 ~
r--l'--------..., INSTRUMENT
I)"!:!!. :~
!TAN I (]) ~ I PRINTEO
1 TAN : INOICATOR: CIRCUIT
12 I
1 LT GRN I 1...- INSTRUMENT II
11
L_::l._=-:~s.!~__ !
11 ~
ill RH
DUAL BEAM DUAL BEAM
HEADLIGHT HEADLIGHT
LO HI HI LO '

.B BLK 150 .B BLK 150 .5 BLK 150

r
SEE GROUNO
.--~ DISTRIBUTION
1 BLK 150 1 BLK 150
JBLK 150
!!
"G20l
m
::J:I
-= Gl0l ~ Gl02
0
 HEADLIGHTS ."
;;;
~
o
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS COMPONENT LOCATION Page- Figure
• Try the following checks before doing the Sys- Fusible Link B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. RH front of engine compartment, at battery
tem Diagnosis. junction block 201-11-B
1. If the Headlights on one side are on dimly, Headlight Dimmer Switch Lower LH side of steering column 201- 6-D
check the ground on that side. CloO (34 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . .. LH side of front bulkhead, right of brake
2. If Hi Beams do not light, but the Hi Beam master cylinder 20l-11-A
Indicator lights, check the LT G RN (11) wire GI0l On LH fender, below headlamp 201-12-A
for an open (see schematic). GI02 On RH fender, below headlamp 201-12-A
G201 Behind center of liP 201- 5-C
3. If one Headlight doesn't work, check the
S103 Front lights harness, near bulkhead connector 201-13-B
Headlight, connections, and wires to the
S202 Main harness, behind liP 201- 8-A
Headlight.
S212 Main harness, behind center of dash 201- 5-C
4. If the Headlights do not turn off, replace the
Light Switch.
A: ALL HEADLIGHTS ARE A: ALL HEADLIGHTS ARE
• Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.
INOPERATIVE OR INTERMITTENT INOPERATIVE OR INTERMITTENT
(TABLE 1) (TABLE 2)
SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
Connect: TEST LAMP Connect: FUSED JUMPER
• Diagnostic steps for the symptoms listed in At: LIGHTSWITCH CONNECTOR At: LIGHTSWITCH CONNECTOR
the following table are listed after the table. (Connected) (Disconnected)
Condition: Conditions:
SYMPTOM TABLE • Light Switch: HEAD • Put a 15 amp fuse in the fused jumper
A. All Headlights are inoperative or inter- Connect • Dimmer Switch: LO
mittent Correct Result For Diagnosis
Between Connect Correct
For Diagnosis
B. Lo Beams on both sides are inoperative Between Indication
C(RED)& Test Lamp
or Hi Beams and Hi Beam Indicator are See 1
Ground lights C(RED)&D 'Headlights
inoperative. See 1
D(YEL)&' Test Lamp (YEL) light
Go to Table 2
Ground lights • Dimmer Switch: HI
• If both results are correct, go to Test B. C(RED)&D Hi Beams
See 1
1. Check Fusible Link B and RED (2) wire (YEL) Light
for an open (see Power Distribution). • If results are correct, replace the Light
Switch.
1. Check for short to ground in wiring to
Headlights. ~
I
....•
I, o
o
I
(Continued on next page) ...
HEADLIGHTS 00
l>
I
~
(Continued from previous page) CIRCUIT OPERATION o
o
Voltage is applied to the Light Switch at all
B: LO BEAMS ON BOTH SIDES ARE times. The Light Switch includes a self-reset-
N
INOPERATIVE OR HI BEAMS AND HI ting Circuit Breaker. The Circuit Breaker opens
BEAM INDICATOR ARE
when the Headlight circuit draws too much cur-
INOPERATIVE
rent. When the Circuit Breaker opens, it inter-
Connect: TEST LAMP rupts the current flow. With no current flow,
At: HEADLIGHTDIMMERSWITCH the Circuit Breaker cools off and resets auto-
CONNECTOR (Connected)
matically. When the Light Switch is in HEAD,
Conditions:
the Headlight Dimmer Switch directs voltage
• Light Switch: HEAD
to either the Lo Beams or the Hi Beams. The Hi
• Dimmer Switch: LO
Beam Indicator also receives voltage along
Connect
Correct Result For Diagnosis with the Hi Beams.
Between
(YEL) & Test Lamp
See 1
Ground lights
(TAN) & Test Lamp
See 2
Ground lights
• Dimmer Switch: HI
(LTGRN)& Test Lamp
See 2
Ground lights
• If all results are correct, check wiring to
lights for an open.
1. Check YEL (10) wire for an open.
2. Replace Headlight Dimmer Switch.

."in
:XJ
o
~ HEADLIGHT DOORS co
l>
I
~
1:::t.~IIMiIi'iI:t. .• ~.F-t"III~I!I."
'-:I'.l~'-iIf!l•• f1~J~
Elt:Ia!.tMlD •• MliO..• o
N
FU51BLE t.!!llill
LINK C LINK 0 o
.35 RED ,35 REO

~~, -'r'
i ..A<_. __ ..._ or>+< i LIGHT

HEADLIGHT
.B REO .8 REO -.------ _ ....

lYELll0

. "- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - c...',... .~ ~
i A< A< >K /K I HEADLIGHT
DOOR MODULE

SOLID STATE

-=

CLOSE CLOSE
RElAY OPEN
COil

DICl
. .
A B o g

.--
1 BLK 150
5103
,8 GRY/BLK ~ 903 .8 LT GRN/BLK. 904 .8 OK GRN • 902 ,8 GRY • 901

1 BLK 150
•
1 1 BLK 150
3 BLK
SEE GROUND B~~ ~~B
DISTRIBUTION LH HEAOLIG HT RH HEADLIGHT -n
.Gl02 DOOR MOTOR ODOR MOTOR m
-= :lJ
o
HEADLIGHT DOORS ."m
%I
o
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS COMPONENT LOCATION Page-Figure
• Try the following checks before doing the Sys- Fuse Block Behind LH side of liP 201- 5-D
temCheck. Fusible Link B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. RH front of engine compartment, at Battery
1. If the Headlight Doors do not operate, check Junction Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201-11-B
Fusible Link B and associated wiring to the Fusible Link C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. In front lights harness, right of brake master
Light Switch for an open. cylinder 201-13-B
Fusible Link D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. In front lights harness, right of brake master
2. Check that grounds G101 and G102 are
clean and tight. cylinder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201-13-B
Headlight Dimmer Switch Lower LH side of steering column 201- 6-D
3. Check Fusible Links C and D for an open.
Headlight Door Module . . . . . . . . . .. Lower LH side of front compartment. . . . . . . . .. 201-12-A
• Go to System Check for a guide to normal Headlight Door Motors Front compartment, in each headlight assembly. 201-12-A
operation. C100 (34 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. LH side of front bulkhead, right of brake master
• Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests. cylinder 201-11-A
G101 On LH fender, below headlamp 201-12-A
SYSTEM CHECK G102 On RH fender, below headlamp 201-12-A
• Use the System Check Table as a guide to S103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Front lights harness, near bulkhead connector .. 201-13-B
normal operation. S202 Main harness, behind liP 201- 8-A
• Refer to System Diagnosis for a list of symp-
toms and diagnostic steps. SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS A: NEITHER HEADLIGHT DOOR
• Do the tests listed for your symptom in the OPERATES PROPERLY
SYSTEM CHECK TABLE Symptom Table below.
Connect: TEST LAMP
ACTION NORMAL RESULT • Tests follow the Symptom Table. At: HEADLIGHT DOOR MODULE
Put Light Switch in Headlight Doors CONNECTOR C1 (Disconnected)
HEAD open and Headlights SYMPTOM TABLE Condition:
light • Light Switch: OFF
A. Neither Headlight Door operates properly
Put Light Switch in Headlights go out; Connect
B. LH Headlight Door does not operate Correct Result For Diagnosis
PARK Headlight Doors stay Between
properly.
open
C. RH Headlight Door does not operate B(RED) & Test Lamp
Put Light Switch in Headlight Doors See 1
properly. Ground lights
OFF close
E (RED) & Test Lamp
See 1
• Refer to System Diagnosis when a result is not Ground lights
normal. ;
I
••••

(Continued on next page)

2
...•
HEADLIGHT DOORS ~
..aI
(Continued from ~
previous ~ page)
~ When the Light Switch is moved to OFF, o
C: RH HEADLIGHT DOOR DOES NOT N
C(WHT)& Test Lamp OPERATE PROPERLY voltage is reversed across the Headlight Door N
See 2
Ground lights Motors and the motors run in the opposite
1. Check for mechanical binding.
C(WHT)&D Test Lamp direction to close the Headlight Doors. When
See 3 2. Remove connector C2 from the Headlight the Headlight Doors are closed, the Solid State
(BLK) lights
Door Module. (Leave Cl connected.) Con- circuitry senses that the motors are not operat-
• Light Switch: HEAD nect fused jumpers from terminal C (DK ing and ground is removed.
A (YEL)& Test Lamp G RN) of connector C2 to terminal A of the
See 4
Ground lights Module, and from terminal D (GRY) of the
• If all results are correct, replace Head- connector to terminal B of the Module. Oper-
light Door Module. ate the Headlights.
1. Check Fusible Link C or D and RED (2)
• If RH Headlight Door works, replace the
wire for an open (see schematic).
Headlight Door Module.
2. Check TAIL Fuse, Light Switch, and
WHT (103) wire for an open (see sche- • If RH Headlight Door does not work,
matic). check wiring to the motor. Replace the
motor if the wiring is OK.
3. Check BLK (150) wire for an open.
4. Refer to Headlights, Section 8A-IOO.

B: LH HEADLIGHT DOOR DOES NOT
OPERATE PROPERLY
1. Check for mechanical binding.
2. Remove connector C2 from the Headlight
Door Module. (Leave Cl connected.) Con-
nect fused jumpers from terminal A (GRY/
BLK) of connector C2 to terminal C of the
Module, and from terminal B (LT GRY/
BLK) of the connector to terminal D of the
Module. Operate the Headlights.
• If the LH Headlight Door works,
replace the Headlight Door Module.
• If LH Headlight Door does not work,
check wiring to the motor. Replace the
motor if the wiring is 0K.
CIRCUIT OPERATION
Voltage to open the Headlight Doors and to
power the Solid State circuitry is applied at all
times to the Headlight Door Module at termi-
nals B and E of connector C1. With the Light
Switch in OFF, voltage to close the Headlight
Doors is applied to terminal C of connector Cl.
With the Light Switch in HEAD, voltage to
.energize the Relay coil is applied to terminal A
of connector C1.
When the Light Switch is moved to HEAD,
voltage is applied to the Headlight Door
Motors through the relay contacts in the OPEN
position. Ground is provided for the motors
through the Solid State circuitry until the
Headlight Doors are open.
."m
::D
o
" EXTERIOR LIGHTS: TURN/HAZARD/PARK/FRONT MARKER/HIGH lEVEL STOP ex>
»
I

..-
HOT AT ALL TIMES
- - - - - - , FUSE
HOT IN RUN , BULB TEST OR START
- - - - - - , FUSE
....
HOT AT ALL TIMES

I
- - - - -.. ., FUSE
STOP HAZ : BLOCK
-'
-'
o
I TURN BtU : BLOCK I
I lMh : SLOCK FUSE ,
I FUSE I
I !.ill I
I
I loAi,iP
_ _____ ...1: o
I
I 20 AMP I i"OAMr
_____ ...1: L_
L_ -------' .S DRN 140
, .•.S.D.K.B.L.U. SACK UP
.80RN 240 ,S ORN . ._ _ _
.8 _
ORN_ _ _ _ • S204

,,,.,,.,¥.j.fiiMi'
75 LIGHTS
114il
--_. . . . .-..--.I.
___ , 140 .8oRN
A CONVENIENCE B.f.!
LIGHT
I CENTER i-E:~ BRAKE
~ flASHER FLASHER
AUDIO
ALARM.
I II: I
I -
------ l'
I SWITCH
CLOSED
MDOULEL-----' I I -..., -..., I WITH BRAKE
I !..---.»--------~_-I PEDAL
.8 PPL 16 .8 BRN
----------------------'
27
All£!
1 WHT
C
17 1 LT BlU
C500
20
DEPRESSED
S218. _ _ _•
If!
PPL ;6n--n------ ~;: ~:IO ~En A (N:: ~12a
r---1L.---~~===~~====~=~--------1 TURN· .8 WHT 17 USED) BLU 1 L T BLU 20

HAZARD ~ GI£ill
SWITCH ~B C500
ASSEMBL V 1 WHT 1-7- :
WHT P
.8 BRN
L--::----f-----...,===:::;) 8 LT BLU 20 CONTINUED
---+----+:-::-::---1"=::-:~~-+--..., TURN 2!! ON C500
.OFF
RIGHT C IC305 PAGES
-----, 110·1 AND
I
.S LT BLU H LTBLU I 110·2

14
..........~(~..~................~::::::::::~::::~-~-~-::-~-~-~-~-~-~~-~-~-~-~-::-~-~'_~_~~~~~::::j .8LTBlU 820
C210 14 OK BLU 15 HIGH A

-------~----.-'+" ~~:' CD
.8LTBLU

14

r':-r~-------IINSTRJ~:~~rl;- - - - - ~::~~~;- ~Ol- -----~~::~:; ~~: ~:~11:100

- - -
.8 OK BlU 15

r--l'--------.,
.8 VEL
•

~
18 GRN
CONTINUED ON C500

PAGE 110·1 AND

110·2
1----.
I 1,lc
UGHT B I
--.8 BLK 150

S313
50

I
CV - LH
I CLUSTeR
--"-
_ _~.5 BRN
LIGHT
9 ----
LIGHT
:A
CV :~
!l.Jj
INSTRUMHJT .8 BLKD 305

I
l!1!!.!'!
I PRINTED -- -- I
, l!!..!lll I, PRINTED • --

1
I I .8LTBLU A B B .8BRN .BBRN ABB .BDKBLU CIRCUIT . . 8 BLK 150
I INDICATOR I CIRCUIT S101. C ) . S102
I ' ~ INSTRUMENT II ,: 1 INDICATOR I

III
- 15
~5 - ~ INSTRUMENT I SEE GROUND ~ _ _• Ell

III
I 14 5 LT BLU .5 BRN OK BLU
I'-_ PANEL
_ _______ JI L_~_!.A~~ ___ J DISTRIBUTION

11 15 C3 ~.8 BLK 150

~
I
~ 1:-
LH FRONT RH FRONT
.5 BLK 150 PARK/TURN PiiRi<fTijRN .5 BLK 150 H C201

B!!..--~
SEE GROUND
I LIGHT
~ ~ARK
LIGHT
.--~ 1.
1----.
S212 SEE GROUND 8 BLK
DISTRIBUTION TURN PARK TURN-- DISTRIBUTION

3BLK
I 150

-!- G201
·. 5 BLK 150

SEE GROUND . - _ . S103

DISTRIBUTION ...,.., ~
.5 BLK 150
3 BLK
I 150

... G201 3 BLK 1150

~
"T1
~ lBLK.150
. . . _~ Gl0l
lBLK.150
~ Gl02 ... ~
iii
:ll
o
" EXTERIOR LIGHTS: TAIL/STOP/TURN :!!
m
::c
SEM06El~- o
CONTINUED FROM C210
PAGE 110·0
CONTINUED FROM S218

I
PAGE 110·0
~

llTBlU\20
" 1 VEL
.8 VEL V
H71
18 .8 OK GRN 19
~ _ C500

J9

(NOT USED)-- C500

18

10K GRN .,9

1 VEL 1 OK GRN

18 19

'_., t ~ RH TAll/ ,RH TAIL!

@ "lHTAll/ ' lHTAIL!

@ -- @
'co.

~ )STOP.TURN Ii )~RN , STilP.TUR STOP·TURN N

~ LIGHT , LIGHT , liGHT
..., LIGHT
TAil STOP/TURN TAil STOP, TAil STOP/TURN TAil STOP/TUIIN

,8 BlK 150 .8 BlK 150 .8 BlK 150 .8 BlK 150

1 BlK B 1 BlK

S401 • ssi• 150 •I S403

"- 150
'--
-.
SEe GROUND
DISTRIBUTION I
I
3 BlK 150
•
,SEE GROUND
!OISTRIBOtlON
,

00
l>
I
....Jo
....Jo

~ G400
o
....•
EXTERIOR LIGHTS: TAIL/STOP/TURN 00
l>
GTMODELS I
~

~_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~A~
CONTINUED FROM_
PAGE _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~
_ _110·0
o
N

v
8VELl18 r-
I I I BLU 20 T
.8 DKGRN 19

,~~ ~:--------------------------------------~::~~~------------------------------------~:~:~ ~"

1 VEL 10K GRN

18 19
.8 LT BLU 20 .8 LT BLU 20 .8 LT BLU 20 .8 LT BLU 20

~ LHTAI l! ~LHTAILI ~RHTAll! ~ RHTAIl! RH

~ STOPLIGHT ~STDPLIGHT ~SToPLiGHT ~ STOPLIGHT TURN
LIGHTS
TAIL STOP TAIL STOP 'T AIL STOP TAIL STOP

,8BLK 150 .8 BLK 150 ,8 BLK 150 .8 BLK 150 .8 BLK 150 .8 BLK 150 .B BLK 150 ,BBLK 150

"V
~--------~,--~------.----------~--------~
lBLK lBLK

I~ 150 I~ 150
,.. _ _ J
I I 1
L-.. . . SEE GROUND
- - . . . . DISTRIBUTION . . .- -
.J SEE GROUND 2 BLK 150
DISTRIBUTION

,8 BLK
'T1
150
m
:c
o
'0 EXTERIOR LIGHTS: TAIL/STOP/TURN/REAR MARKER/LICENSE !!
m
%J
SEMODELS o
HOT AT ALL TIMES

!:!.Q!!I
SWITCH

.8 BRN 9
.8 BRN 9
-
•
/~
.8 BRN
~

9
-
9
8 BRN
l
C401
A

.8 BRN 9
8 BRN

'l, 1-

N 9
.8 BRN

.8 BRN 9 .8 BRN 9 .8 BRN 9 .8 BRN

CD~
B

([) '!!.!!(D
A •• R A

CD
RHTAILI ~
lHTAlll f'l:\!J!.!.8!l ~
([)
I
~ STOP·TURN. TAil STOP·TURN ~
~
~LlGHT !:!Q!ill ~ ~
B"
LIGHT
--
~ LIGHTS
A A
Li'G'HT h!ill!li B"
LIGHT
--
STOP· ",TAll- STOP- "'TAll
TURN TURN STOP'fTAll STOP· TAil
TURN TURN
.8 BlK. 150 .8 BlK 1 150 .8 BlK 1150 .8 BlK 150 .88lK 150
.8 BlK 1 150 .8BlK 1150 .8BlK1150 .8 BlK .150
.8BlK .150

1 BlK 1 BlK

150 ~
SeE GROUND
OISTRI BUTION (X)
»
3 BlK 1150
I
-'
-'
o
~~ eN
 Q)
." EXTERIOR LIGHTS: TAIL/STOP/REAR MARKER/LICENSE »
I
GTMODELS -a
HOT AT ALL TIMES -a
o
.J:>

H:I..,.,P.••• hi .8 o RAN 1 240

I ?K •. ""... >K i 1!.Jili!

~

SEE liGHT .8 B:N 19

SWITCH ~--.El!
DETAilS .8 BRN19
F7 ~

.3 BRNT9
~ .8BRN ~
• i. 1. •

8 BRN
-
"ICD ' CD'1 •
.8 BRN • 9 .B BRN • 9 .8 BRN

.8 BAN 19 .8 BAN

CD --
A~ LH REAR
~ " llillihl
CQ) " ~ CDA •.

CQ)
I I
~~AHTAILI
MARKER ill!f ~ ll.2!!
LIGHT LI GHTS ~
B~ STOP "TAIL -- STOP YTAIL AY
B!.!.!lli! ~
STOP. TAIL
STOP TAIL

.8 BLK' ISO 8 BL:lso .8 BlK 150 8 BLK 150 .8 BLK. ISO

.8BLK. ISO .8 BLK • ISO
.8BLK .150

.
.I•••••••••••••••••••••••••••• T
..-
I~ IBlK
150
.,r.•••••••••
• S407
l.B.L.K••••••••••••
150
~
A-.' .
I
L__ ~ SEE GAOUNO
DISTRIBUTION .8 BLK

150

."iii
::0
o
EXTERIOR LIGHTS: REAR PONTIAC EMBLEM "T1
m
GT MODELS ::D
o

iii·'''lh''V'
- - - - - - , FUSE
FAN E I BLOCK
FUSE I
iiAMI' I
------..1
.BBRN 250

SEE FUSE
BLOCK OETAILS

.8 BRN/WHT 250

5405

•
.8 BRNI WHT 250 .B BRNI WHT 250 .8 BRNI WHT 250 .8 BRN/WHT 250 .8 BRN/WHT 250

.8 BRNI
WHT

! LH
B~
r-L~~1~
!.!! !!!! !!!!
([) TAIL
( [ ) TAIL
I I BLOWER
IL _____.JIRElAY f!\TAIL f'!\ TAIL
LIGHT . ~ \.;zJLIGHT \.:V !.!Jlli!
I I

.8 BLK 150 .8 BLK 150 .8BLK 150 .8 BLK 150

J.~----------------------.
. -____ -'l§lli
..----------------------.. ex)
l>
lBLKI150
SEe GROUND I
OlST'l!80TION ~-------. 5403
.8 BLK 2 BLK Iill ~
~

o
• 150 \
~~
EXTERIOR LIGHTS co
:J>
......
I

TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS COMPONENT LOCATION Page-Figure o

Turn
1. If none of the Turn Lights flash:
• Check the Turn BIU Fuse by operating
the Back Up Lights.
• Check the Turn Flasher, the Turn-Haz-
ard Switch Assembly, and related Wir-
ing.
2. If only one Turn Light does not flash:
• Check for a faulty bulb.
• Check that its ground is clean and
tight.
Hazard
1. If none of the lights flash in HAZARD:
• Check the Stop HAZ Fuse by operating
the Stop Lights.
• Check the Hazard Flasher, the Turn-
Hazard Switch Assembly, and related
wiring.
2. If only one Hazard Light does not flash:
• Check for a faulty bulb.
• Check that its ground is clean and
tight.
Stop
If both Stop Lights do not go on:
• Check the Stop HAZ Fuse by operating
the Hazard Lights.
• Check that G400 is clean and tight.
• Check the Brake Switch, the Turn-Haz-
ard Switch Assembly, and related wir-
ing.
Brake Switch ....................
Convenience Center ............ :.
Engine Blower Relay .............
Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Turn-Hazard Switch Assembly. . . ..
Turn Flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
CIOO (34 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
C201 (8 cavities) .................
C210 (11 cavities) ...... . . . . .. . . . ..
C305 (4 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
C401 (2 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
C500 (34 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
G 101 ..........................
G 102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
G201 ..........................
G400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
S101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
S102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
S103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
S104 ......................... "
S204. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
S211 ...........................
S212 ...........................
S215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
S218. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
S311 ...........................
S313 ...........................
S401. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
S402. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
S403. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Top ofhrakepedal support .................. 201-10-A
Behind RH side of liP ...................... 201-14-B
RH side oftrunk ........................... 201- 9-C
Behind LH side of liP ..................... . 201- 5-D
201-11-C
At top of steering column .................. .
On LH steering column bracket ............. . 201- 6-B
LH side of front bulkhead, right of brake master
cylinder ................................ . 201-11-A
LH shroud above center access hole .......... . 201-16-A
Lower RH side of steering column ........... . 201- 6-D
Behind dash, near LH shroud ............... . 201- 9-A
Taped to rear lights harness, to right of license
plate lamps ............................. . 201-13-A
Engine compartment, near battery ........... . 201-11-B
On LH fender, below headlamp .............. . 201-12-A
On RH fender, below headlamp .............. . 201-12-A
Behind center of liP ....................... . 201- 5-C
RH rear of engine compartment ............. . 201- 9-B
Front lights harness, LH side offront
compartment ........................... . 201-13-B
Front lights harness, LH side offront
compartment ........................... . 201-13-B
Front lights harness, near bulkhead connector .. 201-13-B
Front lights harness, LH side offront
compartment ........................... . 201-13-B
Main harness, to right of steering column ..... . 201- 8-A
Main harness, behind RH side of liP .......... . 201- 5-C
Main harness, behind center of dash .......... . 201- 5-C
Main harness, behind liP, near front of console .. 201-17-A
Main harness, behind liP ................... . 201-17-A
Crosscar harness, LH side of liP ............. . 201-16-A
201- 9-A
Body harness, under LH front seat ........... .
Rear lights harness, LH side of back panel. .... . 201-13-A
Rear lights harness, LH side of back panel. .... . 201-13-A ."
Rear lights harness, RH side of back panel. .... . 201-13-A m
::u
0
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
High Level Stop Light
If the High Level Stop Light does not come
on:
• Check the Stop HAZ Fuse by operating
the Hazard Flasher.
• Check the Brake Switch and related
wiring.
• Check that G20l is clean and tight.
Front Park and Front Marker
1. If none of the Park or Marker Lights come
on:
• Check the Tail Fuse.
• Check the Light Switch and related wir-
ing.
2. If just the LH Front Park and Marker
Lights do not come on:
• Check power and ground to the bulb.
3. If just the RH Front Park and Marker
Lights don't come on:
• Check power and ground to the bulb.
License, Tail, or Rear Marker
1. If none of the License, Tail, or Rear Marker
Lights come on:
• Check the Tail Fuse.
• Check that G400 is clean and tight.
• Check that the Front Park/Front
Marker Lights come on.
- If they do go on, check connectors
belowC500.
- If they do not go on, check the Light
Switch and related wiring.
"T1
m
::t.I
o
COMPONENT LOCATION Page-Figure
S404 ........................... Rear lights harness, RH side of back panel. . . . .. 201-13-A
S405 ........................... Rear lights harness, RH rear of car ............ 201-13-A
S406 ........................... Rear lights harness, behind RH stop lights ..... 201-13-A
S407 ........................... Rear lights harness, behind RH stop lights ..... 201-13-A
(For GT Models Only) same time. When the switch connected to the
If no Rear Pontiac Emblem Lights go on: YEL wire closes, the LH Stop-Turn Light oper-
ates and the LH Turn Indicator lights. When
• Check the Fan E Fuse. the switch connected to the LT BLU wire
• Check that ground G400 is clean and closes, the LH Front Turn Light and the LH
tight. Turn Indicator light. They begin to flash when
• Check that the Coolant Fan goes on. current heats up the timing element in the Turn
Flasher, and it repeatedly opens and closes the
• If the Coolant Fan goes on, check the circuit.
wiring below C500.
The RH Turn Lights operate in a similar way
• If it does not go on, check the related when the Turn Right Switches are closed to the
wiring back to the fuse. right.
CIRCUIT OPERATION (For SE Models Only)
Stop Lights If the Brake Switch is closed at the same
Voltage is applied to the Stop Lights through time as the Turn Left Switches, the LH Turn
Lights continue to operate through the Turn
the Stop HAZ Fuse, Brake Switch, and the
Turn-Hazard Switch Assembly. When the brake Flasher. The RH Stop-Turn Light at the rear
glows steadily as long as the Brake Switch is
pedal is depressed, the Brake Switch will close
and the Stop Lights will operate. closed.
Turn Lights (For GT Models Only)
Battery voltage is applied to the LH Stop- If the Brake Switch is closed at the same time
Turn Light through the Turn BIU Fuse, Turn as the LH Turn Lights, the Brake Lights
remain on. The Turn Lights continue to operate
Flasher, Hazard Switch, and the Turn-Left co
independently of the Brake Lights.
Switches in the Turn-Hazard Switch Assembly. l>
Both Turn Left Switches close to the left at the I
~
~
o
(Continued on next page)
EXTERIOR LIGHTS co
»

(Continued from previous page) marker bulb on that side will light since it is now
grounded through the Turn Lights.
-
I

o
Hazard Lights
(For SE Models Only) License. Tail and Rear Marker
With the Hazard Switches in the HAZARD Voltage is applied through the TAIL Fuse to
position, voltage for all lights is supplied the Light Switch at all times. With the Light
through the Hazard Flasher. The Stop-Turn Switch in PARK or HEAD, voltage is applied to
Lights will flash repeatedly. With the Brake all of the lights in this circuit.
depressed, the Hazard Lights will not flash.
(For GT Models Only)
(For GT Models Only)
For the Rear Pontiac Emblem Lights, with
With the switches in the HAZARD position, the Ignition Switch in RUN voltage is applied
voltage is supplied to the Turn Lights through through the Fan E Fuse to the Rear Pontiac
the Hazard Flasher. The Turn Lights flash Emblem Lights. The lights will remain on as
repeatedly. The Brake Lights remain off. long as the Ignition Switch is in the RUN posi-
tion, displaying the Pontiac Emblem.
Front Marker Lights
The Front Marker Lights receive voltage High Level Stop Light
from either the Front Park Lights or the Front Voltage is applied at all times from the Stop
Turn Lights. HAZ Fuse to the Brake Switch. When the brake
With the Park Lights on, battery voltage is pedal is depressed, the High Level Stop Light
supplied through the BRN wires to both Front comes on.
Marker Lights. The path to ground for the
marker bulb is through the Turn Lights. The
small Marker Light bulbs light up, but not the
larger turn bulbs.
When the Turn Lights are on, but not the
Park Lights, battery voltage is applied through
the LT BLU wires to the Marker Lights. They
glow since they are grounded through the entire
Park Lights System. As before, the small
marker bulbs light up, but not all park bulbs.
If both the Park Lights and either the LH or
RH Turn Lights are on at the same time, the
."
marker bulb for that side will not light up. With iii
battery voltage on both sides of a bulb, it will not :u
o
glow. With the Turn Lights off, however, the
~ BACK UP LIGHTS 00
l>
I

HOT IN RUN, BULB TEST OR START HOT IN RUN , BULB TEST OR START
- - - - - - , FUSE
TURN BIU : BL OCK
.. -
I
- - - - - - , FU SE
~ :BL OCK o
I
FUSE I I I
I
i"OAMP : I 10 AMP :
-----' l ---- -'
.8 OK BLU
.8 OK BLU .8 OK BLU
' - - - - - - . EXTERIOR LIGHTS: TURN , _ _ _ _• EXTERIOR LIGHTS : TURN
75 .8 OK BLU 75 75

AUTOMATIC MANUAL
TRANSAXLE
",,,:{:- Cl C500 TRANSAXLE

SELECTOR BACKUP
N

--L
10
0 SWI TCH
(MOUNT ~ O ON
TRANSAXLE)
[ZJ -
LlG HTS SWITCH
CLOSED IN
REVERSE

E
.8 LT GR~124
.8 LT GRN

.8LTGRNIM"
El
24
C500
.8LT GRN
El

F9
1;.;-C500

C500
F9 C500
.8LTGRN~~ .8 LT GRN}4
\

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE MANUAL TRANSAXLE

.8LT GRN 124
~______________________________________________~A~________________________________________~
SE MODEL GT MOOEL

Jl.~_____ ·2:·L.T.G.RN
____ ' 8.L.T.'~~ Jl.~_____ .' :.L.T.G.RN"_ _ _'8.L. . '~'

r!\ ~~CK UP r!\ :~CK UP r!\ ~~C K UP r!\ :~CK UP

\::?vJ LIGH T SEE GROUND \::?vJ LIGHT \::?vJ LI GHT SEE GROUND \:J) LIGHT
DISTRIBUTION DISTRIBUTION

.8 BLK 150

r..l
T T
L.,
.8 BLK 150
.8 BL K 150

T
r..l
T
L.,
.8 BLK 150

~ •
/ 1 BLK C401
Cl
1 BLK ,
•
I
5403
~./
I
1 BLK ,

-1--
5407 . . . SEE GROUND

~
150 B 150 150 OISTRIBUTION
_ _ ~ SEE GROUND ~_ _. .
1 BLK 150
3 BLK 150
OISTR I BUTION
L _~ SEE GROUND
DISTRIBUTION
~_._

I--
5403

!!
I
~G400 2BLK 150
.8 BLK
m
. . . . . . . . . . . . .~G400 :ll
150 o
BACK UP LIGHTS "":a
m
o
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS COMPONENT LOCATION Page-Figure
• Try the following checks before doing the Back Up Light Switch Toprearoftransaxle 201- 2-B
System Check. Fuse Block. Behind LH side of liP 201- 5-D
1. Check the TURN BIU Fuse by operating the Gear Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . .. LH rear of engine, top of trans axle . . . . . . . . . . .. 201- 2-B
Turn Lights. C401 (2 cavities) Taped to rear lights harness, to right of license
plate lamps 201-13-A
2. Check that ground G400 is clean and tight.
C500 (34 cavities) Engine compartment, near battery 201-11-B
3. If only one Back Up Light does not operate, G400 RH rear of engine compartment 201- 9-B
check the bulb, socket and related wiring. S401. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Rear lights harness, LH side of back panel. . . . .. 201-13-A
• Go to System Check for a guide to normal S403 Rear lights harness, RH side of back panel. 201-13-A
operation. S407 Rear lights harness, behind RH stop lights 201-13-A
• Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.

SYSTEM CHECK SYMPTOM TABLE (Continued from previous column)

• Use the System Check Table as a guide to A. Back Up Lights do not operate • If voltages are correct, check the bulbs,
normal operation. B. Back Up Lights stay on sockets, LT GRN (24) and BLK (150) wires
• Refer to System Diagnosis for a list of symp- and related connectors (see schematic).
toms and diagnostic steps. 1. Check the DK BLU (75) wire and the
A: BACK UP LIGHTS DO NOT OPERATE TURN BIU Fuse.
SYSTEM CHECK TABLE Measure: VOLTAGE 2. Adjust or replace the Gear Selector Switch
At: CONNECTOR C500 (Connected) (for automatic) or Back Up Lights Switch
ACTION NORMAL RESULT
Conditions: (for manual) as necessary.
Turn the Ignition Back Up Lights are • Ignition Switch: RUN
Switch to RUN, and off • Gear Shift: REVERSE
move the Gear Shift Measure Correct For
to PARK or Between Voltage Diagnosis
NEUTRAL
Move the Gear Shift RH and LH Back Up C1 (DK BLU)
Battery See 1
to REVERSE Lig-hts come on & Ground

Move the Gear Shift Back Up Lights go F9 (LT GRN)

Battery See 2
to NEUTRAL off & Ground
(Continued in next column)
• Refer to System Diagnosis when a result is
not normal.
~
SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS I
...&
(Continued on next page) ...&
• Diagnostic steps for the symptoms listed in
the following table are listed after the table. ..
N
BACK UP LIGHTS ~

(Continued from previous page)

......I
N
N
B: BACK UP LIGHTS STAY ON
Disconnect connector C500. Put the Ignition
Switch in RUN and the Gear Shift in PARK or
NKUTRAL.
• If Back Up Lights go off, adjust/replace the
Gear Selector Switch (for automatic) or the
Back Up Lights Switch (for manual).
• If the Back Up Lights remain on, check the
bulbs, sockets, and LT GRN (24) wire for a
short to Battery.

CIRCUIT OPERATION
With the Ignition Switch in RUN, BULB
TEST, or START, voltage is applied through
the TURN BIV Fuse to the Gear Selector
Switch (with automatic transaxle), or to the
Back Up Lights Switch (with manual trans-
axle). Whenever the Gear Selector Lever is
shifted to REVERSE, the Gear Selector Switch
or the Back Up Lights Switch closes, providing
voltage to the Back Up Lights and causing the
Back Up Lights to light.
.., INTERIOR LIGHTS: CIGAR LIGHTER, CLOCK AND TRUNK LIGHT

HOT AT ALL TIMES HOT AT ALL TIMES

po
I
---------,
IAl.f..IW.
FUSE
I - ,,.~---------'1FUSE -- o
I 25 AMP I BLOCK ,~ I BLOCK
I 1--- I FUSE I--
I --
I SEE FUSE I
L _________ '"I,
t __ !.'!~!!!~I~J I ZSAMP

1 ORN/ OK BlU 340

lORN TRUNK .. lORN/OK BlU S125
lORN
~-_. . . HORN
40
340 lORN/OK BlU 1
RELEASE "'<~~"""'_=--II!!!:ii-=a.~~E_""'~_-=:;_!:a-=:;_~-=:;_!:a~_!!:i1

B TC201
340

.80RN

.8 ::U:~"~--4.0---~.~ ~~~~R lORN/OK BlU 340

.80RN
lORN 40 .80RN 40 _ _II!I!I__."~ lOCKS

o 40 H9 C500
(WHT) 0
lORN 40 lORN 40 .80RNI4.I
C200
A ~ (WHT) I F (BlK)i A .50RN POWER f'!\!.!!!!!L!L
A C208
.80RN 40 - ., REMOTE \£J LIGHT
C 40 MIRRORS

lORN

r 1 40

..,1RADIOI
.80RN

f'!\ lH
40

f'!\ RH
.80RN 40 r-----I---------------------l~~~~s
~ J
(])~ (])
READING I 1
I MODULE 1
(])~ cID
IT
F8ll~
.8WHT 15:-

~
CIGAR \
I ---
--I~ I 1,!!!.Q!lli
\£J COURTESY \£J \
L __ .IJ - -
I CLOCK

~ r\ t\
-
.I
I
G .8 WHT 156
~
.8 WHT 156

~ ____f=~________~-------~
.8WHT
O~ 156 _
.5WHT/ORN \ 156

(WH~
IIIIIIIII!!IIII C200
.8 BlK 150 .8BlK 150

SEE GROUND
.8 WHT 156 .8 WHT 156

A .8 WHT
. w"w.. ~
SWITCH
C ~
WHT~· :;;~;:::===lH==·8=W=H=T" CLii"SEii
DISTRIBUTION
:-:~R:;l--l PANEL·INTERIOR C201 156
.8 S;';, 156 !lli WITH
I S I .!J2.!ill !6----.....J HOOD
1
I
- lON
- --
,I CONTROL
DOOR DOOR
.8 BlK 150 OPEN

..iii_----.-
JI
C~250
I
1_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
j'A'M8 .iAMB

~
S212 .8 BlK By S'WiTCH SWiTCH .8 BlK150

S213 .~----li _ ___ _ CLii"SEii ~CUiSEii llil

SEe GROUND
~ DISTRIBUTION
3~1'50 150 3BlKI'50 150 - -
WITH
DOOR _
WITH
DOOR
3 BlK 150
."
OPEN OPEN ... G202
~~ ~§l!D iii
~ -=- -= :lJ
o
.., INTERIOR LIGHTS: CONSOLE AND UNDERHOODI !!
m
:xJ
o
HOT AT ALL TIMES
...
I
- - - - - - - , FUSE
I
I
TAIL I BLOCI<
I FUSE I
I 20AMP :
L ------..1

.8 CRN 240

SEE LIGHT
-
S211 - - - - - - -. . . SWITCH DETAILS

.8 BRN

.8 BRN .8 BRN 9 .8 BRN C21C100

.8 BRN 9

f'!:\ UNOERHOOO
~~NSOLE
CIGAR
([) ~ ([)
~~

l"':~:;:"
LIGHT

.5 BLK 150
".CO .35 BLK 150

.8 BLKJWHT 156

..------------~~.--------------~
/
..~ S213

~---'
SEE GROUND 00
DISTRIBUTION »

~
HOODAJAR
3 BLK 150
SWITCH I
. ----- , CLOSED WITH
_ _ HOOD OPEN

-- -- .....
INTERIOR LIGHTS
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS
Cigar Lighter, Clock, Underhood Light,
and Trunk Light
1. If the Cigar Lighter, RadiolDigital Clock,
or the Courtesy Lights don't work:
• Check the BAT Fuse by operating the
Horn.
2. If just the Courtesy Lights don't work:
• Check that the Door Jamb Switches
ground to the car body.
3. If the Underhood Light doesn't work:
• Check the TAIL Fuse by turning on
the Parking Lights. See Fuse Block
Details.
4. If the Dome/Reading Lights or the Trunk
Lights don't work:
• Check the CTSY/LID Fuse.
• Check the Door Jamb Switches, the
Trunk Ajar Switch, or G202 to make
sure they are clean and tight.
CIRCUIT OPERATION
Cigar lighter, Clock, Underhood Light, and
Trunk light
Voltage is applied at all times to Fusible Link
B, which feeds the Light Switch. See Fuse
Block Details. When the Light Switch is turned
to PARK or HEAD, voltage is applied to the
U nderhood Light. When the hood is raised, the
Underhood Light turns on.
Voltage is applied at all times through the
BAT Fuse to the Cigar Lighter, the RadiolDig-
ital Clock, and the Courtesy Lights. The Cigar
Lighter operates when it is connected to
00
»
I
.....
.....
COMPONENT LOCATION Page-Figure ~
Dome Light Module. . . . . . . . . . . . .. At dome lamp, in roof
Fuse Block ...................... Behind LH side of liP ...................... 201- 5-D
Fusible Link B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. RH front of engine compartment, at Battery
Junction Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201-11-B
Hood Aj ar Switch ............... . Front compartment, center of front bulkhead ... 201-14-C
Trunk Ajar Switch .............. . LH side of engine compartment
CIOO (34 cavities) ............... . LH side of front bulkhead, right of brake master
cylinder ................................. 201-11-A
C200 (16 cavities) ................ LH shroud ahead of center access hole ......... 201- 5-D
C201 (8 cavities) ................. LH shroud above center access hole ........... 201-16-A
C208 (2 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Center of dash, behind radio
C209 (2 cavities) ................. Behind LH side of liP, near shroud ............ 201- 6-A
C250 (4 cavities) ................. Center of rear bulkhead, in engine compartment. 201-13-C
C500 (34 cavities) ................ Engine compartment, near battery ........... ; 201-ll-B
G201 .......................... Behind center of liP ........................ 201- 5-C
G202 .......................... Between seats, near rear bulkhead ............ 201- 5-A
S125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Main harness, behind LH side of liP, near Fuse
Block ................................... 201- 5-D
S202 ........................... Main harness, behind liP .................... 201- 8-A
S210 ........................... Main harness, behind RH side ofI/P ........... 201- 5-C
S211. .......................... Main harness, behind RH side ofI/P ........... 201- 5-C
S212 ........................... Main harness, behind center of dash. . . . . . . . . .. 201- 5-C
S213 ........................... Main harness, behind rear bulkhead grommet ... 201-17-A
S303 ........................... Crosscar harness, above steering column ....... 201-16-A
S304. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Crosscar harness, above steering column. . . . . .. 201-16-A
ground by pressing the lighter into its socket.
The Courtesy Lights operate when either the
Panel-Interior Lights Control, or the Door
Jamb Switches on both doors close to ground.
Voltage is applied at all times through the
CTSY /LID Fuse to the Trunk Light and C200
to the Dome/Reading Lights. The Dome/Read-
ing Lights operate when they are connected to
ground through the Panel-Interior Lights "TI
iii
Control or the Door Jamb Switches. XI
o
." INTERIOR LIGHTS DIMMING 00
>
I

HOT AT ALL TIMES

r- ------,
I TAil
FUSE
: BLOCK
: f!:!g" I
o
I 20 AMP :
L ____ _ _ .J

.80RN 240

~~==;;;;;,.---?~-...,~
SWITCH

.8 BRN

p----------------------•• S211
iiiie _ _ _ ... SEE LIGHT
SWITCH DETAilS

.........:T-----...,..,..., PANEL . INTERIOR

LIGHTS CONTROL
.8 BRN
DIM

REMOTE
OIMMER
.8 OK GRNIWHT (TRANSISTOR)

944

"T1
m
jJ
o
 ."iii
:D
o

.8 OK GRN 44

r--::1-----
I
I ------, ~
FUSE
I BLOCK
FUSE
:---
I s AMP I
•••_ _ LP
I _ .JI

(BRN)

.8 GRY

.5 GRY .35 GRY

ill.!. ~
GAGE
ilLUMINATION A5
• r"""f"-l
AUDIO
I
I
I
CD)..I I
I
ALARM I I
MODULE I Y I
.5
GRY
.5
GRY
L_'lIt_J
4
.5 GRY .5 GRY
.35
INSTRUMENT
GRY
.35 GRY .35 .8 GRY CLUSTER
GRY PRINTED

EJI.
DEFOGGER
CONTROL '
SHIFT
A
r-If'-----. AlC
3~I:lS
__ L_~lll
rT---l---i---r--I---i-1 7 CIRCUIT .35
150

r-l-----j CD ~
LIGHT
I A
I ~PANELJHEAD
:CONTROL BLK
C211

I~
\:J,)
PANEL I
, (AUTOMATIC
ONLY)
I \:J,) LIGHT
Y
L_~ I
I
!CD~~CDCDCD! H

Lr ~__~ ~ ~ rJ
LIGHT I I
I
Y J
L~
I
J
I

-
DEFOGGER C .8 BLK 150
TIMER·
01 .35 BLK 150 .8 BlK .150
.35 BLK 150 • 11 4T£l
RELAY .8 BLK

I
150 150

3 BLK
,5 BlK
.35 BlK .150 I~
-
S213 _
--.......,~___ 150
1- ~
I
~ SEE GROUND ••••. -'" .5 BlK
.8 BLK • 150
3 BLK .150 - DISTRIBUTION •••...- 3 BlK
~
150
""'-I
~ G203 .G202 • G201
-"
INTERIOR LIGHTS DIMMING co
l>

TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS COMPONENT LOCATION Page-Figure I

....a
_ Try the following checks before doing the Defogger Timer Relay " On brake pedal support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201- 5-E
....a
•••••
System Diagnosis. Fuse Block. Behind LH side of IfP 201- 5-D
N
1. Check the TAIL Fuse and ORN (240)wire by Remote Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Below center of IfP, near steering column support
observing the Park Lights. Refer to Section ....................................... 201- 6·E
8A-110 ifthe Park Lights do not operate. C211 (8 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Behind center of IfP, near radio
C247 (12 cavities) Center console, behind radio 201-14-A
2. Check the INST Fuse.
G201 Behind center ofI/P 201- 5-C
3. If only one light does not operate, check the G202 Between seats, near rear bulkhead 201- 5-A
bulb and wiring to the suspect light (see sche- G203 On RH steering column support 201· 5-F
matic). 8209. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Main harness, right of steering column. . . . . . . .. 201- 5-C
8211. Main harness, behind RH side ofI/P 201- 5-C
4. If the Instrument Panel Lights do not oper-
8212. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Main harness, behind center of dash. . . . . . . . . .. 201- 5-C
ate, check GRY (8) and BLK (150) wires.
Check the Printed Circuit and the bulbs if 8213 Main harness, behind rear bulkhead grommet. .. 201-17-A
the GRY (8) and BLK (150) wires are OK.
A: INTERIOR LIGHTS DIMMING TEST A: INTERIOR LIGHTS DIMMING TEST
- Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.
(TABLE 1) (TABLE 2)
- Do the test below if none of the Panel Lights Connect: A TEST LAMP
Connect: A TEST LAMP
operate. but the Park Lights operate. At: FUSE BLOCKHOT SIDE OF INST FUSE At: PANEL-INTERIORLIGHTS CONTROL
CAVITY CONNECTOR (Connected)
Conditions: Conditions:
-INST Fuse: REMOVED -light Switch: PARK
-light Switch: PARK - Dimming Control: BRIGHT
• Dimming Control: BRIGHT Connect Correct For
Connect Correct For Between Result Diagnosis
Between Result Diagnosis
D (BRN) Test Lamp
See 1
INST & Ground lights
Test Lamp
Fuse A (DK GRN/ Test Lamp
Cavity lights See 1 See 2
brightly WHT) & Ground lights
& Ground
• Slowly adjust dimming control to DIM
• Slowly adjust dimming control to DIM
A (DK GRN/
INST Test
WHT) Lamp dims See 2
Fuse Test Lamp & Ground
Cavity See 1
dims
& Ground • If all the results are correct, go to
Table 3.
• If all the results are correct, check GRY
1. Check BRN (9) wire for an open (see sche-
(8) wire for an open. :!!
matic). m
1. Go to Table 2. ::D
2. Replace Panel-Interior Lights Control. o
INTERIOR LIGHTS DIMMING :!!
m
::r:J
o
A: INTERIOR LIGHTS DIMMING TEST CIRCUIT OPERATION
(TABLE 3) Battery voltage is applied at all times
Connect: A TEST LAMP through the TAIL Fuse to the Light Switch.
At: REMOTE DIMMER CONNECTOR When the Light Switch is in PARK or HEAD,
(Connected) battery voltage is applied to the dimming con-
Conditions: trol in the Panel- Interior Lights Control and to
• Light Switch: PARK
the Remote Dimmer. Adjusting the dimming
• Dimming Control: BRIGHT
control changes the voltage applied to terminal
Connect Correct For B of the Remote Dimmer. As the voltage at
Between Result Diagnosis
terminal B increases, the Remote Dimmer
D (BRN) Test Lamp increases the current flow to the bulbs and the
See 1 bulbs become brighter. As the voltage at termi-
& Ground lights
B (DK GRN/ Test Lamp nal B decreases, the Remote Dimmer decreases
See 2 the current flow to the bulbs and the bulbs get
WHT) & Ground lights
dimmer.
C (DK GRN) Test Lamp
See 3
& Ground lights
• Slowly adjust dimming control to DIM
C (DK GRN) Test Lamp
See 3
& Ground dims
• If all the results are correct, check the
DK GRN (44) wire for an open (see
schematic ).
1. Check BRN (9) wire for an open (see sche-
matic)
2. Check DK GRN/WHT (944) wire for
an open (see schematic).
3. Replace Remote Dimmer.

00
»
I
...a.
...a.
••••••
w
-" POWER WINDOWS: A31 ex)
l>

-
I
~
N

...-1------'
I
I
I
I
WOO
CiiiCUIT
---
BREAKER
,-- FUSE
I BLOCK
I
I
o
o
I
L._ _'j8"AMp ..JI

3 PNK )76

(Bl~

(BlU)
2 PNK
lP
~C200

76

":+ UP
~ "'J
~- . I","'' ' '~' I d"LGJ
, "
ON
-
-
WINDOW SWITCH
UP ON
WINDOW SWITCH

RHFRONTPOWER
J',

BY c'rI o'rl D'-' BY C

2 BlK • 150

2 OK BlUIWHT .,66 2TANI167

G ~-------X~ £ill

2 DK BlU • 166 2TAN .,67

2 OK BlU • 164 2 BRN .,65 -!-~

A"" A

"11 CIRCUIT
BREAKER
~ I lH FRONT
WINDOW
MQIQ!!.
RH FRONT
~
~

!!
m
::xJ
o
POWER WINDOWS: A31 ."
m
:JJ
o
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS COMPONENT LOCATION Page-Figure
• Try the following check before doing the Sys- Fuse Block Behind LH side ofl/P 201- 5-D
tem Check. Window Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. In lower front of each door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201-18-A
If no windows operate, check the BLK (150) C200 (16 cavities) LH shroud ahead of center access hole. . . . . . . .. 201- 5-D
wire and ground G301 by operating the C307 (8 cavities) Near center of LH shroud 201-16-A
Power Mirrors (if equipped). C308 (8 cavities) Near center of RH shroud 201-16-A
• Go to System Check for a guide to normal G301 On upper RH shroud 201-15-A
operation. S301. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Crosscar harness, under console . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201-16-A
S314. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Crosscar harness, under console . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201-16-A
• Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.

SYSTEM CHECK SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS A: LH FRONT POWER WINDOW

• Use the System Check Table as a guide to • Do the tests listed for your symptom in the SWITCH TEST
normal operation. Symptom Table below, or when directed by Connect: TEST LAMP
• Refer to System Diagnosis for a list of symp- the System Check. At: LH FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH
toms and diagnostic steps. CONNECTOR (Connected)
• Tests follow the Symptom Table. Condition:
SYSTEM CHECK TABLE SYMPTOM TABLE
• Ignition Switch: RUN
Operate the LH LH Front Window Connect
No Power Windows A: LH Front Power Correct Result For Diagnosis
Front Window UP operates quietly and Between
operate Window Switch
and DN from the LH smoothly, with no Test A (PNK) & Test Lamp
Front Power sticking See 1
B: RH Front Power Ground Lights
Window Switch Window Switch A(PNK)&D Test Lamp
Operate the RH RH Front Window Test See 2
(BLK) Lights
Front Window UP operates quietly and C: Window Motor
and DN from the Test • Operate LH Front Power Window Switch
smoothly, with no
UP and DN
RH Front Power sticking. LH Front Power A: LH Front Power
Window Switch Window Switch (Continued on next page)
Window does not
• Refer to System Diagnosis when a result is not operate Test
normal. C: Window Motor
Test
RH Front Power B: RH Front Power
Window does not Window Switch
operate Test ~
C: Window Motor I
Test ~
N
o
..•
POWER WINDOWS: A31 00
»
I
~
(Continued from previous page) C: WINDOW MOTOR TEST CIRCUIT OPERATION N
o
B (DK BLU) &
C (BRN)
I Test Lamp
Lights
I See 3 Connect: TEST LAMP
At: SUSPECT WINDOW MOTOR
With the Ignition Switch in RUN, voltage is
applied through the WDO Circuit Breaker and
N

CONNECTOR (Disconnected) the PNK wire to the Power Window Switches.

• If all the results are correct, go to Test C.
Conditions: With the LH Front Power Window Switch in
1. Check PNK (76) wire for an open (see sche-
matic).
• Ignition Switch: RUN UP, voltage is applied through the LH Front
• Operate associated Power Window Power Window Switch, and the DK BLU wire
2. Check BLK (150) wire for an open (see Switch UP and ON
schematic). to the LH Front Window Motor. The motor is
Connect grounded through the BRN wire and the DN
3. Replace LH Front Power Window Switch. Correct Result For Diagnosis
Between
contacts of the LH Front Power Window
A (BRN)or Switch to G301. The motor runs and the win-
B: RH FRONT POWER WINDOW (DKBLU)&B Test Lamp dow goes up. Voltage is similarly applied with
SWITCH TEST See 1
(DKBLU)or Lights the RH Front Power Window Switch in UP.
Connect: TEST LAMP (TAN)
In DN, voltage is applied to each motor in the
At: RH FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH
CONNECTOR (Connected)
• If the result is correct, replace the Win- opposite direction and the window goes down.
dow Motor. Refer to the Body Section 5
Condition: for replacement procedures.
• Ignition Switch: RUN 1. Check the wiring to that Power Window
Connect Switch for an open (see schematic).
Correct Result For Diagnosis
Between
A (PNK) & Test Lamp
See 1
Ground Lights
A(PNK)&D Test Lamp
See 2
(BLK) Lights
• Operate RH Front Power Window Switch
UPandDN
B(DKBLU/
Test Lamp
WHT)&C See 3
Lights
(TAN)
• If all results are correct, go to Test C.
1. Check PNK (76) wire for an open (see sche-
matic).
2. Check BLK (150) wire for an open (see
schematic).
3. Replace RH Front Power Window
"T1
Switch. iii
II
o
" POWER DOOR LOCKS: AU3 (X)
l>

....I
W
HOT AT ALL TIMES

.. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - , FUSE
o
I CTSYILID FUSE I BLOCK
I 25 AMP I-- o
I PWR ACC CIRCUIT BREAKER SEE FUSE :

L__________ ___________________________
I 30 AMP BLOCK OETAILS I
---------~

1 ORNIDK BLU
SEE FUSE
30RN/BLK 60 S125 .1Ea~~~ BLOCK DETAILS
1 ORN/D~U1340
(GR~
~C200 B C201
(GRY) X 8
B .8 ORN · ORN r.;;;- .80RN B

"----C~3~'''7-4-0---ISIII3-03--4iioiiiii-c·~~)8--. 8-0-R-:1· 40
r--~r--....., LH DOOR .8DRN 40 r--~r--..... !!.!!...!!!!ill
LOCK SWITCH LOCK SWITCH
LOCK UNLOCK
POWER REMOTE
MIRRORS,
INTERIOR
LIGHTS
.81 T BLU
.81 T BLU 0

195 .8 BLK 194

.8 BLK

194
20RN/ BLK 60

2 GRY 295
2 TA:I 2;-
F C30B

~
!!.!i
ODOR ODOR
LOCK M LOCK
MOTOR MOTOR EACH MOTOR CONTAINS
2 GRY 295 PERMANENT PERMANENT A SELF·RESETTING
MAGNET MAGNET CIRCUIT BREAKER

2 GR~I295
295 E 9.!!!1 !!
m
:l:J
o
POWER DOOR LOCKS: AU3 ."m
~

TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS COMPONENT LOCATION Page-Figure

• Try the following checks before doing the Door Lock Motors In rear of each door 201-1S-A
System Check. Door Lock Relay Assembly . . . . . . .. Near upper RH shroud. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201-16-A
1. Check the PWR/ACC Circuit Breaker by Fuse Block Behind LH side of liP 201- 5-D
C200 (16 cavities) LH shroud ahead of center access hole 201- 5-D
operating the Power Seats (if equipped).
C201 (S cavities) LH shroud above center access hole 201-16-A
2. Check the CTSY/LID Fuse by observing
C307 (S cavities) Near center of LH shroud 201-16-A
that the Courtesy Lights come on when the
C30S (S cavities) Near center of RH shroud 201-16-A
door is opened.
S125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Main harness, behind LH side of liP, near Fuse
3. Check that the Door Lock Relay Assembly Block 201- 5-D
case ground is making good contact. S303 Crosscar harness, above steering column 201-16-A
4. If one of the Door Lock Motors does not
operate properly, but the other Door Lock SYSTEM CHECK TABLE
Motor functions normally, check the wiring
ACTION NORMALOPERATION
to the motor. If the wiring is correct, replace
that motor. Operate the LH Door Lock Switch All the doors lock and unlock
5. Check for mechanical binds in the Door Lock Operate the RH Door Lock Switch All the doors lock and unlock
System. Unlock one door using the vehicle key That door unlocks, but the other door remains
• Go to System Check for a guide to normal locked
operation. With all the doors closed and locked, operate the The doors will not open
inside door handles to try and open each door
• Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.
Open the LH door and move the LH Door Lock The doors will not open
SYSTEM CHECK Switch to the LOCK position, close the door,
and try to open each door from the outside
• Use the System Check Table as a guide to
normal operation. • Refer to System Diagnosis when a result is SYMPTOM TABLE
• Refer to System Diagnosis for a list of symp- not normal. SYMPTOM DO TEST
toms and diagnostic steps. Only one of the A: Door Lock Motor
SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS doors locks and Test (on suspect
• Do the tests listed for your symptom in the unlocks Door Lock
Symptom Table below. Motor)
• Tests follow the Symptom Table. (Continued on next page)
~
..aI
W

I~
'b POWER DOOR LOCKS: AU3 ~
I
(Continued from previous page) ~
W
B: DOOR LOCK SWITCH TEST (Continued from previous column) o
The Power Door B: Door Lock Switch Measure: VOLTAGE 1. Check the PWR ACC Circuit Breaker. I IN
Locks do not operate Test (on suspect At: SUSPECT DOOR LOCKSWITCH Check the ORNIBLK (60) wire for an open
from one Door Lock Door Lock CONNECTOR (Connected) (see schematic).
Switch Switch)
Measure Correct For
The Power Door C: Door Lock Relay Between Voltage Diagnosis C: DOOR LOCK RELAY ASSEMBLY
Locks do not operate Assembly Test TEST (TABLE 2)
from both Door Lock B(ORN)&
B: Door lock Switch Battery See 1 Connect: TEST LAMP
Switches Test Ground
At: DOOR LOCK RELAY ASSEMBLY CON-
• Door Lock Switch: LOCK and hold
NECTORS C1 & C2 (Connected)
A: DOOR LOCK MOTOR TEST LTBLU Battery See 2 Condition:
& Ground • Door Lock Switch: LOCKand hold
Measure: VOLTAGE
At: SUSPECT DOOR LOCKMOTOR • Door Lock Switch: UNLOCK and hold Connect Correct For
CONNECTOR (Disconnected) BLK& Between Result Diagnosis
Battery See 2
Condition: Ground
C2/B
• Door Lock Switch: UNLOCKand hold Test Lamp
• If all the voltages are correct, check the (LT BLU) &
lights
See 1
Measure Correct For LT BLU (195) wire and BLK (194) wire Ground
Between Voltage Diagnosis for an open (see schematic).
ClIC
1. Check the CTSY /LID Fuse. Check the Test Lamp
B (TAN) & (GRY) & See 3
ORN (40) and ORNIDK BLU (340) wires lights
Ground Ground
Battery See 1 for opens (see schematic).
(see ClIC (GRY)
schematic) 2. Replace the suspect Door Lock Switch. Test Lamp
& ClI See 3
B (TAN) lights
B (TAN) &
A (GRY) • Door Lock Switch: UNLOCK and hold
Battery See 2
(see C: DOOR LOCK RELAY ASSEMBLY C2/A
schematic) TEST (TABLE 1) (BLK) &
Test Lamp
See 2
lights
• If all the voltages are correct, replace the Connect: TEST LAMP Ground
suspect Door Lock Motor. At: DOOR LOCK RELAY ASSEMBLY CON-
CllB
1. Check the TAN (294) wire for an open NECTORC1 Test Lamp
(TAN) & See 3
(see schematic). lights
Connect Correct For Ground
2. Check the GRY (295) wire for an open Between Result Diagnosis ClIC (GRY)
(see schematic). Test Lamp
A (ORN/BLK) Test Lamp & ClI See 3
See 1 lights
& Ground lights B (TAN)
(Continued on next page)
• If the result is correct, proceed to Table 2.
."m
(Continued in next column) :JJ
o
POWER DOOR LOCKS: AU3
(Continued from facing page)
• If all the results are correct, check the TAN
(294) and GRY (295) wires for opens (see
schematic). If OK, do Test A.
1. Check the LT BLU (195) wire for an open
(see schematic). If the wire is good, do Test
B.
2. Check the BLK (194) wire for an open (see
schematic). If the wire is good, do Test B.
3. Replace the Door Lock Relay Assembly.
CIRCUIT OPERATION
When a Door Lock Switch is activated in the
Power Door Lock system, all of the doors will
lock or unlock in unison. Each lock can also be
operated manually from the locking post. The
locks are operated by reversible motors that re-
ceive voltage from two relays in the Door Lock
Relay Assembly. These relays operate to turn the
motors on by applying a voltage to one of the
terminals and a ground to the other terminal.
When either Door Lock Switch is moved to the
LOCK position, it completes the circuit to the
coil of the Door Lock Relay Assembly. The lock
relay is energized. The contact for the lock relay
closes, and is connected to battery voltage
through the ORNIBLK wire. Voltage is then ap-
plied to the GRY wire and the Door Lock
."
iii
::a
o
Motors. The motors are grounded by the TAN
wire from the other terminal of the motor
through the contact for the unlock relay. The
motor in each door runs to operate the Door
Locks. When the Door Lock Switch is released,
the lock relay contact returns to ground and the
motors turn off.
A similar action occurs with the unlock relay
when it is energized by either of the Door Lock
Switches closing to the UNLOCK position. Now
the TAN wires to the motors carry battery volt-
age and the GRY wires are grounded. The polar-
ity of the voltage to the motors has been
reversed. The motors run in the opposite direc-
tion to unlock the doors.
The Door Lock Switches are usually closed for
just a moment. If they are held closed, a circuit
breaker in each motor will open to protect
against damage. The circuit breakers close auto-
matically when they cool off.
~
I
...a
W
o
w
'" TRUNK RELEASE: A90 00
l>
I
AUTOMATIC MANUAL ...10

TRANSAXlE TRANSAXlE tAl

HOT AT ALL TIMES HOT AT ALL TIMES
'!!.i"iM"Wfi ~
r------
I
- - - - - - , FUSE r-- o
I IBlOCK I
LIGHTS: I ill!ill!!. I : ACCY~
I FUSE I I
INSTRUMENT I 25 AMP I I LOCK'" " aULI I
PANEL! I I
I I OFF R-:'; TEST I
CONSOLE I I I
IL______ I I
------..I '------------: --- I

340

""1
SEE FUSE
BLOCK
DETAilS

.!!!.!!!!.!S.
~
~
ON OFF

C 5 YEL C
.8 GRY /Bl:! 942

r-- -----------------, TRUNK

I I RELEASE
I I RELAY
.35 BlK 150 I ,---
.35 BlK 150 I -------------- I
I
I =:l I
I
~~~----------~~
5 YE~15 L_ 3 -----~5-T~~~~I:-J SEE BRAKE
SEE GROUND S207 SEe GROUND ~Ea~~ WARNING
DISTRIBUTION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
5 YEL .5 TAN/WHT 33
AUDIO

T .B BlKJWHT 142 A41f.2!!!

5 YEL 5 T .8 BlK/WHT 142 ALARM
SYSTEM

.llil _
I
... I
F
I~--~--- - - - -..IGEAR
--
I SELECTOR
I .5TANJWHT
I
I I SWITCH
I-- .... - .illl.
I P ,l I 33
I I
I
I R'e-- I
N
fu I
D C201

o C250
._-----
I
----_..I
"'~-l=-
'8PPlI=-
G
3 BlK 150 B C305

. BPPlI~
3BlK 150

[]II
~ PARKING BRAKE

-=
RELEASE
SOLENOID
-= -=
[lJ -
-=
~
CLOSED WITH
PARKING BRAKE
APPLIED
!!
m
:xl
o
TRUNK RELEASE: AgO ::!!
m
::u
o
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS COMPONENT LOCATION Page-Figure
• Try the following checks before doing the Sys- Fuse Block Behind LH side of IIP 201- 5-D
temCheck. Gear Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . .. LH rear of engine, top of transaxle . . . . . . . . . . .. 201- 2-B
1. Check the CTSY /LID Fuse by noting if the Ignition Switch At base of steering column 201-11-D
Dome Lights work. In-Line Diode Behind IIP, near LH shroud 201- 6-A
2. Check that ground G201 is clean and tight. Parking Brake Switch. . . . . . . . . . . .. On parking brake support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201- 8-C
Starter Solenoid (VIN 9) Lower LH front of engine 201- 4-A
3. Check that Trunk Release Solenoid is prop-
Starter Solenoid (VIN R) Lower LH front of engine 201- 2-A
erly grounded.
Trunk Release Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . .. Behind IIP, on RH side of steering column
4. (Manual Transaxle only) Check the Parking
support 201- 7-C
Brake Switch by applying Parking Brake Trunk Release Solenoid . . . . . . . . . .. On rear oftrunk lid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 201-13-C
with Ignition Switch in RUN and observing
C201 (8 cavities) LH shroud above center access hole 201-16-A
the BRAKE Indicator.
C250 (4 cavities) Center of rear bulkhead, in engine compartment. 201-13-C
• Go to System Check for a guide to normal C305 (4 cavities) Behind dash, near LH shroud 201- 9-A
operation. C500 (34 cavities) Engine compartment, near battery 201-11-B
• Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests. G201 BehindcenterofI/P 201- 5-C
S125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Main harness, behind LH side of IIP, near Fuse
SYSTEM CHECK Block 201- 5-D
S205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Main harness, above steering column. . . . . . . . .. 201- 8-A
• Use the System Check Table as a guide to
S207. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Main harness, left of steering column. . . . . . . . .. 201-11-D
normal operation.
S212 Main harness, behind center of dash. . . . . . . . . .. 201- 5-C
SYSTEM CHECK TABLE
ACTION NORMALRESULT
Press Trunk Release Trunk unlatches
button with the
Parking Brake
applied (Manual
Transaxle) or Gear
in PARK
(Automatic
Transaxle)

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS ClO

»
• Do the tests below if the Trunk Release does I
not operate properly. -'
W
~
(Continued on next page) ...
 00
TRUNK RELEASE: AgO »
(Continued from previous page)

TRUNK RELEASE TEST (TABLE 1)

TRUNK RELEASE TEST (TABLE 3)
Measure: VOLTAGE
At: TRUNK RELEASERELAY CONNECTOR
(Continued from previous column)
• If the result is correct, replace the Trunk
Release Relay.
-
I

W
~
N
Measure: VOLTAGE (Disconnected) 1. Check/repair BLK/WHT (142) wire.
At: TRUNKRELEASESOLENOID Conditions:
CONNECTOR (Disconnected) • Trunk Release Switch: DEPRESSED
Conditions: (hold) CIRCUIT OPERATION
• Parking Brake: APPLIED(Manual • Parking Brake: APPLIED(Manual Voltage is applied at all times through the
Transaxle) Transaxle) CTSY ILID Fuse to the Trunk Release Switch.
• Gear: PARK(Automatic Transaxle) • Gear: PARK (Automatic Transaxle) With the switch closed, voltage is applied
• Ignition Switch: LOCK through the Trunk Release Switch to the Trunk
Measure Correct
For Diagnosis Measure Correct
Between Voltage For Diagnosis Release Relay coil and contact.
Between Voltage
BLK/WHT& Manual Transaxle
Ground
o Volts See 1 2 (GRY/BLK) When the Parking Brake is applied, the Park-
Battery See 1
& Ground ing Brake Switch closes and provides ground
• Trunk Release button pressed
2 (GRY/BLK) for the relay coil. The relay operates and voltage
BLKlWHT&
Battery See 1 & 1 (see Battery See 2 is applied from the closed relay contact to the
Ground
schematic) Trunk Release Solenoid, releasing the lock.
• If both voltages are correct, repairl
• If both voltages are correct, go to Table 4.
replace Trunk Rlease Solenoid. Automatic Transaxle
1. Check/repair GRY/BLK (942) wire for an Voltage is applied from the closed Trunk
1. Reconnect Solenoid and go to Table 2.
open. Release Switch through the Trunk Release
2. Check/repair YEL (5) (Automatic Trans- Relay coil to the Gear Selector Switch. With the
TRUNK RELEASE TEST (TABLE 2) axle) or TAN/WHT (33) (Manual Trans- Gear Selector Switch in PARK or NEUTRAL,
Measure: VOLTAGE axle) wires.
the Starter Solenoid provides ground for the
At: TRUNKRELEASESWITCH CONNECTOR
relay. The relay contacts close and voltage is
(Connected)
TRUNK RELEASE TEST (TABLE 4) applied to the Trunk Release Solenoid, releas-
Measure Correct ing the lock.
For Diagnosis Connect: FUSED JUMPER
Between Voltage
At:TRUNK RELEASERELAYCONNECTOR
B(ORN/DK (Disconnected)
BLU) & Battery See 1 Condition:
Ground • Trunk Release Switch: DEPRESSED
• Trunk Release Switch: Depressed Jumper
Correct Result For Diagnosis
Between
A (GRY/BLK)
Battery See 2
& Ground 2 (GRY/BLK) Trunk
• If both voltages are correct, go to Table 3. &3 (BLKI See 1
unlatches
WHT)
1. Check/repair ORN/DK BLU (340) wire for "TI

an open. (Continued in next column) m

:D
2. Replace the Trunk Release Switch. o
" POWER REMOTE MIRRORS 00
l>
I

HOT AT ALL TIMES

. -1---------'
I
I
I
I
CTSY/1I0 FUSE
25 AMP
I -
I FUSE
I
I
BL OCK
FOR C20D TERMINAL
VIEW SEE JUNCTION
BLOCK PAGE 202·2
o
l_
I _ ________ .JI
FOR C201 TERMINAL
VIEW SEE BODY
lORN/ OK BlU 340 CONNECTOR PAGE
SEE FUSE
202·3
~ .e:;;;II~~ BLOCK

1
DETAilS
lORN/OK Bl: 340 OUTSIDE MIRROR
SWITCH
C201
,;
",,1./
C .5 VEL S223 .5 YEL
40
.80RN
L

\ I )
•
40 • POWER
ODOR
I
I
I
I
t
UP
BB .5 YEll8B
o C303
.SYEl1 8 B
88
o IC30
_4

:3:~1
I 0li C310 .5 VElI 88
__,
"
r---1 I
.80RN lOCKS , DOWN .SlT GRN / .5 .5 .S YEl 88

B 40 40 • I
I
! L
E BlK
- - - ' )e
C LT GRN C
~, ~
LT GRN

C~N
LH
~ VEL
o T,cJl
I 88
: I
I
89 C30389 ill!!. 89
BREAKER MOTOR
MIRROR
RH

~
T

I
0 OUTSIDE

iL l
DRIVE UNIT

"
(WH" C BREAK ER
C200 .5 LT GRN .S LTG RN C LT GRN ~
(BLK )
A Cl ( M
B9 I 89 I 89
.5 ORN 40 THESE I I UP - DOWN
I I MO TOR
A SWITCHES I I
C~ ARE I
I
I
I
DRIVE
UNIT
MECHANICALL Y I I
LINKED I I LEFT - RIGHT
I MO TO R
H 8 :

lr
.5 WHT .5 WHT BI WHT
.) ( ( ...
I/;
~
81 C304 C311 81 CI RCUIT

~
, . I
I
• L
.S WHT/
F BLK B .5 WHT B WHT
CIRCUI T
BREAKER
lEFT - RIGHT
MOTOR
LH
BREAKER

t ~C===:{
O~
I OUTSIDE l T BL U 82
I
81 C303 81 C310 81
I LEfT MIRROR A~ C311
I
>-----< I
I
lTBl~182 .51TBLUI;;-
RI GH T A C310
I A C304

~
I .5LTBLUI82
I
A C303
, I
I 0 .5 LT BLU .5lT BlUrs;-
.S LT 8L U 82

POWER
L.
T
"
I
)
B2 •
S306
WINDOWS
1r
L-

"'+.
2 BLK ISO

"T1
m
~G301 :xl
0
• • • 'TI
iTi
~

TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS COMPONENT LOCATION Page- Figure

• Try the following checks before doing the Sys- Fuse Block . Behind LH side of IIP . 201- 5-D
temCheck. C200 (16 cavities) . LH shroud ahead of center access hole . 201- 5-D
Check the CTSY /LID Fuse by checking the C201 (8 cavities) . LH shroud above center access hole . 201-16-A
operation of the Dome Light. C303 (4 cavities) . LH shroud, near center access hole . 201-15-A
• Go to System Check for a guide to normal C304 (4 cavities) . RH shroud, near center access hole . 201-15-A
operation. C310 (4 cavities) . In LH door, below mirror . 201-18-A
C311 (4 cavities) . In RH door, below mirror . 201-18-A
• Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.
G301 . On upper RH shroud . 201-15-A
S125 . Main harness, behind LH side of IIP, near Fuse
SYSTEM CHECK
Block . 201- 5-D
• Use the System Check Table as guide to nor-
S223 . Power mirror harness . 201-15-A
mal operation.
S303 . Crosscar harness, above steering column . 201-16-A
• Refer to System Diagnosis for a list of symp- S306 . Power mirror harness, behind center of IIP 201-15-A
toms and diagnostic steps.

SYSTEM CHECK TABLE (Continued from previous column) SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS

ACTION NORMAL RESULT Put Mirror Select RH Outside Mirror • Do the tests listed for your symptom in the
Put Mirror Select LH Outside Mirror Switch in RIGHT moves smoothly Symptom Table below.
Switch in LEFT moves smoothly position, operate upward and • Tests follow the Symptom Table.
position, operate upward and Mirror Control downward
Mirror Control downward Switch in UP and SYMPTOM TABLE
Switch in UP and DOWN positions
SYMPTOM DO TEST
DOWN positions Operate Mirror RH Outside Mirror
Both mirrors do not A: Outside Mirror
Operate the Mirror LH Outside Mirror Control Switch in moves smoothly to
operate in any mode Switch Power and
Control Switch in moves smoothly to the LEFT and the left and right
Ground Test
the LEFT and the left and right RI G HT positions
LH Outside Mirror B: LH Outside
RIGHT positions • Refer to System Diagnosis when a result is does not operate in Mirror Switch
(Continued in next column) not normal. one or more modes Test
RH Outside Mirror C: RH Outside
does not operate in Mirror Switch
one or more modes Test

~
I
...a
.p..
...a
(Continued on next page) ••.•
POWER REMOTE MIRRORS ;
I
~
(Continued from previous page) (Continued from previous column) CIRCUIT OPERATION ~
- ~
• Hold Mirror Control Switch in LEFT & Each Outside Mirror has two reversible N
RIGHT motors, one motor adjusts the mirror view up
A: OUTSIDE MIRROR SWITCH POWER and down, the other motor adjusts the mirror
AND GROUND TEST D(LTBLU)&I Battery See 1 view right and left. The driver operates four
F(WHT/BLK) I
Measure: VOLTAGE switches that control the polarity of the voltage
At: OUTSIDE MIRROR SWITCH CONNECTOR • If all voltages are correct, replace the LH
to the motors. The Mirror Select Switch directs
(Disconnected) Outside Mirror Drive Unit after checking
connector C31O, YEL (88), LT GRN (89), these control voltages to either the RH or LH
Correct For WHT (81)and LT BLU (82) wires. Outside Mirror.
Measure
Between Voltage Diagnosis 1. Replace the Outside Mirror Switch. With the switches in the positions shown in
the schematic, the LH Outside Mirror is moved.
A (ORN) &
Battery See 1 When the Up-Down Switch is moved UP, bat-
Ground
C: RH OUTSIDE MIRROR SWITCH TEST tery voltage from the ORN wire is applied to the
A (ORH) & B
Battery See 2 YEL wire and the Up-Down Motor in each Out-
(BLK) Measure: VOLTAGE
side Mirror. The LH Outside Mirror Up-Down
At: OUTSIDE MIRROR SWITCH
• If all voltages are correct, replace Outside Motor has a path to ground through the LT
Mirror Switch. CONNECTOR (Connected)
Conditions: GRN/BLK wire, the UP contacts of the Up-
1. Check/repair ORN (40) wire. • Mirror Select Switch: RH Down Switches and the BLK wire. The LH
2. Check/repair BLK (150) wire. • Mirror Control Switch: Hold in UP and motor runs and turns the mirror up.
DOWN If the Mirror Control Switch is pushed to the
B: LH OUTSIDE MIRROR SWITCH TEST Measure Correct DOWN position, the same motor receives
For Diagnosis
Between Voltage voltage. Now the polarity is reversed, with the
Measure: VOLTAGE
YEL wire grounded. The motor runs in the
At: OUTSIDE MIRROR SWITCH C(YEL)&G
Battery See 1 opposite direction.
CONNECTOR (Connected) (LTGRN)
Conditions: The LH Outside Mirror Left-Right Motor
• Hold Mirror Control Switch LEFT &
• Mirror Select Switch: LH RIGHT operates in a similar manner when the joy stick
• Mirror ~ontrol Switch: Hold in UP & moves the Left-Right Switch to LEFT. The
DOWN D(LTBLU)&
Battery See 1 WHT/BLK wire gets battery voltage and the
H(WHT)
Measure Correct LT BL U wire is grounded through the Left-
For Diagnosis • If all voltages are correct, replace the RH
Between Voltage Right Switch.
Outside Mirror Drive Unit after checking
C(YEL)&E The RH Outside Mirror works the same way
connector C311, YEL (88), LT GRN (89),
(LTGRN/ Battery See 1 WHT (81)and LT BLU (82) wires. as the LH Outside Mirror when the Mirror
BLK) Select is moved to the RH position and the joy
1. Replace Outside Mirror Switch.
(Continued in next column) stick is operated.
."iii
:lJ
o
~ RADIO: UM6/UM7/UQ6/UT4/UX1 00
»

HOT IN ACCY OR RUN

---------, FUSE
I--
IMd'.,..••
~~----

, ...M_. __ .•._ .?R' LIGHT

HOT AT ALL TIMES
---------,
BAT FUSE
FUSE
I BLOCK
-
CJ1
o
o
I

RADIO FUSr
1DAMP
•~
I ~ 25 AMP I--
see FUSE I
_____ !!.A,!!I,!!_J __~!~!~~~J
LIGHTS:
.5 YEl 143 INSTRUMENT
PANEL/CONSOLE

S201 • .35 YEl }

ANTENNA

W
.8 BRN I 9

S211 ·_-...• SEE LIGHT

:~Tf,~S
lORN 140

S210 --- • SEE FUSE

BLOCK

1 1
Q DETAilS

.5YElIS .H""":
43 CONTROL
caurss
COAXIAL
.8 BRN

B .-.
9 lORN

!..•
40

H.!!! .5 GRY

FIWl
.5 YEFl 43
~
BRN 19 ORN 140

,If M
T- ~
CLOCK ANTENNA DISPLAY BATTERY
DISPLAY INPUT DIM SIGNAL POWER INPUT
r!\ PANEL

DFFlJN
- POWER
(IF EQUIPPED) \
v
IF EQUIPPEDWITH DIGITAL
I
\V LIGHT

IN CLOCK AND/OR DIGITAL DISPLAY GROUND 1---- •••

K D B c A G

)
H

.5YElI lt116
BlK
.5 BRN I 199

.5 LT BlU 1115

.STAN 1201
.5 OK BlUI 46

.5GRY/1I118

I~.
.5 OK GRN 1117
BlK

.H""
.5 .5BlK1150
I
PNK 1143 !!
.5 PNK 1143
m
:c
, ,
'" 1- ", ,0

"- "-
 ,., r
!!
.5 GRV/I 118 .5LTGRN .200 m
.5 LT GRN BLK lJ
o
200 .5DK 1117
.5 TAN. 201
.5 OK GRN GRN

117
.5 BRN 1199
.5 TAN

"
201
·5 LT. 115
BLU .5 GRV/BLK
~
118

K~ ~~

.5 BRN 1 199
~ J~7

.5 OK BLuI46
!~K 46

.5
VELI
BLK
116
.5 GRV
\~.
-'--~--------B-------~-----~

]
118 .5 OK

GRN
CI

~!!!!..!L!:
117
C247

.5 LT GRN 1 200

I1T1
LEFT ~ LHIIP
R'EA'R ~ l'T'l r"'I'T I~

(lJJ
AV
SPEiiKE R
-----
!2!!
SPEAKER

~
1J.lJ~ ~
.5 BLK 150

.5TAN 1201
.5 VEL .116 .5 LT BLU .115

, . .. .. 3
MUlE
13
BAHERY
1 Z 4 5

SOLID STATE
AUDIO AUDIO
OU1(+) OUIH BV GAIN GROUND
12 15 6 9 14
-'

.8 WHT 11302 .8 VEL 1 303

J .5 BLK

.8 OK BLU/BLKII 346 150

'"
SUB·
WOOFER
.8 LT BLU/BLK 315
A B. C248
'ip"
arJ
AV
~
.8 WHTI
BLK
.8 VEL 1303 .8 BLK 150

SEE GROUND

,,+.
DISTRIBUTION ~--.~
B A
1-- -------------- ---, DOME 00
I PERFORMANCE lITli'Hi's »
I SOUND IMii'Dii'tE I
I I- .....I.
I I
I I 0'1
--- ------------------~ ~~ 0
,
....•
b RADIO: UM6/UM7/U63/UT4/UX1/U66 00
l>
I
~
(J'I
HOT IN ACCY OR RUN HOT AT ALL TIMES HOT AT ALL TIMES o
,.- - - - - - - - - - , FUSE h!Q!!!
,. - - - - - - - - - , FUSE
I RADIO FUSE : BLOCK SWITCH
I
I
I
BATFUSE
25 AMP
: BLOCK
I
: IOAMP I
I I I SEE FUSE I
_________
BLOCK OETAILS .J,
l _____ !!.A!'!_J I
l
LIGHTS:
.5 YEL 43 INSTRUMENT
PANEl /CONSOLE

.B BRN 9 lORN 40

S201

.5 YEL
I-""
43
.35 YEl

:3

~=--=
.5YEL/BLK
43
....
•
}
CRUISE
CONTROL
ANTENNA

\7 g!.,!l---'"
.B BRN 9
SEE LIGHT

~~~:'~S S210
lORN
J---.
40
SEE FUSE
BLOCK
DETAILS

B _____________________ ~~ C20B
.5 GRY

.5 YEFL
FIWl43 ~ BRN 9 ORN 40
M

r-~~--------------------------------~y~------------------------~----------------------~~------------------~1~-----,RADID
CLOCK ANTENNA OISPLAY BATTERY

,,,)IN POWER
OISPLAY
(IF EQUIPPED)
INPUT

IF EQUIPPEO WITH OIGITAL

OIM SIGNAL
\~--------------------------~V~----------JI
POWER INPUT
C
!:;\ PANEl
r,.J LIGHT
I~IN~~__________~____________~____________~______~~__- ,______________~____C_L_OC_K_A_N_O/_O_RTOI_G_IT_A_L_OI_SP_LA_Y____~---G-R-O-U-N0-t------.

.5 YEL:
BlK
K
J.
lu .5 B~
H
199

--------- ---------- ----------1J

I L

.5 LT BlU

L
116 .5 OK
BLU
-J

46

ill!
1

E Dr
~NS~~).5GRY/
BlK
118

---------- ----------
B}
.STAN
J.
201 .5DK
GRN
I l

117 .5LTGRNAI
l

G
--------- --------------
200

C247
---
GI
.5BLK 150

o B C A

.5 BRN 199 .5 OK BLU 46 .5 GRY 118 .5 OK 117 .8 BLK 150

BRN SEe GROUND
DISTRIBUTION

•I1. _ _
~
LEFT RIGHT

tlIJ rm
LH I/P
'iiffi ii'EAii" S212
SPEAKER SPEAKER B SPEAKER

"J~*im
A A

.5YEL 116 WITH .5LT BLU 115 WITH .STAN 201 .5LTGRN 200
. ._ _ _ _. . STEREf) STEREO
OfllLY ONLY
RADIO "
m
::g
o
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS COMPONENT LOCATION Page-Figure
• Try the following checks before doing the Dome Light Module. . . . . . . . . . . . .. At dome lamp, in roof
System Check. Fuse Block Behind LH side of IfP 201- 5-D
1. Check the RADIO Fuse. Sub-Woofer Amplifier Under RH side of center console 201-14-A
2. Check the BAT Fuse by operating the cigar C208 (2 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Center of dash, behind radio
lighter. C247 (12 cavities) Center console, behind radio 201-14-A
C248 (2 cavities) Behind LH side of IfP 201- 4-F
3. Check that the Antenna connector and coax-
G201 Behind center of IfP 201- 5-C
ial cable are properly connected.
S201. Main harness, above steering column 201- 8-A
4. Adjusting Radio controls will change the S210 Main harness, behind RH side of IfP 201- 5-C
operation of the sound system. Consult the S211 Main harness, behind RH side of IfP 201- 5-C
Delco Sound Service Guide for information S212 Main harness, behind center of dash. . . . . . . . . .. 201- 5-C
regarding the operation of these controls.
5. Before troubleshooting a suspect speaker, SYSTEM CHECK TABLE SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
check all connections to that speaker.
ACTION NORMAL RESULT • Do the tests listed for your symptom in the
6. For proper noise diagnosis, take car outside
With Ignition Switch Symptom Table below.
where signals are strong. Close hood and The display comes on
in RUN, turn the The Digital Clock • Tests follow the Symptom Table.
keep away from metal buildings or sources
of radio interference. Radio ON operates
(Electronically Tuned SYMPTOM TABLE
7. Ignition noise on FM may indicate a defective
Radio only) SYMPTOM DO TEST
Ignition System.
Sound comes from all Radio does not ap- A: Radio Power
8. Coated screws or bolts can cause a poor four speakers pear to work (no dis- Input Test
ground condition. Scrape ground screws
Operate Radio Consult the Delco play lights, no
clean of any paint or varnish.
controls Sound Service Guide sound)
• Go to System Check for a guide to normal for information Clock (if equipped) B: Clock Test
operation. regarding the does not operate
operation of the
• Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests. Panel Light does not C: Panel Light Test
controls
come on
Turn Headlight The Panel Light
SYSTEM CHECK Display Dimming D: Display
Switch to PARK comes on
• Use the System Check Table as a guide to function will not Dimming Test
The Digital display operate
normal operation. dims
No sound or F: Subwoofer ~
• Refer to System Diagnosis for a list of symp-
• Refer to System Diagnosis when a result is not distorted sound Amplifier Test I
toms and diagnostics steps.
normal. comes from the Sub- ....•
UI
woofer Speaker o
(Continued on next page) I~
RADIO co
l>
I

(Continued from previous page) C: PANEL LIGHT TEST E: SPEAKER TEST (TABLE 1)
-'
U1
o
Excessive noise I I: Noise Diagnosis Measure: VOLTAGE Connect: ANALOG OHMMETER
~
comes from all Test At: RADIOCONNECTOR (Disconnected) At: SUSPECT SPEAKER
speakers Conditions: Conditions:
• Light Switch: PARK • Ohmmeter set on RX1 scale
A: RADIO POWER INPUT TEST • Dimming Switch: BRIGHT • Speaker Wires: DISCONNECTED
Measure Correct Action Correct Result For Diagnosis
Measure: VOLTAGE For Diagnosis
Between Voltage
At: RADIOCONNECTOR (Disconnected) Connect
Condition: M(GRY)& ohmmeter Speaker
Battery See 1 See 1
• Ignition Switch: RUN Ground across speaker "pops"
terminals
Measure Correct
For Diagnosis • If voltage is correct, remove Radio for
Between Voltage service. • If the result is correct, go to Table 2.
F(YEL)& 1. Check GRY (8) wire for an open (see sche- 1. Replace the problem speaker with a new
Battery See 1 matic). one.
Ground
F(YEL)&G E: SPEAKER TEST (TABLE 2)
Battery See 2
(BLK) D: DISPLAY DIMMING TEST Measure: AC VOLTAGE
• If voltages are correct, remove Radio for Measure: VOLTAGE At: RADIOOUTPUT FOR SUSPECT SPEAKER
service. At: RADIOCONNECTORC208 Conditions:
1. Check YEL (43) wire for an open (see sche- (Disconnected) • Ignition Switch: RUN
matic). Condition: • Radio: ON (High Volume)
• Light Switch: HEAD or PARK Correct
2. Check BLK (150) wire for an open to Action For Diagnosis
ground (see schematic). Measure Correct Voltage
For Diagnosis
Between Voltage
Connect
B: CLOCK TEST B(BRN)& voltmeter
Battery See 1
Ground across
Measure: VOLTAGE
outputs for Varying
At: RADIOCONNECTORC208 • If voltage is correct, remove Radio for
suspect around 1 volt See 1
(Disconnected) service.
Speaker with AC
Measure Correct 1. Check BRN (9) wire for an open (see sche- Radio tuned
For Diagnosis matic).
Between Voltage to a strong
A (ORN)& signal
Battery See 1
Ground • If voltage is correct, repair wires between
Radio and suspect Speaker.
• If voltage is correct, remove Radio for
service. 1. Remove Radio for service.
1. Check ORN (40) wire for an open (see sche- "T1
matic). in:JJ
o
RADIO ."m
~
o
F: SUBWOOFER AMPLIFIER TEST F: SUBWOOFER AMPLIFIER TEST F: SUBWOOFER AMPLIFIER TEST
(TABLE 1) (TABLE 2) (TABLE 3)
Measure: VOLTAGE Measure: AC VOLTAGE Measure: VOLTAGE
At: SUBWOOFER AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR At: SUBWOOFER AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR At: SUBWOOFER AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR
(Connected) (Connected) (Connected)
Conditions: Conditions: Conditions:
• Ignition Switch: RUN • Ignition Switch: RUN • Ignition Switch: RUN
• Radio: ON • Radio: ON (High Volume) • Radio: ON
Measure Correct Measure Correct Measure Correct
For Diagnosis For Diagnosis For Diagnosis
Between Voltage Between Voltage Between Voltage
3 (PNK) & 7 (DK BLU) & 6 (WHT)& Approx.8
Battery See 1 8 (LT BLU) See 1
Ground Ground volts
13 (PNK) & 10 (BRN) & 11 • Performance sound control at minimum
Battery See 1 (YEL/BLK) Varying
Ground
Around 1 Volt See 1 9 (YEL) &
13 (PNK) & 14 1 (LT GRN) & 3.5 to 4.5 volts See 2
Battery See 2 AC Ground
(BLK) 2 (DK GRN)
• Performance sound control at maximum
• If voltages are correct, go to Table 2. 4 (TAN) & 5
(GRY/BLK) 9 (YEL) & Approx.8
1. Check/repair PNK (143) wires (see sche- See 2
Ground volts
matic). IfPNK (143) wires are good remove • If voltages are correct, go to Table 3.
Radio for service. 1. Check/repair wires between connector
• If all voltages are correct, go to Test H:
Subwoofer Speaker Test.
2. Check/repair BLK (150) wire (see sche- C247 and Subwoofer Amplifier.
1. Check WHT (302) wire for a short to
matic).
ground, if OK replace Subwoofer Ampli-
fier Assembly.
2. Go to Test G: Performance Sound Control
Test.

~
I
...a
U1
o
(Continued on next page) C1I
RADIO ~

(Continued from previous page)

G: PERFORMANCE SOUND CONTROL
TEST
H: SUBWOOFER SPEAKER TEST
(TABLE 1)
H: SUBWOOFER SPEAKER TEST
(TABLE 2)
-
I

en
o
en
Measure: VOLTAGE Connect: ANALOG OHMMETER Measure: AC VOLTAGE
At: DOME LIGHTS MODULE CONNECTOR At: SUSPECT SUBWOOFER SPEAKER(S) At: SUBWOOFER AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR
(Connected) (Disconnected) (Connected)
Conditions: Conditions: Conditions:
• Ignition Switch: RUN • Speaker Wires: DISCONNECTED • Speaker Wires: RECONNECTED
• Radio: ON • Ohmmeter set on RX1 scale • Ignition Switch: RUN
Measure Correct Action Correct Result For Diagnosis • Radio: ON (High Volume)
For Diagnosis • Performance sound control at
Between Voltage
Connect Maximum
B (WHTIBLK) Approximately Ohmmeter
See 1 Measure Correct
& Ground 8 volts across Speaker See 1 For Diagnosis
Between Voltage
• Performance sound control at minimum Subwoofer "pops"
Speaker 15 (LT BLU/ Varying
A (YEL)& Terminals BLK) & 12 DK around 1 volt See 1
3.5 to 4.5 volts See 2
Ground BLUIBLK AC
• If result is correct, go to Table 2.
• Performance sound control at maximum • If the voltage is correct, check/repair wires
1. Replace Subwoofer Speaker.
A (YEL)& Approximately between the Subwoofer Amplifier and the
See 2
Ground 8 volts Subwoofer Speaker.
• If all voltages are correct, check/repair 1. Remove Subwoofer Amplifier for service.
YEL (303) wire (see schematic).
1. Check/repair WHT/BLK or WHT (302) I: NOISE DIAGNOSIS TEST
wire (see schematic). Unplug Antenna at the back of the Radio.
2. Replace Performance Sound control. • If noise disappears, it was being picked up
by the Antenna. Consult the Delco Sound
Service Guide for Antenna noise diagnosis.
• If noise persists, it is coming in from the
Radio wiring. Refer to the following chart for
a possible cause and corrective action.

."
.iii
:D
o
RADIO "T1
iii
:lJ
IGNITION NOISE o
For more detailed noise repair procedures con-
sult the Delco Sound Service Guide. Service TO GROUND Try the following fixes in the given order.
procedures are given for: (TRY GROUND AND UNGROUNDED) 1. Check for loose or defective spark plug wire.
• Accessory noises
TO FUSE BLOCK ~ 2. Check for defective spark plug.
3. Move all wiring away from HEI and spark
• CB Antennas and noise OR SOURCE OF NOISE
plug wires.
• Computer noise
4. Reroute spark plug wires laying against any-
• Windshield Antennas thing that could possibly transmit noise to
• Shielding of wiring and components the Radio (car wiring or sensor leads that
• Locating vehicle noise travel into the passenger compartment).
5. Replace distributor cap and rotor.
~ 6. Check the ground from engine to firewall;
14 VOLT LINE TO RADIO install a braided ground strap if necessary.
" ' TO STEERING (IGNITION OR MEMORY)
BRAIOEO GROUND COLUMN 7. Install a braided ground strap on the hood.
STRAP
8. Check heater core ground; clean or install
Figure 2 . Install a 1224205 filter package. braided ground strap if necessay.
9. Check air conditioner accumulator ground;
clean or install a braided ground strap if
necessary.
BROWN FIELD WIRE
250 MFD

Figure 1 - Cut the BLACK (ground) wire from

the black plug at the back of the Radio and
run a braided ground strap from the case of the
Radio to a good, unpainted body ground.
100V CAPACITOR
AL TERNATOR
OUTPUT LEAD
00
Figure 3 - Install a 250 MF 0 100V capacitor on tIM
»
I
alternator output lead and/or the BROWN
field wire of the alternator to ground.
(Continued on next page)
 00
RADIO l>

(Continued from previous page)

SYMPTOM
Harsh popping noise that changes with engine
NOISE SYMPTOM TABLE

Ignition noise
POSSIBLE CAUSE REPAIR ACTION
Perform the steps under Ignition Noise, page
-
o
I

U1

rpm
High whine (like a siren) that changes with
enginerpm
Noise occurs only when an accessory is on
All stations weak, noisy, both AM and FM
AM only, weak & noisy
FM only, weak & noisy
Noise present with engine not running
Noise that stops when Antenna is unplugged
,from back of Radio
00
150-7
Generator noise Add filter package 1224205 to 14volt and/or
memory lead to the Radio (See Fig 2, page 150-7)
By-pass the generator output anJor the bi-field
wire of the Generator with 250MFD 100 v
capacitor (See Fig 3, page 150-7)
Exchange the defective Radio with a good
Radio. If noise disappears, send the defective
Radio for repair
Install a dedicated ground strap on the Radio
(See Fig 1, page 150-7)
Run a direct wire from Battery to Generator
Replace Generator
Condition in that accessory Install filter package 1224205 in the power
lead(s) to that accessory (See Fig 2, page 150-7)
Consult Delco Sound Service Guide
Defective Antenna or lead-in wire Temporarily replace the Antenna with another
one. Repair/replace the defective one if the Radio
reception improves
Check at the Antenna Coax Lead-in and the
connector
AM alignment Remove Radio for repair
FM alignment Remove Radio for repair
ECM or Digital Cluster Install filter package 1224205 in the power leads
to the Electronic Control Module (ECM)
Instrument Panel Digital Cluster
Antenna noise Replace defective Antenna with a good Antenna
If noise disappears repair/replace the defective
Antenna
Check Antenna ground
Check Coaxial Cable Braid and grounds at
connectors
If noise persists with replacement Antenna, the
problem must be repaired at the source of noise
(Generator, Ignition System, accessory, etc). See ."
;;;
Delco Sound Service Guide for noise "snifting" ~
procedures o
RADIO -n
iii
::D
o
CIRCUIT OPERATION
The Radio Fuse provides main power to the Audio Outputs. Amplifier gain is controlled by
Radio and to the Power Antenna. With the the Performance Sound Control. The Subwoofer
Ignition Switch in ACCY or RUN, voltage is Amplifier applies a signal voltage of 8 volts to the
applied to the Radio Fuse and the YEL wire to Performance Sound Control. The gain voltage
the On-Off Switch in the Radio. The circuit is will vary between 3.5 and 8.0 volts at terminal 9
grounded at G201. With the On-Off Switch as the Performance Sound Control is moved
closed, voltage is applied to the Radio Fuse, between the Minimum and Maximum positions.
Radio Switch (Power Antenna), and the Solid- The Subwoofer Amplifier then adjusts the audio
State Radio circuits to ground. Two wires con- output to the Subwoofer Speaker.
nect each speaker to the Radio.
The ETR Radio has two inputs that other
models do not have: Dim Display Signal and
Clock Power.
The ETR model is an AM/FM Radio that
changes stations electronically. The frequencies
of pre-selected stations can be stored in the
electronic memory. The ETR model also pro-
vides digital display of time or station frequency.
As in other models, the Light Switch controls
panel light dimming. In the ETR model, dim-
ming is also controlled by the Radio itself by
means of the Dim Display Input Signal.
The ETR model's clock memory and Radio
memory functions are powered at all times
through the BAT Fuse. If power to the ETR
model is cut off by disconnecting the Battery, for
example, the operator must reset the memory
functions when power is restored.
The Subwoofer Speaker System consists of a
Subwoofer Amplifier, Subwoofer Speaker and a
Performance Sound Control located in the Dome
Lights Module. Voltage is applied to the Sub- co
:t>
woofer Amplifier at terminals 3 and 13 whenever I
the Radio is on. The Amplifier is grounded at ......
G201 at terminal 14. There are eight audio inputs en
o
to the Subwoofer Amplifier from the Radio
COMPONENT LOCATION VIEWS co
l>
I
N
o~
HOOD TRUNK
LID o

LH "A"
PILLAR
ENGINE
COMPARTMENT

LH LH "B"
SHROUD PILLAR
REAR
BULKHEAD

"TI
Figure A . Body Component Locations iii
:D
o
COMPONENT LOCATION VIEWS ."
m
~
o

THROTTLE ELECTRONIC
POSITION SPARK TIMING (EST)
SENSOR DISTRIBUTOR

IDLE AIR
CONTROL VALVE

12AC2

Figure B- RH Front Of Engine Compartment

COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR

G501 ---...tIIi.-J.~

co
C507
»
I
N
12HC60 12AC3
o.....
Figure A - LH Top Of VIN 9 Engine Figure C - RH Front Of VIN 9 Engine, Near Dipstick
COMPONENT LOCATION VIEWS co
l>
I
N
o
~
MANIFOLD AIR G505
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR

S516 S502 FUSIBLE

S511 LINK G 12HC58 12LC12

Figure A . Lower RH Front Of VIN 9 Engine Figure C· LH Front Corner Of Engine Compartment Figure E· RH Front Of Engine Compartment

~'\~
MAP SENSOR AIC HIGH
PRESSURE
«~~ ~~~ CUT·OUT
()I- ~« SWITCH
~=f~'-frl( - ELECTRONIC CONNECTOR
VACUUM
REGULATOR
VALVE

AIC HIGH
i
PRESSURE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
SWITCH 12HC57
SWITCH
CONNECTOR
12HC59
ji STEERING
COLUMN
SUPPORT
12HC47
."
;;;
Figure B· RH Top Of VIN 9 Engine Figure D . Lower Front Of VIN 9 Engine Figure F . Behind lIP, LH Side Of Steering Column ::0
o
COMPONENT LOCATION VIEWS

FUSE DEFOGGER
REAR BLOCK TIMER
BULKHEAD RELAY

~
S208
S210
S211
S212
12HC35

.
FIgure C . Behind Cluster .
FIgure E . Above Brake Pedal

~
G203
FUSE BLOCK
12HC40
L__-;:::-;:-Rj·;;t (JOltt SS1teering Column
Figure B· Un der Front Of Consol, . d LH Side ot lIP
Figure D . Behm Figure F . Rlgh
COMPONENT LOCATION VIEWS (Xl
»
I
N
IN-LINE
o
~

DIODE REMOTE
, LOCATION DIMMER
, / .....
'
/
/'
.' ...... "-
- ,~

MODE
C200 DOOR
ACTUATOR - -
C209 12HC39 12HC33 12HC20

Figure A - Behind LH Side Of liP Figure C - Behind Center Of liP Figure E - Below Center Of liP

TURN FLASHER C2l0 HEADLIGHT

(TURN-HAZARD & DIMMER
IGNITION KEY SWITCH AND
WARNING) CONNECTOR

LH STEERING
COLUMN
BRACKET 12HC27 12HC26 12CC13
"T1
Figure D - Center Of Steering Column Figure F - Top LH Of Steering Column iii
Figure B- Left Of Steering Column :0
o
." COMPONENT LOCATION VIEWS !!
m
;0
o

ELECTRONIC TACHOMETER
CONTROL ~~"'-FILTER
MODULE S512 (VIN R)
(ECM) S517

ASSEMBLY LINE
DIAGNOSTIC LINK
(ALDL) CONNECTOR

12JC8

Figure B - Top LH Rear Of VIN 9 Engine

TRUNK
RELEASE
RELAY

S217 S514 DECK

S507 LID
RELEASE
ECM CONNECTORS CONNECTOR
00
RH STEERING »
COLUMN I
BRACKET N
12HC54 12HC28
o
~
Figure A · Between Seats, Rear Bulkhead Figure C - Below LH Side Of lIP
COMPONENT LOCATION VIEWS 00
»
I
N
o
~

00

1
S214

\ liP
DIMMER
6N4C5

Figure B - Behind Carpet Support, Between Seats

PARKING
SWITCH BRAKE
CONNECTOR SWITCH

TO RH
SIDE OF
STEERING S205
COLUMN
S201 TO LH SIDE
S202 OF STEERING
S203 COLUMN

12HC19 12JC6
"T\
iii
Figure A - Behind LH Side Of liP Figure C - At Base Of Parking Brake :xl
o
COMPONENT LOCATION VIEWS ."
iii
:;g
o

CJ02

12HC81

Figure B· Above RH Rear Wheel Well

00
ENGINE »
BLOWER I
RELAY N
12HC73 12HC84
o
~
Figure A . LH Side Of Passenger Compartment Figure C· RH Front Corner Of Trunk
-" COMPONENT LOCATION VIEWS co
l>
I
N
o
.....
WASHER
CRUISE CUT-OFF
PUMP
CONNECTORS

Figure B RH 0 12HCll
- Side Of Front Bulkhead

CLUTCH AlC COMPRESSOR

CONTROL ____ .. FUEL
START RELAY ~ PUMP RELAY
g,'VITCH I 'I
~ )
CJ BRAKE
g,'VITCH
CONNECTOR
.,('-9.
CRUISE 0.,(' 04'
CLUTCH CRUISE C'.~
g,'VITCH BRAKE 4-9~
g,'VITCH

12HC43 F" 12HC55 ."

I e Of liP
Figure A - Below LH SOd m
Igure C - LH Front Of Engme
. Compartment ::J:I
o
'\) COMPONENT LOCATION VIEWS

TURN-HAZARD IGNITION KEY

SWITCH WARNING SWITCH
ASSEMBLY (IN COLUMN)

ClOD
HAZARD
HIGH SPEED BUTTON
BLDWER RELAY ASSEMBLY
BLOWER
RESISTORS 12CC12
12HCS . l

Figure A - RH Side Of Front Compartment Figure C - Top RH Side Of Steering Column

~ S207 = S20G HlON1 . .

-=:::::::::::: f CJ\R"
'- - -
~~~~~~ IGNITION
SWITCH
:k::::~~\,UJIIJI . CON NEeTO R

~~J""""-C500

00
C502 »
FUSIBLE LINK E / I
FUSIBLE LINK F C235 N
12HC37.1 12HC26 o
...,\

Figure B - RH Front Of Engine Compartment Figure D - RH Side Of Steering Column .....

.....
 00
"tJ COMPONENT LOCATION VIEWS l>
I
N
o
~
AlC POWER PRESSURE CYCLING
RELAY SWITCH

HEADLIGHT
DOOR MOTOR
CONNECTOR

HIGH SPEED
BLOWER RELAY

r1r~~---- __ Gl0l LH
Gl02 RH
Figure B- RH Front OF Dash
12HC10

BRAKE PRESSURE
SWITCH

TO HEADLIGHT
DOOR MODULE

12HC3 12HC7
!!
m
Figure A- LH Front of Car Figure C - LH Rear Corner Of Front Compartment ::g
o
 ."
" COMPONENT LOCATION VIEWS iii
~
o

FUSIBLE LINK C
FUSIBLE LINK 0

VACUUM RElEASE
SOLENOID
CRUISE
CONTROL
SERVO

ClOD
12HC6

Figure B- LH Corner Of Front Compartment

S406
S403
S404

S402
S401

00
l>
I
N
12HC79 12HC75 o....
Figure A- Rear Of Car Figure C- Rear of Car .....
w
 00
-" COMPONENT LOCATION VIEWS :t>
I
N
o
...10

C247

HAZARD
FLASHER
12HC31

Figure B - Behind liP

HOOD AJAR /
SWITCH WIPER MOTOR
LOCATION . :~ (MODULE WITH PULSE)
'" - ~~ ~,-

RADIO
CONNECTOR RH SPEAKER
CONNECTOR

12HC46
F- 12HC13 ."
Igure C- Front Compartment, Center Of Bulkhead iii
Figure A - Center Of liP ::JJ
o
~ COMPONENT LOCATION VIEWS !!
m
~
o

S306
S223

lH
SHROUO

00
MIRRORS FEED »
CONNECTOR AT C304 RH SHROUD I
C200 (BlK) MIRRORS N
CONTROL SWITCH
o
...10

CONNECTOR
11 -03 -04-2
....C1I
Figure A . Front Of Passenger Compartment
-0 COMPONENT LOCATION VIEWS 00
~
I
N
o
......
S311 ....
S312 C201 en

DOOR LOCK
RELAY ASSEMBLY
CONNECTORS

POWER
WINDOW RH
SWITCH SHROUD
'S301
CONNECTORS S314 ."
11030206 iii
lJ
-Figure -A· Behind liP, Power Windows And Power Door Locks Harness o
 ."
-0 COMPONENT LOCATION VIEWS iii
::D
o

LH
"A"
PILLAR

GENERATOR~ ~~~--~- C500

DIODE
LOCATION
co
J>
I
I\)
12HC14 o
~

Figure A - Center Of Passenger Compartment

." COMPONENT LOCATION VIEWS co
l>
I
f\)
o
~

...
co

)
(if' C303 lH
C304 RH 12HC72

Figure A - lH Door, RH Door Similar

."
iii
:lJ
o
 co
HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES: C100 »
I
--< N
o
N
D o

•..

BlK BlK BlK

/34001.0
(100

WIRE COLOR
WIRE COLOR
SCHEMATIC-PAGE CAVITY PIN SOCKET SCHEMATIC-PAGE
CAVITY PIN SOCKET
HALF HALF
HALF HALF
E3 TAN TAN Air Conditioning: Blower Controls - 63-0
A1 DRN DRN Wiper/Washer - 90-0
Air Conditioning: Compressor Controls - 64-0 E4 RED RED Air Conditioning: Blower Controls - 63-0
A2 lTGRN lTGRN
A3 lTGRN (l4 lTBlU Air Conditioning: Compressor Controls - 64-0 F6 TAN/WHT TAN/WHT Brake Warning System - 41-0
VINRI F7 IT GRN/BlK lTGRN/BlK Coolant Fan - 31-2
A3 lTBlU (V6 lTBlU Air Conditioning: Compressor Controls, 64-0 F8 BRN/WHT BRN Coolant fan - 31-0
VIN 91 F9 OK GRN/WHT OK GRN/WHT Coolant Fan - 31-0
A4 BlK BlK Ground Distribution - 14-1 F10 BRN BRN Exterior Lights: Turn/Hazard/Park/Front Marker/
A5 PNK BlK/WHT Air Conditioning: Blower Controls - 63-0 Stop/High level Stop - 110-0

B1 WHT WHT Wiper/Washer - 90-0 G6 RED RED Power Distribution - 10-0

B2 BRN DRN Air Conditioning: Blower Controls - 63-0 G7 - - (Not Usedl
B3 lTGRN YEl Air Conditioning: Blower Controls - 63-0 G8 RED RED Coolant Fan - 31-0

C1 PPl PPl Wiper/Washer - 90-0 H6 DKGRN DKGRN Horn - 40-0

C2 BRN BRN Interior Lights: Console and Underhood - 114-1 H7 - - (Not Usedl
C3 PNK PNK Wiper/Washer - 90-0 H8 OK BlU OK BlU Exterior lights: Turn/Hazard/Park/Front Marker/
Stop/High level Stop - 110-0
01 GRY GRY Wiper/Washer - 90-0
H9 lTBlU lTBlU Exterior Lights: Turn/Hazard/Park/Front Marker/
02 BRN BRN Air Conditioning: Blower Controls - 63-0
Instrument Panel: Indicators Cluster Hood/Trunk/ Stop/High level Stop - 110-0
03 DKGRN DKGRN

DRN DRN
Door Ajar Indicator - 80-2
Air Conditioning: Blower Controls - 63-0
J6
J7
WHT
TAN
WHT
TAN
Headlight Doors - 102-0
Headlights - 100-0 ."iii
E1
E2 lTBlU lTBlU Air Conditioning: Blower Controls - 63-0 J8 lTGRN lTGRN Headlights - 100-0 :D
J9 YEl YEl Headlight Doors - 102-0 o
HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES: C500 ."iii
::g
--< o

o c

.•..

o o;:::::.a~I 0
9

;lr.i~

H G
.J \... -
I
BLK HH BLK BLK
V34002.0
(500

WIRE COLOR WIRE COLOR

CAVITY PIN SOCKET SCHEMATIC-PAGE CAVITY PIN SOCKET SCHEMATIC-PAGE
HALF HALF HALF HALF
A1 - - (Not Used) E4 - - (Not Used)
A2 BLK (L4 VIN R) BLK Ground Distribution - 14-1 F6 TAN TAN Cruise Control: Vacuum - 34-1
A2 DK GRN (V6 BLK Ground Distribution - 14-1 F7 BRN BRN Exterior Lights: Tail/Rear Marker/License - 110-3
VIN 9) F8 WHT/ORN WHT Instrument Panel: Indicators Cluster Hood/Trunk/
A3 - - (Not Used) Door Ajar Indicator - 80-2
A4 YEL YEL Starter and Charging System - 30-0 F9 LTGRN LTGRN Backup Lights - 112-0
A5 - - (Not Used) F10 DK GRN/WHT DK GRN/WHT Coolant Fan - 31-0
B1 BRN/WHT BRN Starter and Charging System - 30-1 G6 LT BLU/BLK LT BLU/BLK Cruise Control: Vacuum - 34-1
B2 - - (Not Used) G7 WHT WHT Exterior Lights: Turn/Hazard/Park/Front Marker/
B3 BRN BRN Starter and Charging System - 30-0 Stop/High Level Stop - 110-0
C1 DKBLU DKBLU Backup Lights - 112-0 G8 BRN/WHT BRN Exterior lights: Rear Pontiac Emblem - 110-5
C2 DK GRN/YEL LTGRN Instrument Panel: Indicators Cluster - 80-0 H6 DK BLU DKBLU Cruise Control: Vacuum - 34-1
C3 WHT WHT Instrument Panel: Indicators Cluster - 80-0 H7 YEL YEL Exterior Lights: Turn/Hazard/Park/Stop - 110-2
WHT Exterior Lights: Turn/HazardlPark/Front Marker/ co
D1
D2
DK GRN/WHT
LT GRN/BLK
DK GRN/WHT
LT GRN/BLK
Coolant Fan - 31-0
Coolant Fan - 31-2
H8 WHT
Stop/High Level Stop - 110-0 »
D3 DKGRN DKGRN Instrument Panel: Indicators Cluster - 80-0 H9 ORN ORN/DK BLU Interior lights: Cigar lighter, Clock and Trunk Light I
- 114-0
E1 LTGRN LTGRN Backup Lights - 112-0 N
E2
E3
PPL
PNK (L4 VIN R)
PPL
PNK
Starter and Charging System - 30-1
Electronic Fuel Injection: Ignition - 20-0
J6
J7
LTGRN
PPL
LTGRN
LTGRN/BLK
Cruise Control:
Cruise Control:
Vacuum - 34-1
Vacuum - 34-1
o
Exterior Lights: Turn/HazardlPark/Stop - 110-2
N
E3 RUST (V6VIN PNK Multi-port Fuel Injection: Ignition - 21-0 J8 DKGRN DKGRN
9) J9 LTBLU LTBLU Exterior Lights: Turn/Hazard/Park/Stop - 110-2 ....•
 00
HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES »
I
N
NOT USED
o
N
N
WHf

DEFOGGER ~~ INTERIOR LIGHTS:

:L.....!........; DOMEfREADIiNG

=E3;::::::::;:
~
WHT
POWER
DOOR
LOCKS
PGRV
POWER DOOR
LOCKS. ~II ' II~,m 0>"
DEFOGGER

NOT USED
It§ WHT INTERIOR LIGHTS.
POWER REMOTE
MIRRORS
BLU ~

R
POWER
WINDOWS
p
BLK
NOT USED
WHT

POWER
POWER REMOTE
WINDOWS
ilL-
••• :1 IIG] MIRRORS

BLU BLK

WHT WHI

(200
V 180040

."in
~
o
HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES ."
m
::lI:I
o
--<+-
- ~LJ'\'l I --<~
ElB BE] (245, SEE (201

ElEl
ElEl
GEl
ElEl
ElEl
ElG ,
BlK
~
BlK --<+-
BlK BlK
(209
I V02007.B
CI:JOIIl
(201 ~
V08000.E

BlK l I --<+- I GRY BlK

El~B B~E]II
• IF

I (247
V12000.1

1 111 sm ElEl
ElEl ElEl
WHT
I -'1 GEl ElGH I -<+-
1 I
BlK BlK I
(211

BlK
t I V08006.0

I
~

BlK
~

WHT I~
I
(248 N
0
V02002.5
N
I
(203
v 1500 1.5
I I W
HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES ~
I
N
o
N
I

C308, SEE C307 ~

(304, SEE (303

BLK BLK

(250
V040 10 .0

BLK BLK

BLK BLK (315

;010 1 8.3

(255 (L4 VIN R ONLY), SEE (201 (305

1040110

(316,SEE C315

IT
[!] E:m:m:UD[!:mJ 0 TI wiT
~ ~
ctgg ~ t
BLK
BLK BLK
BLK BLK
(303
V04006.S (307 (401
: OHOOS 0
V02010.3 ."
in
::a
o
 ."
HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES iii
:::a
o
--«+(--

BLK BLK

AlC COMPRESSOR CONTROL RELA Y AIC LOW PRESSURE SWITCH

12041137

BLK BLK

C520
AIC POWER RELA Y. SEE AIC
1106008 .0
COMPRESSOR CONTROL RELA Y

BLK

AIC CONTROL HEAD

12015130

Jr--lr
ML I( J H G
.r,
0 0
A Be 0 E I="
u
BLK
BLK
AIC COMPRESSOR CLUTCH
2973407
ASSEMBLY LINE DIAGNOSTIC LINK
(ALDL) CONNECTOR
12010043
~
BLK I
N
AIC HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH o
12041139
N
(J1
HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES co
l>
I
N
o
N

BLK

B CLUTCH START SWITCH

BLK
12015034
BLK
BACK UP LIGHT SWITCH
12015792 BRAKE PRESSURE SWITCH
120 10070 COLD START INJECTOR,
SEE COLD START SWITCH

BRAKE SWITCH
SEE CRUISE CLUTCH SWITCH

BLK

COLD START SWITCH

GRY 12048039

BLOWER RESISTORS C2 BLU

C1 BLK
02965019

BRAKE SWITCH
V002690

EJ
m[TI[OGJCEJO
D~mm0° o
BUZZER
BLK BLK
BLK
BLOWER SWITCH CLOCK (C208)
"TI
12020813 8900444 CONVENIENCE CENTER ;;;
;g
12015999
o
 "T1
HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES in
::tI
o

BLK BLK WHT

COOLANT FAN (WITH VOS) COOLANT FAN RELA Y CRUISE CLUTCH SWITCH
(WITHOUT VOS) 12010649
1201 5664
'JO OO 13 .0

BLK

COOLANT TEMPERA TU RE SENSOR

120407';3
BLK WHT

COOLANT FAN (WITHOUT VOS) CRUISE CONTROL MODULE

1203)769
, 2034125

BLK

COOLANT TEMPERATURE SWITCH/SENDER

12033709

BLK
GRY
COOLANT FAN RELA Y (WITH VOS) ~
GRY CRUISE CONTROL SERVO I
12020028
12020646 N
CRUISE BRAKE SWITCH
o
N
2977373
HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES 00
l>
I
N
o
N
DOME READING LIGHTS, SEE CLOCK (C208) 00

BLK BLK

DEFOGGER CONTROL DOOR LOCK MOTORS

12015163 12004140

BLK

DOME READING LIGHTS

(WITH AMPLIFIER SWITCH)
V0012 23

C1 BLK C2 GRY

DOOR LOCK RElAY ASSEMBLY

BLK
V00213.0

DEFOGGER TIMER-RElAY
12004099

~
BLK
~
DOOR AJAR SWITCH (LH)
12048457
BLK

DOOR LOCK SWITCH (LH)

12015683

C1 BLK C2 BLK

DIRECT IGNITION MODULE

DOOR AJAR SWITCH (RH), DOOR LOCK SWITCH (RH),
SEE DOOR AJAR SWITCH (LH) on
SEE DOOR LOCK SWITCH (LH) m
::tI
o
HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES !!
m
::a
o

DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDD[]DDDDDs
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

9 C2 BLK
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDC DDDDDD[lDDDDDA
H3BH
7
8
18
17

~~
6
C1 BLK C2 BLK
1 14
12 13 ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULE (ECM)
(V6 VIN 9)
'10005" 0

...

C1
BLK
WHT/RED BLK
ELECTRONIC SPARK TIMING
(EST) DISTRIBUTOR ELECTRONIC VACUUM REGULATOR VALVE
, 2040753 (EVRV) 12015797

ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULE

(ECM) (L4 VIN R)
V002120 WHT
BLK 00
l>
ELECTRONIC SPARK TIMING
ENGINE BLOWER MOTOR I
12015271 N
(EST) DISTRIBUTOR (C506) o
12040754
.
N
U)
 00
HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES ~
I
N
o
N
...
o
ENGINE BLOWER RelAY, SEE
AIC COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY
BLK GRY

FUel TANK AND SENDER (C502) GENERATOR (V6 VIN 9)

12020827 V00220 .0

FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR (LH),

SEE DOOR LOCK MOTORS

WHT
FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR (RH),
SEE DOOR LOCK MOTORS BLK HEADLIGHT (LH)
6288471

GEAR SELECTOR SWITCH

12034169

HEADLIGHT (RH)
SEE HEADLIGHT (LH)

BLK

FUel INJECTOR (L4 VIN R)

V00040 .0
m~1 P !. L I F Is I~~
I:::::::::::l

BLK
FUel PUMP RELA Y, SEE AlC
COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY . BLK
GENERATOR (L4 VIN R)
12045896
HEADLIGHT DIMMER SWITCH ."
8917643
m
::D
o
 ."
HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES m
::1:1
o

BlK
BLK
C2 BlK HEATER CONTROL HEAD LIGHT
2977647
IDLE AIR CONTROL MOTOR (V6 VIN 9)
120 15798

C1 BlK

GRY/BlK

HIGH lEVEL STOP LIGHT C2 BlK

12020809

HEADLIGHT DOOR MODULE

V00207.0

HIGH SPEED BLOWER RELA Y, SEE

AIC COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY

C1 GRY

IGNITION COil (V6 VIN 9)

V003670

00
BlK l>
GRY
I
N
HEADLIGHT DOOR MOTOR IDLE AIR CONTROL MOTOR (l4 VIN R) o
12015378
. 20.:1[} 154 N
......
HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES 00
~
I
N
o
N

WHT

C1 BLK C2 BLU
UGHTSWITCH
WHT
IGNITION SWITCH ; 2034061

VOOOI9 .0 MODE DOOR ACTUATOR

8900443

r- G1ElBElEJD ~ ~
~
c::::J c:::::J c::::::::l
ElElE1BE1B ~
~
u GRN BLK

C2 BLK MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER (C235)

PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR 12020651
V00222.0

ElElEl EJElBEl GEl

E] E] EJ.--EJ ElEl E1 El B

C1 BLK C3 BLK
BLK
GRY
INSTRUMENT PANel
V00221 .0 OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
MANIFOLD AIR TEMPERATURE
06288920 on
(MAT) SENSOR m
;Q
12041411
o
HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES ."
iii
:J:I
o

BlK
BlK
OUTSIDE AIR/RECIRCULATION
DOOR ACTUATOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH (lH) GRY
V00368.0 12004139

RADIO
V00361.1

RADIO SPEAKERS, SEE CLOCK (C208)

WHT
BlK
POWER WINDOW SWITCH (RH)
OUTSIDE MIRROR (lH) C310 12004101
VOOl19 .0

OUTSIDE MIRROR (RH) C311, BlK

SEE OUTSIDE MIRROR (lH) C310
RAllY GAGE PANEL
V00337.1

rail ~ IJQJj I 0 IiI:]

WHT
BlK ePi A ItYJJl 0 I~
~
PRESSURE CYCLING SWITCH WHT I
PANEl INTERIOR
'20048.u N
LIGHTS CONTROL
REMOTE DIMMER
o
12034060 N
12034060
 '00
HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES l>
I
N
o

13020"0
..
N

605010
908070 (~
112011010<0 BlK
IS01101:()
BlK
TRUNK AJAR SWITCH
V00127.6
THROTTLE POSITION
SENSOR (TPS)
V00041.0
WHT

SUB-WOOFER AMPLIFIER
,2034325

II~G~I 4; BlK
IJEJ00 [I
BlK

TRUNK RELEASE RElA Y

BlK
02984164
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR (V6 VIN 9)
TACHOMETER FilTER (C511) 12015793
06288248

q0Gp
BlK
BlK BlU
UNDERHOOD LIGHT
TRANSAXlE CONVERTER CLUTCH
THROTTLE POSITION
SOLENOID
8900863
."m
SENSOR (l4 VIN R) ::g
V00041.0 12015390
o
HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES "TI
in
:a
o

BlK

VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR

12015792

GRY

WINDSHielD WIPER
SWITCH (C207)
12010430

~
I
N
o
N
~ HARNESS ROUTING VIEWS !!
m
:ll
V6 VIN 9 o

SYMBOLS

CONNECTOR
~

.1
CONVENIENCE / / C500
CENTER

I
I
I
I
I
I
II I
=>
I ~\
+- I ..
GROMMET

HARNESS
I I
I I
@
I
I
CD
I

IT
C203 I
10 10

I
I
I

NUMBER HARNESS NAME

(MAIN HARNESS)
1
INSTRUMENT PANEL
2 ENGINE 00
3 AIR CONDITIONING »
I
4 FORWARD LAMP
N
5 BODY REAR o
W
....•